Quantum DLT2700xt User's Manual

Add to my manuals
345 Pages

advertisement

Quantum DLT2700xt User's Manual | Manualzz
®
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700
Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Product Manual
Date: 19 January 96
Order Number: 81-109132-03
Quantum reserves the right to make changes and improvements to its products, without
incurring any obligation to incorporate such changes or improvements in units previously sold
or shipped.
You can request Quantum publications from your Quantum Sales Representative, or order them
directly from Quantum.
Publication Number: 81-109132-03
SERVICE CENTERS
Quantum Service Center
715 Sycamore Avenue
Milpitas, California 95035
Phone (408) 894-4000
Fax: (408) 894-3218
Quantum Gmbh
Genferstrasse 4B
60437 Frankfurt am Main 56
Germany
Phone: (49) 69-509-1080
Fax: (49) 69-509-10891
CompacTape
DLT
Quantum Asia-Pacific Pte.
Ltd.
50 Tagore Lane #b1-04
Singapore, 2678
Phone: (65) 450-9333
Fax (65) 452-2544
is a trademark of Quantum Corporation.
is a trademark of Quantum Corporation.
Copyright 1996 by Quantum Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.
The following FCC Notice applies to the DLT2000 drive:
FCC NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in residential installation. Any
changes or modifications made to this equipment may void the user’s authority to operate this
equipment.
This equipment generates, uses, and radiates radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1.
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
3.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver
is connected.
4.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. The shielded
interconnect cable shipped with the unit should not be altered or modified in any way. The
unit shipped without a shielded interconnect cable must use a shielded interconnect cable.
The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission
helpful: How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems. This booklet is
available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington D.C., 20402. Stock No. 00400398-5.
All external I/O cables connecting to this unit need to be shielded. See the User Manual or
installation instructions for more options.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions set out in
the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
This equipment is in the 2nd Class Category (information equipment to be used in a residential
area or an adjacent area thereto) and conforms to the standards set by the Voluntary Control
Council For Interference by Data Processing Equipment and Electronic Office Machines aimed
at preventing radio interference in such residential area.
This equipment meets or exceeds requirements for safety in the U.S. (UL 1950), Canada (CSA
C22.2 N0. 950) and Europe (EN60950/IEC 950) requirements, and is certified to bear the GS
mark by TUV.
The following FCC Notice applies to DLT2500 and DLT2700 mini-library:
FCC NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Any changes or modifications made to this
equipment may void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be
required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference. The shielded
interconnect cable shipped with the unit should not be altered or modified in any way. The unit
shipped without a shielded cable must use a shielded interconnect cable.
Warning! This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Achtung! Dieses ist ein Gerat der Funkstorgenzwertklasse A. In Wohnbereicghen konnen bei
Betrieb dieses Gerates Runfunkstorungen auftreten, in welchen Fallen der Benutzer fur
entsprechende GengenmaBnahmen verantwortlich ist.
Attention! Ceci est un produit de Classe A. Dans un environment domestique, ce produit
risque de creer des interferences radioelectriques, il appartiendra alors a l'utilisateur de prendre
les mesures specifiques appropriees.
Table of Contents
.
CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW AND FEATURES OF THE DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700
PRODUCT
1.1 IN THIS CHAPTER .............................................................................................................1-1
1.2 PRODUCT OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................1-1
1.3 FAST DATA TRANSFER RATE ...........................................................................................1-2
1.4 HIGH-CAPACITY ...............................................................................................................1-2
1.5 COMPACTION ...................................................................................................................1-2
1.6 STRONG MEDIA ................................................................................................................1-2
1.7 COMPATIBILITY ................................................................................................................1-2
1.8 FIRMWARE UPDATE CAPABILITY......................................................................................1-3
1.9 EMBEDDED DIAGNOSTICS ................................................................................................1-3
.
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLING AND CONFIGURING THE DLT2000
2.1 IN THIS CHAPTER .............................................................................................................2-1
2.2 PREPARE FOR THE INSTALLATION ....................................................................................2-1
2.2.1 Before You Start.....................................................................................................2-1
2.2.2 Installation Setup ....................................................................................................2-2
2.2.3 Site Setup................................................................................................................2-2
2.2.4 Site Guidelines........................................................................................................2-2
2.3 INSTALL THE SUBSYSTEM ................................................................................................2-4
2.4 CONFIGURE THE DLT2000 TABLETOP .............................................................................2-4
2.4.1 Configuration Guidelines........................................................................................2-4
2.4.2 DISABLE PARITY Checking................................................................................2-5
2.4.3 Changing the SCSI ID ............................................................................................2-5
2.5 CONNECT THE CABLES .....................................................................................................2-5
2.5.1 Examine the DLT2000 Rear Panel .........................................................................2-6
2.5.2 Connect the SCSI Signal Cable ..............................................................................2-6
2.5.3 Terminate the SCSI Bus .........................................................................................2-7
2.5.4 Connect the Power Cord.........................................................................................2-7
2.6 TEST THE INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................2-8
2.6.1 Run POST...............................................................................................................2-8
2.6.2 What to Do after POST ..........................................................................................2-9
2.7 DLT2000 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART...........................................................................2-10
.
CHAPTER 3: CONFIGURING AND OPERATING THE DLT2000
3.1 IN THIS CHAPTER .............................................................................................................3-1
3.2 BEFORE YOU INSTALL THE DLT2000 DRIVE ...................................................................3-1
3.2.1 Disabling Parity Checking ......................................................................................3-2
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem-v
Table of Contents
3.2.2 Changing the SCSI ID ............................................................................................3-4
3.2.3 Setting the TRM ENB (Single-ended only)/TRM PWR Jumpers...........................3-5
3.2.4 Locating the SCSI Cable and Power Connectors....................................................3-6
3.3 SELECTING DENSITY ........................................................................................................3-7
3.4 OVERVIEW OF THE FRONT PANEL...................................................................................3-10
3.5 DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ...............................................................3-11
3.5.1 Beeper...................................................................................................................3-11
3.5.2 Unload Button.......................................................................................................3-11
3.5.3 Cartridge Insert/Release Handle ...........................................................................3-11
3.5.4 Indicator Action during Power-On Self Test and Operation.................................3-12
3.6 DESCRIPTION OF THE TAPE CARTRIDGE .........................................................................3-17
3.6.1 Cartridge Write-Protect Switch.............................................................................3-17
3.6.2 Data Protection .....................................................................................................3-19
3.7 LOADING A CARTRIDGE ..................................................................................................3-20
3.7.1 Tape in Use...........................................................................................................3-22
3.8 USING THE CLEANING TAPE CARTRIDGE ........................................................................3-23
3.9 UNLOADING A CARTRIDGE .............................................................................................3-24
3.10 PRESERVING CARTRIDGES ............................................................................................3-26
.
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING AND OPERATING THE DLT2500 MINI-LIBRARY
4.1 IN THIS CHAPTER .............................................................................................................4-1
4.2 INTRODUCTION TO THE MINI-LIBRARY.............................................................................4-6
4.3 CONFIGURE THE DLT2500...............................................................................................4-7
4.3.1 Configuration guidelines.........................................................................................4-7
4.3.2 Connecting the SCSI Signal Cable .........................................................................4-7
4.4 INSTALLATION TESTING ....................................................................................................4-8
4.4.1 Run POST...............................................................................................................4-8
4.4.2 What to Do after POST ..........................................................................................4-8
4.5 OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL ............................................................................................4-9
4.6 KEY LOCK ......................................................................................................................4-13
4.6.1 OCP, locked or OCP, Disabled.............................................................................4-13
4.6.2 OCP, Unlocked or Enabled...................................................................................4-13
4.6.3 SCSI ID, setting ....................................................................................................4-13
4.7 SELECTING DENSITY .......................................................................................................4-14
4.7.1 Front panel, density select ....................................................................................4-15
4.7.2 Host selection, density ..........................................................................................4-16
4.7.3 Native default, density ..........................................................................................4-16
4.8 DEFAULT OPERATING MODES .........................................................................................4-17
4.8.1 Mode, normal........................................................................................................4-17
4.8.2 Density Select Mode.............................................................................................4-18
4.8.3 SCSI ID Select Mode ...........................................................................................4-19
4.8.4 Code update mode ................................................................................................4-19
4.9 DESCRIPTION OF THE TAPE CARTRIDGE .........................................................................4-20
vi-DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Table of Contents
4.9.1 Tape Cartridge, positioning the write-protect switch............................................4-20
4.9.2 Data protection .....................................................................................................4-21
4.10 DESCRIPTION OF THE MAGAZINE..................................................................................4-22
4.10.1 Insert cartridge, magazine...................................................................................4-23
4.10.2 Removing cartridge ............................................................................................4-25
4.10.3 Magazine, removing from mini-library...............................................................4-26
4.10.4 Magazine, installing............................................................................................4-26
4.10.5 Selecting a Cartridge from the Magazine ...........................................................4-27
4.10.6 Loading cartridge into the Drive.........................................................................4-27
4.10.7 Unloading cartridge from the drive ....................................................................4-28
4.10.8 Opening the Magazine Door...............................................................................4-28
4.11 WHEN TO USE THE CLEANING TAPE CARTRIDGE .........................................................4-29
.
CHAPTER 5: CONFIGURING AND OPERATING THE DLT2700 MINI-LIBRARY
5.1 IN THIS CHAPTER .............................................................................................................5-1
5.2 INTRODUCTION TO THE MINI-LIBRARY ............................................................................5-1
5.3 CONFIGURING THE DLT2700 ...........................................................................................5-2
5.3.1 Configuration Guidelines........................................................................................5-3
5.3.2 Disable Parity Checking .........................................................................................5-3
5.3.3 Change the SCSI ID ...............................................................................................5-3
5.4 MODE SELECT KEY ..........................................................................................................5-5
5.4.1 OCP Disabled Mode...............................................................................................5-5
5.4.2 Automatic Mode .....................................................................................................5-7
5.4.3 Manual Mode .........................................................................................................5-7
5.4.4 Service Mode..........................................................................................................5-8
5.5 SELECTING DENSITY ........................................................................................................5-9
5.6 OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL..........................................................................................5-12
5.7 POWER-ON PROCESS .....................................................................................................5-15
5.8 SLOT SELECT, LOAD/UNLOAD .......................................................................................5-17
5.8.1 Selecting a Cartridge ............................................................................................5-17
5.8.2 Loading the Cartridge...........................................................................................5-17
5.8.3 Unloading the Cartridge .......................................................................................5-18
5.8.4 Opening the Receiver ...........................................................................................5-19
5.9 MAGAZINE .....................................................................................................................5-20
5.9.1 Inserting a Cartridge .............................................................................................5-20
5.9.2 Removing a Cartridge from the Magazine............................................................5-23
5.9.3 Removing the Magazine from the Receiver..........................................................5-23
5.9.4 Installing the Magazine into the Receiver.............................................................5-23
.
CHAPTER 6: TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE FOR THE DLT2500/DLT2700 MINILIBRARY
6.1 IN THIS CHAPTER .............................................................................................................6-1
6.2 CONDITIONS NECESSARY FOR BUTTON OPERATION .........................................................6-1
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem-vii
Table of Contents
6.3 BACKUP OPERATION FAILURE ..........................................................................................6-3
6.4 AVOIDING BASIC PROBLEMS ............................................................................................6-4
6.5 DLT2500 ERROR CONDITIONS ........................................................................................6-5
6.5.1 DLT2500 Magazine Error ......................................................................................6-5
6.5.1.1 DLT2500 Clearing a Magazine......................................................................6-5
6.5.2 DLT2500 Loader Error Description .......................................................................6-5
6.5.3 DLT2500 Drive Error Description .........................................................................6-5
6.5.4 DLT2500 Controller Error Description ..................................................................6-5
6.5.5 DLT2500 Unknown Error Description...................................................................6-6
6.5.5.1 DLT2500 Clearing a Loader, Drive, Controller, or Unknown.......................6-6
6.6 DLT2700 ERROR CONDITIONS ........................................................................................6-6
6.6.1 DLT2700 Magazine Fault Cases ............................................................................6-6
6.6.2 DLT2700 Loader Fault Description .......................................................................6-8
6.7 POWER PROBLEMS ...........................................................................................................6-8
.
CHAPTER 7: FIRMWARE UPDATE
7.1 IN THIS CHAPTER .............................................................................................................7-1
7.2 DLT2000 FIRMWARE UPDATE OVERVIEW.......................................................................7-1
7.2.1 Before Doing the Procedure ...................................................................................7-2
7.3 CREATING A FIRMWARE UPDATE TAPE ............................................................................7-4
7.3.1 On UN*X Systems..................................................................................................7-4
7.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE .....................................................................................7-5
7.4.1 Updating the Firmware on DLT2000 (Drive Only Configuration) .........................7-5
7.4.2 Updating the Firmware on the DLT2500 (Drive and Loader Configuration) .......7-10
7.4.3 Updating the Firmware on the DLT2700 (Drive and Loader Configuration) .......7-14
.
CHAPTER 8: DLT2000 SCSI INTERFACE
8.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................8-1
8.2 GENERAL SCSI BUS OPERATIONS....................................................................................8-1
8.2.1 Data Transfer ..........................................................................................................8-1
8.2.2 Initiator/Target Operations .....................................................................................8-2
8.2.3 SCSI IDs and Logical Unit Numbers (LUNs) ........................................................8-2
8.2.4 Unit Attention Condition ........................................................................................8-3
8.2.5 Behavior Around Power-On and SCSI Bus Reset ..................................................8-3
8.2.6 Data Cache and Tape Write Interaction..................................................................8-4
8.2.7 Other SCSI Functionality........................................................................................8-4
8.2.8 Bus Phases ..............................................................................................................8-4
8.2.9 ATTENTION Signal Response ..............................................................................8-5
8.2.10 STATUS phase .....................................................................................................8-5
8.2.11 BUS FREE............................................................................................................8-7
8.2.12 BUS PARITY ERRORS.......................................................................................8-7
8.3 SCSI MESSAGE SYSTEM ..................................................................................................8-8
8.4 TAPE DRIVE SCSI COMMANDS ......................................................................................8-14
viii-DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Table of Contents
8.4.1 Control Byte - Flag and Link Bits.........................................................................8-14
8.4.2 Summary of Supported Sequential-Access Device Commands............................8-15
8.4.3 ERASE (19h)........................................................................................................8-16
8.4.4 INQUIRY (12h) ...................................................................................................8-17
8.4.4.1 Drive Inquiry Response ...............................................................................8-18
8.4.4 2 Vendor Unique Inquiry ................................................................................8-21
8.4.4.3 Vital Product Data Pages .............................................................................8-22
8.4.4.4 Media Loader Inquiry Response ..................................................................8-24
8.4.5 LOAD-UNLOAD (1Bh).......................................................................................8-25
8.4.6 LOCATE (2Bh) ....................................................................................................8-27
8.4.7 LOG SELECT (4Ch) ............................................................................................8-28
8.4.7.1 Operation of LOG SELECT ........................................................................8-30
8.4.8 LOG SENSE (4Dh) ..............................................................................................8-34
8.4.8.1 Supported Pages Page Format .....................................................................8-37
8.4.8.2 Read/Write Error Log SENSE Page Format (Page 2 and 3)........................8-38
8.4.8.3 Last n Error Events Page (07h) ....................................................................8-41
8.4.8.4 Read/Write Compression Ratio Page Format (32h).....................................8-42
8.4.9 MODE SELECT (15h) .........................................................................................8-46
8.4.9.1 MODE SELECT Parameter List..................................................................8-47
8.4.9.2 MODE SELECT Pages................................................................................8-50
8.4.9.3 Control Mode Page (0Ah)............................................................................8-51
8.4.9.4 Data Compression Page (0Fh) .....................................................................8-53
8.4.9.5 Device Configuration Page (10h) ................................................................8-55
8.4.9.6 Disconnect/Reconnect Page.........................................................................8-58
8.4.9.7 Medium Partition Page (11h).......................................................................8-60
8.4.9.8 Read/Write Error Recovery Page (01h) .......................................................8-61
8.4.9.9 EEROM Vendor Unique Page (3Eh) ...........................................................8-63
8.4.9.10 MODE SELECT Changeable Parameters..................................................8-69
8.4.10 MODE SENSE (1Ah /5Ah)................................................................................8-70
8.4.10.1 MODE SENSE Parameter List ..................................................................8-73
8.4.10.2 MODE SENSE Pages ................................................................................8-77
8.4.10.3 Control Mode Page (0Ah)..........................................................................8-78
8.4.10 4 Device Configuration Page (10h) ..............................................................8-80
8.4.10 5 Data Compression Page (0Fh) ...................................................................8-82
8.4.10 6 Disconnect/Reconnect Page.......................................................................8-84
8.4.10 7 Medium Partition Page (11h).....................................................................8-85
8.4.10 8 Read/Write Error Recovery Page...............................................................8-86
8.4.10 9 EEROM Vendor Unique Page (3Eh) .........................................................8-88
8.4.11 PREVENT/ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL (1Eh)...........................................8-89
8.4.12 READ (08h) .......................................................................................................8-90
8.4.13 READ BLOCK LIMITS (05h)...........................................................................8-92
8.4.14 READ BUFFER (3Ch) .......................................................................................8-93
8.4.14.1 Combined Header and Data Mode.............................................................8-94
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem-ix
Table of Contents
8.4.14.2 Data Mode .................................................................................................8-94
8.4.14.3 Descriptor Mode ........................................................................................8-94
8.4.15 READ POSITION (34h) ....................................................................................8-96
8.4.15.1 READ POSITION Data Format.................................................................8-97
8.4.16 RECEIVE DIAGNOSTICS RESULTS (1Ch) ...................................................8-99
8.4.17 RELEASE UNIT (17h).....................................................................................8-100
8.4.17.1 Medium Changer Considerations.............................................................8-100
8.4.18 REQUEST SENSE (03h) .................................................................................8-101
8.4.18 1 Sense Information Format........................................................................8-102
8.4.19 RESERVE UNIT (16h) ....................................................................................8-112
8.4.19.1 Medium Changer Considerations.............................................................8-113
8.4.20 REWIND (01h) ................................................................................................8-114
8.4.21 SEND DIAGNOSTIC (1Dh) ............................................................................8-115
8.4.22 SPACE (11h) ....................................................................................................8-120
8.4.23 TEST UNIT READY (00h)..............................................................................8-122
8.4.23.1 Medium Changer Considerations.............................................................8-122
8.4.24 VERIFY (13h) ..................................................................................................8-123
8.4.25 WRITE (0Ah) ..................................................................................................8-124
8.4.26 WRITE BUFFER (3Bh) ...................................................................................8-126
8.4.26.1 Header and Data Mode ............................................................................8-127
8.4.26.2 Write Data................................................................................................8-127
8.4.26.3 Download Microcode...............................................................................8-127
8.4.26.4 Download Microcode and Save ...............................................................8-127
8.4.27 WRITE FILEMARKS (10h) ............................................................................8-129
8.5 SUPPORTED SCSI-2 MEDIUM CHANGER DEVICE COMMANDS .....................................8-131
8.5.1 INITIALIZE ELEMENT STATUS (07h) ..........................................................8-132
8.5.2 READ ELEMENT STATUS (B8h) ...................................................................8-133
8.5.2.1 Element Status Data Header.......................................................................8-134
8.5.2.2 MEDIUM TRANSPORT ELEMENT STATUS PAGE ......................................................8-135
8.5.2.3 Storage Element Status Page......................................................................8-136
8.5.2.4 Data Transfer Element Status Page............................................................8-137
8.5.3 MODE SENSE/SELECT (1Ah/15h) ..................................................................8-138
8.5.3.1 Device Capabilities Page (1Fh)..................................................................8-138
8.5.3.2 Element Address Assignment Page (1Dh) .................................................8-140
8.5.3.3 Transport Geometry Parameters Page (1Eh)..............................................8-142
8.5.4 MOVE MEDIUM (A5h) ....................................................................................8-143
.
A: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A.1 IN THIS APPENDIX ......................................................................................................... A-1
A.2 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................ A-2
A.2.1 Identifying the Correct AC Power Cord............................................................... A-4
A.3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................. A-11
A.3.1 Nominal Tape Tension....................................................................................... A-11
x-DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Table of Contents
A.3.2 DLT2000 Timing Characteristics ......................................................................
A.3.3 DLT2500xt Media Loader Timing Characteristics............................................
A.3.4 DLT2700 Media Loader Timing Characteristics...............................................
A.4 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ..............................................................................
A.4.1 Temperature and Humidity ................................................................................
A.4.2 Altitude ..............................................................................................................
A.5 VIBRATION AND SHOCK SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................
A.5.1 Operating Shock and Vibration .........................................................................
A.5.2 Nonoperating Shock and Vibrattion ..................................................................
A.6 ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) SUSCEPTIBILITY .......................................
A.6.1 Electromagnetic Emissions ................................................................................
A.6.2 Conducted Emissions.........................................................................................
A-6.3 Radiated Emissions ...........................................................................................
A.6.4 Magnetic Radiated Susceptibility ......................................................................
A.6.5 Radiated Susceptibility ......................................................................................
A.6.6 Conducted Susceptibility ...................................................................................
A.6.7 ESD Failure Level Limits ..................................................................................
A.6.8 Acoustic Noise Emissions..................................................................................
A.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................
A.7.1 Safety Requirements ..........................................................................................
A.7.2 Electromagnetic Emission Requirements...........................................................
A.8 DRIVE RELIABILITY FACTORS......................................................................................
A-9 COMPACTAPE RECORDING MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS....................................................
.
A-11
A-12
A-12
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15
A-15
A-16
A-19
A-19
A-19
A-20
A-20
A-21
A-21
A-22
A-22
A-24
A-24
A-24
A-25
A-26
B: DEFINITION OF VENDOR UNIQUE SENSE DATA INFORMATION
B.1 IN THIS APPENDIX .......................................................................................................... B-1
B.2 INTERNAL STATUS .......................................................................................................... B-1
.
C: SENSE KEY INFORMATION
C.1 IN THIS APPENDIX ........................................................................................................... C-1
.
D: EEROM RESIDENT BUGCHECK AND EVENT LOGS
D.1 EEROM PACKETS (LAST N ERROR EVENTS) ................................................................. D-1
D.2 BUGCHECK PACKETS ..................................................................................................... D-2
D.3 PO/ST FAILURE PACKETS ............................................................................................... D-4
D.4 EVENT LOG PACKETS ..................................................................................................... D-4
D.4.1 Directory Failure Event Logs................................................................................ D-5
D.5 PRIMARY STATUS/SECONDARY STATUS ......................................................................... D-7
D.6 CODE UPDATE (CUP) STATUS PACKET .......................................................................... D-8
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem-xi
Table of Contents
List of Figures
2-1 DRIVE FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................................2-3
2-2 CHANGING THE SCSI ID VIA THE PUSHBUTTON SWITCHPACK (LATER MODEL) ..............2-5
2-3 REAR PANEL COMPONENTS .............................................................................................2-6
3-1 DLT2000 DRIVE CONNECTORS .......................................................................................3-2
3-2 SCSI ID CONNECTOR PINS ..............................................................................................3-3
3-3 JUMPER POSITIONS...........................................................................................................3-4
3-4 JUMPER SETTINGS FOR TRM PWR/TRM ENB CONNECTOR ..........................................3-5
3-5 DLT2000 REAR CONNECTORS ........................................................................................3-6
3-6 DLT2000 INDICATORS ..................................................................................................3-10
3-7 TAPE CARTRIDGE ...........................................................................................................3-18
3-8 LOADING A CARTRIDGE .................................................................................................3-21
3-9 UNLOADING A CARTRIDGE .............................................................................................3-25
4-1 LOOSENING THE SHIPPING SCREW....................................................................................4-2
4-2 ROTATE THE LOCKING LEVER ..........................................................................................4-3
4-3 MINI-LIBRARY REAR PANEL COMPONENTS .....................................................................4-4
4-4 FRONT OF THE DLT2500 .................................................................................................4-5
4-5 MINI-LIBRARY OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL ...................................................................4-9
4-6 WRITE-PROTECT SWITCH ON A CARTRIDGE ...................................................................4-20
4-7 DLT2500 MAGAZINE ....................................................................................................4-22
4-8 INSERTING A CARTRIDGE INTO THE MAGAZINE ..............................................................4-24
4-9 REMOVING A CARTRIDGE FROM THE MAGAZINE ............................................................4-25
5-1 CHANGING THE SCSI ID VIA THE PUSHBUTTON SWITCH .................................................5-4
5-2 DLT2700 OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL ...........................................................................5-6
5-3 WRITE-PROTECT SWITCH ON A CARTRIDGE ...................................................................5-21
5-4 INSERTING A CARTRIDGE INTO THE MAGAZINE ..............................................................5-22
5-5 REMOVING A CARTRIDGE FROM THE FRONT OF THE MAGAZINE ....................................5-24
5-6 RECEIVER OPENED ........................................................................................................5-26
6-1 OPENING THE CARTRIDGE DOOR TO CHECK THE TAPE LEADER ......................................6-4
7-1 DLT2700 SUBSYSTEM CONNECTORS ..............................................................................7-3
7-2 JUMPER SETTINGS FOR TRM PWR/TRM ENB CONNECTOR ..........................................7-4
8-1 EXTENDED MESSAGE FORMAT ......................................................................................8-10
8-2 SDTR EXTENDED MESSAGE FORMAT ...........................................................................8-13
8-3 ERASE CDB.................................................................................................................8-16
8-4 INQUIRY CDB.............................................................................................................8-17
8-5 INQUIRY RESPONSE DATA ..........................................................................................8-18
8-6 INQUIRY VENDOR UNIQUE BYTES DEFINITION ...........................................................8-21
8-7 SUPPORTED VITAL PRODUCT DATA PAGES ....................................................................8-22
8-8 UNIT SERIAL NUMBER PAGE ..........................................................................................8-23
8-9 FIRMWARE BUILD INFORMATION PAGE ..........................................................................8-23
xii-DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Table of Contents
8-10 LOAD-UNLOAD CDB ..............................................................................................8-25
8-11 LOCATE CDB............................................................................................................8-27
8-12 LOG SELECT CDB ...................................................................................................8-28
8-13 LOG PAGE CONTROL DEFINITIONS..............................................................................8-29
8-14 CLEARABLE LOG PAGES ..............................................................................................8-30
8-15 READ/WRITE ERRROR LOG SELECT PAGE FORMAT .....................................................8-31
8-16 PARAMETER CODES SUPPORTED .................................................................................8-32
8-17 LOG SENSED CDB ...................................................................................................8-34
8-18 LOG PAGE CONTROL DEFINITIONS..............................................................................8-35
8-19 LOG SENSE PAGES SUPPORTED ................................................................................8-36
8-20 SUPPORTED PAGES PAGE FORMAT...............................................................................8-37
8-21 READ/WRITE ERROR LOG SENSE PAGE FORMAT.......................................................8-38
8-22 PARAMETER CODES SUPPORTED .................................................................................8-39
8-23 THRESHOLD MET CRITERIA .........................................................................................8-40
8-24 LAST N ERROR EVENTS PAGE ......................................................................................8-41
8-25 PARAMETER CODES SUPPORTED .................................................................................8-42
8-26 READ/WRITE COMPRESSION RATIO PAGE HEADER .....................................................8-42
8-27 READ/WRITE COMPRESSION RATIO LOG SENSE PAGE FORMAT ...............................8-43
8-28 READ/WRITE BYTES TRANSFERRED LOG SENSE PAGE FORMAT ..............................8-44
8-29 MODE SELECT CDB ................................................................................................8-46
8-30 MODE SELECT PARAMETER LIST.............................................................................8-47
8-31 MODE SELECT PAGES SUPPORTED ..........................................................................8-50
8-32 CONTROL MODE PAGE (0AH) ......................................................................................8-51
8-33 DATA COMPRESSION PAGE ..........................................................................................8-53
8-34 DEVICE CONFIGURATION PAGE FORMAT .....................................................................8-55
8-35 DISCONNECT/RECONNECT PAGE FORMAT ...................................................................8-58
8-36 DATA TRANSFER DISCONNECT CONTROL ....................................................................8-59
8-37 MEDIUM PARTITION PAGE FORMAT .............................................................................8-60
8-38 ERROR RECOVERY PAGE FORMAT ...............................................................................8-61
8-39 EEROM VENDOR UNIQUE PAGE FORMAT ..................................................................8-63
8-40 EEROM VENDOR UNIQUE PAGE EXAMPLE 1..............................................................8-67
8-41 EEROM VENDOR UNIQUE PAGE EXAMPLE 2..............................................................8-68
8-42 MODE SENSE CDB (6).............................................................................................8-70
8-43 MODE SENSE CDB (10)...........................................................................................8-71
8-44 MODE SENSE PAGE CONTROL DEFINITION ...............................................................8-71
8-45 MODE SENSE (6) DATA HEADER .............................................................................8-73
8-46 MODE SENSE (10) DATA HEADER ...........................................................................8-74
8-47 MODE SENSE BLOCK DESCRIPTOR...........................................................................8-74
8-48 MODE SENSE PAGE DESCRIPTOR .............................................................................8-74
8-49 MODE SENSE PAGES SUPPORTED.............................................................................8-77
8-50 CONTROL MODE PAGE (0AH) ......................................................................................8-78
8-51 DEVICE CONFIGURATION PAGE FORMAT .....................................................................8-80
8-52 DATA COMPRESSION PAGE).........................................................................................8-82
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem-xiii
Table of Contents
8-53 DISCONNECT/RECONNECT PAGE FORMAT ...................................................................8-84
8-54 MEDIUM PARTITION PAGE FORMAT .............................................................................8-85
8-55 ERROR RECOVERY PAGE FORMAT ...............................................................................8-86
8-56 PREVENT/ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL CDB ....................................................8-89
8-57 READ CDB.................................................................................................................8-90
8-58 READ BLOCK LIMITS CDB ....................................................................................8-92
8-59 READ BLOCK LIMITS .............................................................................................8-92
8-60 READ BUFFER CDB.................................................................................................8-93
8-61 READ BUFFER MODES SUPPORTED..........................................................................8-93
8-62 READ BUFFER DATA HEAD .....................................................................................8-94
8-63 READ BUFFER DESCRIPTOR .....................................................................................8-95
8-64 READ POSITION CDB .............................................................................................8-96
8-65 READ POSITION DATA FORMAT ..............................................................................8-97
8-66 RECEIVE DIAGNOSTICS RESULTS CDB .............................................................8-99
8-67 RECEIVE DIAGNOSTIC RESULT DATA FORMAT ............................................................8-99
8-68 RELEASE UNIT CDB .............................................................................................8-100
8-69 REQUEST SENSE CDB ..........................................................................................8-101
8-70 REQUEST SENSE DATA .........................................................................................8-102
8-71 RESERVE UNIT CDB .............................................................................................8-112
8-72 RESERVE UNIT CDB .............................................................................................8-114
8-73 SEND DIAGNOSTIC CDB......................................................................................8-115
8-74 SEND DIAGNOSTIC PARAMETER LIST FORMAT ....................................................8-117
8-75 SPACE CDB .............................................................................................................8-120
8-76 SPACE CODE DEFINITION .........................................................................................8-120
8-77 TEST UNIT READY CDB.......................................................................................8-122
8-78 VERIFY CDB ...........................................................................................................8-123
8-79 WRITE CDB.............................................................................................................8-124
8-80 WRITE BUFFER CDB.............................................................................................8-126
8-81 WRITE BUFFER MODES SUPPORTED......................................................................8-126
8-82 WRITE FILEMARKS CDB .....................................................................................8-129
8-83 INITIALIZE ELEMENT STATUS .....................................................................................8-132
8-84 READ ELEMENT STATUS CDB ...........................................................................8-133
8-85 ELEMENT TYPE CODE DEFINITIONS ...........................................................................8-133
8-86 ELEMENT STATUS DATA HEADER ..............................................................................8-134
8-87 MEDIUM TRANSPORT ELEMENT STATUS PAGE ..........................................................8-135
8-88 STORAGE ELEMENT STATUS PAGE .............................................................................8-136
8-89 DATA TRANSFER ELEMENT STATUS PAGE .................................................................8-137
8-90 DEVICE CAPABILITIES PAGE FORMAT ........................................................................8-138
8-91 ELEMENT ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT PAGE FORMAT ......................................................8-140
8-92 TRANSPORT GEOMETRY PAGE FORMAT ....................................................................8-142
8-93 MOVE MEDIUM CDB ............................................................................................8-143
A-1 POWER CORD ................................................................................................................ A-5
A-2 MOUNTING HOLE DIMENSIONS (TOP VIEW).................................................................. A-9
xiv-DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Table of Contents
A-3 MOUNTING HOLE DIMENSIONS (SIDE VIEW)............................................................... A-10
D-1 EEROM LOG AREA LAYOUT ........................................................................................ D-2
D-2 BUGCHECK LOG PACKET LAYOUT................................................................................ D-3
D-3 POST LOG PACKET LAYOUT ....................................................................................... D-4
D-4 EVENT LOG PACKET LAYOUT .................................................................................... D-5
D-5 DIRECTORY R/W ERROR EVENT LOG LAYOUT ............................................................. D-6
D-6 CODE UPDATE (CUP) LOG PACKET LAYOUT ............................................................... D-9
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem-xv
Table of Contents
List of Tables
2-1 ADDING A TERMINATOR ..................................................................................................2-7
2-2 POST--RIGHT SIDE INDICATORS ......................................................................................2-8
2-3 AFTER POST ...................................................................................................................2-9
2-4 DLT2000 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART...........................................................................2-10
3-1 RESULTS OF DENSITY SELECTION ....................................................................................3-9
3-2 POST SEQUENCE OF EVENTS ........................................................................................3-13
3-3 DETERMINING THE DRIVE'S OPERATING CONDITION ......................................................3-14
3-4 BEFORE LOADING THE CARTRIDGE ................................................................................3-19
3-4 AFTER LOADING THE CARTRIDGE AND OPERATING .......................................................3-19
3-5 WHAT IS HAPPENING DURING CARTRIDGE USE (RIGHT SIDE LIGHTS.............................3-22
3-6 WHEN TO USE THE CLEANING CARTRIDGE ....................................................................3-23
4-1 MINI-LIBRARY OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL .................................................................4-10
4-2 DISPLAY MESSAGES .......................................................................................................4-11
4-3 DENSITY SELECT MODE ..................................................................................................4-16
4-4 CARTRIDGE, BEFORE LOADING .......................................................................................4-21
4-5 AFTER LOADING THE CARTRIDGE ..................................................................................4-27
4-6 WHEN TO USE THE CLEANING CARTRIDGE ....................................................................4-29
5-1 RESULTS OF DENSITY SELECTION USING A COMPACTAPE III TAPE ................................5-11
5-2 DLT2700 OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL .........................................................................5-12
5-3 LOADER POWER-ON SHELF-TEST ..................................................................................5-15
5-4 LOAD/UNLOAD FUNCTIONS ...........................................................................................5-17
6-1 DLT2500 OCP BUTTON CONDITIONS .............................................................................6-2
6-2 DLT2700 OCP BUTTON CONDITIONS .............................................................................6-3
7-1 RESULTS (DLT2000 CODE UPDATE) ...............................................................................7-9
7-2 RESULTS (DLT2500 CODE UPDATE) .............................................................................7-11
7-3 RESULTS (DLT2700 CODE UPDATE) .............................................................................7-17
8-1 SUPPORTED SCSI MESSAGES ..........................................................................................8-8
8-2 DLT2000 SUPPORTED SCSI COMMANDS ......................................................................8-15
8-3 EEROM VENDOR UNIQUE PAGE PARAMETERS.............................................................8-64
8-4 CHANGEABLE MODE PARAMETERS ...............................................................................8-69
8-5 SENSE KEYS USED .......................................................................................................8-106
8-6 ADDITIONAL SENSE CODES/QUALIFIERS USED ............................................................8-107
8-7 SEND DIAGNOSTICS PARAMETERS ...............................................................................8-117
8-8 DEFINITION OF PATTERN NUMBERS DEFINITION OF PATTERN NUMBERS .....................8-118
8-9 SENSE KEYS USED .......................................................................................................8-119
8-10 ADDITIONAL SENSE CODES .......................................................................................8-119
8-11 MEDIUM CHANGER COMMANDS ................................................................................8-131
8-12 MEDIUM CHANGER ELEMENT ADDRESSES ................................................................8-141
A.1 DLT2000 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................... A-2
xvi-DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Table of Contents
A.3 DLT2500 MINI-LIBRARY PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................... A-7
A.4 DLT2700 MINI-LIBRARY PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................... A-8
A-5 DLT2000 TIMING CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................... A-11
A-6 DLT2500XT MEDIA LOADER TIMING CHARACTERISTICS ........................................... A-12
A-7 DLT2700 MEDIA LOADER TIMING CHARACTERISTICS ............................................... A-12
A-8 OPERATING RANGES ................................................................................................... A-13
A-9 POWER-ON RANGES—NO TAPE LOADED (UNPACKED - 72 HOURS) ........................... A-13
A-10 STORAGE RANGES (UNPACKED OR PACKED) ............................................................ A-14
A-11 SHIPMENT RANGES ................................................................................................... A-14
A-12 OPERATING VIBRATION SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................. A-15
A-13 OPERATING SHOCK SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................... A-15
A-14 NONOPERATING SHOCK OVERSTRESS (BENCH HANDLING - UNPACKAGED) SPECIFICATIONS
........................................................................................................................................... A-16
A-15 NONOPERATING (PACKAGED) VIBRATION SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... A-16
A-16 NONOPERATING (PACKAGED) REPETITIVE SHOCK SPECIFICATIONS .......................... A-17
A-17 NONOPERATING (PACKAGED) SHOCK (DROP) SPECIFICATIONS ................................ A-17
A-18 NONOPERATING (UNPACKAGE) VIBRATION SPECIFICATIONS .................................... A-17
A-19 NONOPERATING (UNPACKAGED) SHOCK SPECIFICATIONS ........................................ A-18
A-20 CONDUCTED EMISSIONS............................................................................................ A-20
A-21 RADIATED EMISSIONS, 30 MHZ TO 30 GHZ............................................................... A-20
A-22 LOW FREQUENCY, MAGNETIC FIELDS, 10 TO 3000 KHZ .......................................... A-20
A-23 HIGH FREQUENCY, ELECTRIC FIELDS, 1 TO 1000 MHZ ............................................ A-21
A-24 FAST TRANSIENT (BURSTS) FOR POWER AND DATA CABLES .................................... A-21
A-25 HIGH ENERGY TRANSIENT VOLTAGE FOR POWER CABLES ....................................... A-21
A-26 LOW-LEVEL CONDUCTED INTERFERENCE ................................................................. A-21
A-27 ESD FAILURE LEVEL LIMITS .................................................................................... A-22
A-28 ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSIONS, NOMINAL ................................................................... A-22
A-29 RELIABILITY FACTORS .............................................................................................. A-25
A-30 COMPACTAPE RECORDING MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS.................................................. A-26
B-1 INTERNAL STATUS CODE................................................................................................ B-1
B-2 INTERNAL STATUS BIT FLAGS ........................................................................................ B-3
D-1 EEROM LOG PACKET TYPES ....................................................................................... D-2
D-2 BUGCHECK ERROR CODES ............................................................................................. D-3
D-3 EVENT LOG CODES ........................................................................................................ D-5
D-4 DIRECTORY EVENT LOG FLAGS ..................................................................................... D-7
D-5 DIRECTORY EVENT STATUSES ....................................................................................... D-7
D-6 68020 CODE UPDATE STATUS ..................................................................................... D-10
D-7 SERVO CODE UPDATE STATUS ..................................................................................... D-10
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem-xvii
Table of Contents
xviii-DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
REVISION HISTORY
This Revision History provides a concise publication record of this manual. It lists
the manual revision levels, release dates, and reasons for the revisions.
Manual No. - Rev Level
Date
Summary of Changes
81-109132-01
April 14, 1995
Original issue
81-109132-02
August 18, 1995
Specifications and illustrations
were upgraded.
DLT2500 Mini-library section
add.
81-109132-03
January 19, 1996
Caution added for unloading a
tape cartridge.
AC Power Cord spec’s added.
FCC Statement upgraded.
Upgraded Chapters 1 to 8 and
appendix A.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem - xix
Revision History
xx - DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Preface
To the Reader:
QUANTUM makes every effort to ensure the accuracy of information. However, some
errors may have been introduced inadvertently; they will be corrected in the next
release. QUANTUM recognizes that some users may require additional content. We
welcome your feedback and your suggestions for enhancements and we will evaluate
your input for a future release. Please send your comments to:
Technical Publications
Quantum Corporation
333 South Street
Shrewsbury, MA 01545
Purpose of This Manual
This manual is isssued for the DLT2000 Cartridge Tape drive, and DLT2500 and
DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystems. The manual describes operating procedures,
code update, and SCSI protocol features.
All care is taken to ensure accuracy. However, some of the parameters, drawings, and
specifications being under constant review, and enhancement, may change.
Who Should Use This Manual
This manual is written for the subsystem or system integrator and users of the
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem-xxi
Preface
Structure of This Manual
Chapter 1, Overview and Features of the DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Product,
gives a product overview and lists the product features of the DLT2000/DLT2700 tape
subsystem.
Chapter 2, Installing and Configuring the DLT2000 Tabletop Drive, describes
installing and configuring the DLT2000 tabletop tape drive.
Chapter 3, Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Tape Drive, includes selecting
density, configuration, and other operation information for the tape drive, such as front
panel indicators and controls, Power-on Self-test, the tape cartridge write-protect
switch, loading a cartridge, using the cleaning tape, unloading a cartridge, and
preserving cartridges.
Chapter 4, Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library, includes
configuration, selecting density, and other operation information for the loader, such as
the power-on process, the loader Mode Select key, the operator control panel, and
functions of the Slot Select, Load/Unload, and Eject buttons.
Chapter 5, Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library, includes
configuration, selecting density, and other operation information for the loader, such as
the power-on process, the loader Mode Select key, the operator control panel, and
functions of the Slot Select, Load/Unload, and Eject buttons.
Chapter 6, Troubleshooting Guide for the DLT2500/DLT2700 Mini-Library, gives
instructions on how to clear failures and describes the necessary conditions to ensure
the loader OCP pushbuttons operate effectively.
Chapter 7, Firmware Update (From Tape), provides an overview on updating the
firmware, describes how to create a firmware update tape, and tells how to update the
firmware.
Chapter 8, DLT2000 SCSI Interface, details the SCSI protocol features of the
DLT2000 tape subsystem.
Appendix A, Technical Specifications, gives product specifications including physical
dimensions, performance specifications, power requirements, environmental
specifications, vibration and shock requirements, electromagnetic interference
susceptibility, regulatory requirements, and reliability factors.
Appendix B, Definition of Vendor Unique Sense Data Information, describes the
internal status codes for the DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 product.
Appendix C, Sense Key Information, lists the sense key information for the
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 product.
-DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
1
Overview and Features of the
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Product
1.1 In This Chapter
Chapter 1 includes the following main topics and sections:
Topic
Section
Product Overview
Fast Data Transfer Rate
High-Capacity
Compaction
Strong Media
Compatibility
Firmware Update Capability
Embedded Diagnostics
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.2 Product Overview
The DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 is a high-performance, high-capacity, streaming
cartridge tape product designed for use on midrange and high-end computing systems.
Using data compression and compaction, the DLT2000 drive features a formatted
capacity of 30 GB and a sustained user data transfer rate of 2.5 MB/s.
The DLT2000 is a 5.25 inch form factor, half-inch tape drive. The design includes a
dual-channel read/write head, Lempel-Ziv (LZ) high-efficiency data compression, and
tape mark directory to maximize data throughput and minimize data access time.
The DLT2500 is a tape mini-library that performs automatic tape operations. The
DLT2500 includes the tape drive and a 5-cartridge SCSI-2 medium changer device
(loader). The mini-library provides unattended backup of 100 GB in less than 16 hours
or up to 50 GB in an 8-hour shift in a compressed mode.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 1-1
Overview and Features of the DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Product
The DLT2700 is a tape mini-library that performs automatic tape operations. The
DLT2700 includes the tape drive and a 7-cartridge SCSI-2 medium changer device
(loader). The mini-library provides unattended backup of 140 GB in less than 16 hours
or up to 70 GB in an 8-hour shift in a compressed mode.
The drive and mini-libraries are available in a rackmountable form factor. Also, the
DLT2000, DLT2500 and DLT2700 are available with either single-ended or
differential, fast driver/receivers.
1.3 Fast Data Transfer Rate
Used for unattended backups or archiving, the DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 allows
the user to back up a higher data capacity at a high speed. The
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700, when operating in a non-compressed mode, has a
maximum transfer rate of 1.25 MB/s. When operating in the compressed mode, the
maximum transfer rate is 2.5 MB/s write and 3.0 MB/s read.
1.4 High-Capacity
The amount of data the user can store on a tape CompacTape III cartridge can be up to
10.0 GB native capacity or 20.0 GB compressed, depending on whether you select
compression mode. Built-in data compression increases cartridge capacity and drive
transfer rate 2 to 2.5 times. Compression can be selected on the loader or drive front
panel or from the host by using the SCSI MODE SELECT command.
1.5 Compaction
The compaction feature of the DLT2000 helps you to store data efficiently. A
read/write data cache of 2.0 MB allows working space for the compaction, enabling
maximum use of available tape space.
1.6 Durable Media
The CompacTape III tape media can endure 500,000 passes and has a shelf life of 30
years, which provides superior media durability and data reliability.
1.7 Compatibility
Quantum is committed to maintaining compatibility within the DLT family of tape
drives. DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 tape products are the fourth generation of tape
products, started with the DLT260 and DLT600 drives.
The DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 complies with the ANSI standard for SCSI-2. The
tape media format follows ECMA approved and ANSI proposed standards.
1-2 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Overview and Features of the DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Product
The user can select tape density for the CompacTape III cartridge on the loader or drive
front panel or by using the SCSI MODE SELECT command. The
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 can write 2.6, 6.0, and 10.0 GB tape formats for 100%
interchange compatibility with earlier DLT drives using the CompacTape III cartridge.
On a write from BOT, the DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 reformats the CompacTape
III cartridge recorded at 2.6, 6.0, or 10.0 GB format to the new specified format using
the new specified format.
1.8 Firmware Update Capability
The DLT2000 includes Flash EEPROM technology that allows easy on-site installation
of microcode updates from tape.
1.9 Embedded Diagnostics
The DLT2000 has embedded diagnostic software that tells you when head cleaning is
required, and indicates diagnostic results, and drive operating status. The drive has
embedded data logging of errors for failure analysis.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 1-3
Overview and Features of the DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Product
1-4 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Chapter 2
Installing and Configuring the DLT2000
Tabletop Drive
2.1 In This Chapter
Chapter 2 includes the following main topics and sections:
Topic
Section
Prepare for the Installation
Install the Subsystem
Configure the DLT2000 Tabletop
Connect the Cables
Test the Installation
DLT2000 Troubleshooting Chart
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.2 Prepare for the Installation
This section describes how to prepare for the installation of the DLT2000 cartridge tape
subsystem including:
Topic
Section
Before You Start
Installation Setup
Site Setup
Site Guidelines
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.1 Before You Start
Installing the DLT2000 tabletop cartridge tape subsystem requires no special tools. If
you need to change the switchpack settings on the rear panel, you will need a pen.
If you have problems during the installation, see Table 2-4 for troubleshooting.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 2-1
Installing and Configuring the DLT2000 Tabletop Drive
2.2.2 Installation Setup
The steps for installation setup are:
Step
1
2
3
Action
Unpack and check your shipment.
Choose a site for the DLT2000 tabletop subsystem.
Power off the system on which the DLT2000 tabletop
subsystem is to be installed.
2.2.3 Site Setup
Place the DLT2000 on a flat, sturdy, level area such as a desk or tabletop.
2.2.4 Site Guidelines
Be sure to follow these guidelines for your DLT2000:
•
The DLT2000 is designed to operate in harsh environments. However, use care in
placing the drive in an environment that is free of dust and humidity.
2-2 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Installing and Configuring the DLT2000 Tabletop Drive
Figure 2-1 shows the DLT2000.
6
6.
0
R
.0
H
10
C
om
pr
es
s
d
oa
n
nl
to
U
ut t
o
B gh
T
i
ss L
re
P t
ai his
t
W
n
pe
pe
O dle Ta
an ve
o
em
H
t
ad
gh
Lo
Li
o
T
t
ai his
t
W
n
pe
O dle pe
a
T
an
H
rt
se his
t
In
se
lo e
C dl
an
se
U
ed
g
e
n
ct
in
at dle
ni
te te
e
e a pe per an
ri ro
ap Us Cle Ta
W P
O H
T
2.
D
U
nl
D
d
e
oa
ty id
si err
en Ov
ty t
si lec
en Se
CARTRIDGE INSERT/RELEASE HANDLE (DOWN)
SELECT BUTTON
ZKO-1217-02-DG
Figure 2-1 Drive Front Panel
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 2-3
Installing and Configuring the DLT2000 Tabletop Drive
2.3 Install the Subsystem
To install the DLT2000:
Step
1
2
3
4
Action
Note the DLT2000 factory settings.
Review Section 2.4.1.
Configure the DLT2000 for use on your system:
If you need to …
See section …
Disable parity checking
Change the SCSI ID
Connect the cables.
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4 Configure the DLT2000 Tabletop
This section describes how to configure the DLT2000 including:
Topic
Section
Configuration Guidelines
Disable Parity Checking
Changing the SCSI ID
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
The DLT2000 is factory set to SCSI ID 5, unless otherwise specified. The drive is
factory set for parity generation and checking is enabled.
2.4.1 Configuration Guidelines
All system uses the SCSI ID to identify, or address, the DLT2000. Follow these
guidelines when configuring the DLT2000 for use on your system:
If you are installing the DLT2000 as …
Then …
The only SCSI device on the bus or one
of multiple SCSI devices on the bus
Be sure to use a SCSI ID that is
unique from any other device or
system ID on the SCSI bus.
The last or only device on the SCSI bus
You must terminate the bus by
installing a terminator on the drive.
2-4 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Installing and Configuring the DLT2000 Tabletop Drive
2.4.2 Disable Parity Checking
To disable parity, see your service representative.
2.4.3 Changing the SCSI ID
To change the SCSI ID use the pushbutton switch on the rear of the drive. Press the
switch button(s) above or below the number display (0-7) to set the desired SCSI ID.
Press the top button to increase the number or press the bottom button to decrease the
number.
0
0
MLO-012870
Figure 2-2 Changing the SCSI ID via the Pushbutton Switch
2.5 Connect the Cables
Section 2.5 includes the following topics:
Topic
Section
Examine the DLT2000 Rear Panel
Connect the SCSI Signal Cable
Terminate the SCSI Bus
Connect the Power Cord
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 2-5
Installing and Configuring the DLT2000 Tabletop Drive
2.5.1 Examine the DLT2000 Rear Panel
Examine the components on the DLT2000 rear panel to complete the physical
installation (Figure 2-3).
0
I
O
Power
Switch
Power
Connector
SCSI Signal
Connector (IN)
SCSI Signal Connector
(Out/Termination)
MLO-012869
Figure 2-3 Rear Panel Components
2.5.2 Connect the SCSI Signal Cable
To connect the SCSI signal cable:
1.
Connect one end of the SCSI cable to the leftmost SCSI signal connector on the
DLT2000 rear panel.
2.
Snap the wire cable clamps into place to secure the cable.
3.
Connect the other end of the SCSI signal cable to the SCSI connector on your
system or, for daisy-chained configurations, to another SCSI device.
See your system documentation for system SCSI connections.
2-6 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Installing and Configuring the DLT2000 Tabletop Drive
2.5.3 Terminate the SCSI Bus
_________________________ Note _____________________________
The SCSI bus must be terminated at both ends and at least
one device must supply terminator power.
___________________________________________________________
Table 2-1 indicates when and where to add a terminator.
Table 2-1 Adding a Terminator
If the DLT2000 is …
Then …
The last or only device on the bus
and you are going to terminate the
cables externally
1.
2.
Not the last or only device on the
SCSI bus
Connect the SCSI terminator to one
of the SCSI signal connectors on the
DLT2000 rear panel.
Snap the wire cable clamps into place
or tighten screws (whichever is
supplied) to secure the terminator.
Be sure to install the terminator at the end
of the bus.
The DLT2000 to supply TRM PWR on the bus by adding a jumper to the pins labeled
TRM PWR on the controller module.
2.5.4 Connect the Power Cord
To connect the power cord:
1.
Ensure the DLT2000 power switch is set to 0.
2.
Connect the power cord to the DLT2000 power connector. Make sure the
connector is fully seated.
3.
Connect the other end of the power cord to a nearby ac outlet.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 2-7
Installing and Configuring the DLT2000 Tabletop Drive
2.6 Test the Installation
Section 2.6 includes the following topics:
Topic
Section
Run the Power-On Self-Test (POST)
What to Do after POST
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.1 Run POST
To test the installation for the DLT2000 by running POST:
1.
Turn on the system power.
2.
Set the power switch on the DLT2000 rear panel to on. POST runs automatically.
3.
Observe the indicators on the DLT2000 front panel. Ensure the indicator sequence
of events is the same as in Table 2-2 . Events on the right and left sides happen at
the same time.
Table 2-2 POST
Event
Action
1
The lights on the right front panel turn on sequentially from
top to bottom. All lights stay on for a few seconds.
2
All lights on the left front panel turn on at the same time for
about three seconds and then turn off.
3
The green Operate Handle, the orange Write Protected, and
the Yellow Use Cleaning Tape lights turn off. The yellow
Tape in Use light blinks while the tape drive initializes.
4
After initialization, if no cartridge is loaded, the yellow Tape
In Use light turns off, the green Operate Handle light turns on,
the handle unlatches, and the beeper sounds.
For more information on what happens after initialization when a cartridge is present,
but the handle is down; or a cartridge is present, but the handle is up (not
recommended), see Section 3.5.4 in Chapter 3.
POST completes in about 13 seconds and the drive responds normally to all commands.
However, it might take longer for the media to become ready. After a bus reset, the tape
drive responds within a bus selection timeout period.
2-8 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Installing and Configuring the DLT2000 Tabletop Drive
2.6.2 What to Do after POST
Table 2-3 After POST
If …
Then …
All the events in Table 2-2 took
place
POST succeeded. Bring up the system
and run the optional system tests. See
Chapter 3 for operating the drive and
selecting density.
All left- or right-side lights on the
DLT2000 front panel blink only
POST failed. See Table 2-4.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 2-9
Installing and Configuring the DLT2000 Tabletop Drive
2.7 DLT2000 Troubleshooting Chart
If the DLT2000 fails during POST or operation, use Table 2-4 to determine the
problem and the action to take.
Table 2-4 DLT2000 Troubleshooting Chart
If. . .
Your system does
not recognize the
DLT2000
Then . . .
Your system might not
be configured to see
the SCSI ID
You should. . .
Configure your system to see the
ID.
The SCSI ID might
not be unique
Change the SCSI ID and
reconfigure the system. New ID
effective at next power-on.
The parameters for
your SCSI adapter
might be incorrect
Check your SCSI adapter
installation.
The SCSI signal cable
might be loose
Make sure the connector on each
end of the cable is fully seated.
The SCSI terminator
might not be present or
might be loose
Install the terminator; make sure
the terminator is fully seated.
The SCSI bus might
not be correctly
terminated
If the DLT2000 is the last or only
device on the bus, make sure the
terminator is installed on the
DLT2000.
If the DLT2000 is not the last or
only device on the bus, check the
cable connections and make sure
the terminator is installed at the
end of the bus.
The SCSI terminator
might not be at the
end of the bus, or
more than two
terminators might be
present
Be sure to install a terminator at
each end of the bus. One
terminator is usually installed at
the system.
2-10 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Installing and Configuring the DLT2000 Tabletop Drive
Table 2-4 DLT2000 Troubleshooting Chart (cont’d)
If. . .
Your system does not
recognize the
DLT2000
Then . . .
You should. . .
1. The SCSI bus
might be too long.
2. Too many devices
might be on the
bus.
1. Limit the bus length to the
ANSI SCSI standard of 6
meters (19 feet) for single
ended (SE) or 25 meters (82
feet) for differential
2. Limit the number of devices on
the bus (including the system)
to eight
Check your system configuration
rules.
The DLT2000 does
not power up
The DLT2000 has no
power
Check the DLT2000 power cord
connections with the DLT2000
power switch off
All right-side or all
left-side indicators on
the DLT2000 front
panel blink
A drive fault has
occurred
Press the Unload button on the
DLT2000 front panel to clear the
error. If unsuccessful power off,
then on, and look at indicators to
determine if POST executed
successfully.
You are finding fatal
or nonfatal errors for
which you cannot
determine the cause
The bus termination
or SCSI signal cable
connections might be
incorrect
Make sure the SCSI bus is
terminated.
The ac power source
grounding might be
incorrect
Use an ac outlet for the DLT2000
on the same ac line powering the
system.
After taking the action listed in Table 2-4, power on the DLT2000 to rerun POST. If all
right- or left-side lights blink again, you most likely have a hardware failure.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 2-11
Installing and Configuring the DLT2000 Tabletop Drive
2-12 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Chapter 3
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000
Basic Tape Drive
3.1 In This Chapter
The configuration section in this chapter applies to the basic drive without the SCSI ID
switchpack and power supply. (Chapter 2 applies to configuring the tabletop). Chapter
3 includes these main topics and sections:
Topic
Section
Before You Install the DLT2000 Drive
Overview of the Front Panel
Selecting Density
Description of Controls and Indicators
Description of the Tape Cartridge
Loading a Cartridge
Using the Cleaning Tape Cartridge
Unloading a Cartridge
Preserving Cartridges
3.2
3.4
3.3
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.2 Before You Install the DLT2000 Drive
Section 3.2 includes:
Topic
Section
Disabling Parity Checking
Changing the SCSI ID
Setting the TRM ENB/TRM PWR jumpers
Locating the SCSI Cable and Power Connectors
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 3-1
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.2.1 Disabling Parity Checking
If your system does not generate parity, you can disable parity checking by adding a
jumper to the SCSI connector on the left side of the DLT2000 drive (Figure 3-1).
To disable parity:
1.
Use Figure 3-1, Number , to locate the SCSI ID connector on the drive.
Front
Bezel
1
Left Side
Front
Bezel
2
3
Right Side
ZKO−1217−17−RGS
1.
2.
3.
TRM PWR/TRM ENB Connector
SCSI ID Connector
Loader Connector
Figure 3-1 DLT2000 Drive Connectors
3-2 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
Figure 3-2 shows what the pins on the SCSI ID connector represent.
Remote ID
Present
Disable
Parity
ID Pins
LKG-9295-94F
Figure 3-2 SCSI ID Connector Pins
_________________________ Note _____________________________
A jumper must always be placed on the Remote ID Present
position (Figure 3-2) for the host to recognize any ID
selection on this connector.
___________________________________________________________
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 3-3
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
2.
Place the jumper in the disable parity check position, as shown in Letter I, Figure
3-3.
8 - Bit
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
L KG-9 294 -94f
Figure 3-3 Jumper Positions
A. SCSI ID 0
B. SCSI ID 1
C. SCSI ID 2
D. SCSI ID 3
E. SCSI ID 4
F. SCSI ID 5
G. SCSI ID 6
H. SCSI ID 7
I. Disable parity checking.
The jumper goes in this
position with any SCSI ID
you choose.
3.2.2 Changing the SCSI ID
The drive is shipped with SCSI ID 5, unless otherwise specified. You can change the
SCSI ID by adding jumpers to the drive's SCSI connector (Figure 3-1).
To change the SCSI ID:
1.
Use Figure 3-1, number , to locate the SCSI ID connector on the drive.
2.
Choose a SCSI ID from 0 to 7.
3.
Use Figure 3-3, to see where to place the jumpers for the ID you choose. For
example, if you chose SCSI ID 1, place the jumpers in the same positions as those
in Letter B.
3-4 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.2.3 Setting the TRM ENB (Single-ended Only)/TRM PWR
Jumpers
_________________________ Note _____________________________
The Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) bus must be
terminated at both ends of the bus, and at least one device
must supply terminator power.
___________________________________________________________
The single-ended DLT2000 controller module has active terminators. The differential
DLT2000 controller module does not have on-board termination. You can configure the
single-ended DLT2000 drive to supply termination power and termination on the bus.
To supply terminator power and provide termination for the SCSI bus:
1.
Use Figure 3-1, number , to locate the TRM PWR/TRM ENB connector on the
drive.
2.
Place jumpers in the positions shown in Figure 3-4, number
1
3
2
4
.
ZKO−1217−18−RGS
Figure 3-4 Jumper Settings for TRM PWR/TRM ENB Connector
No Term
Term Power/Disable Active
No Term
Term Power/Enable Active
Power/Disable
Active Termination
Power/Enable
Active Termination
Termination
Termination
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 3-5
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.2.4 Locating the SCSI Cable and Power Connectors
To install the DLT2000 drive, note the location of the rear connectors (Figure 3-5).
Rear A
1
2
Rear B
3
ZKO−1217−16−RGS
Figure 3-5 DLT2000 Rear Connectors
SCSI Connector
Power Connector
Power Connector (Storage Works Option)
3-6 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.3 Selecting Density
Section 3.3 describes the drive's density select features.
_________________________ Caution __________________________
If a prerecorded tape and write from beginning of tape (BOT), all
prerecorded data is lost. This includes density changes, since they only
occur when writing from BOT.
___________________________________________________________
Ways of Selecting Density
Using CompacTape III the density defaults to 10.0 GB native. The only selection is for
this cartridge is 2.6, 6.0 10.0 compression off or 20.0 GB compression on.
Using the CompacTape III the user can select density by using any of the following
operations:
1.
On all read operations and all write append operations, the recorded density is the
density to be used.
2.
On a Write from BOT, the tape density may be changed by:
•
The Density Select button. Using the Density Select button always
overrides a host selection.
•
A programmable host selection via your operating system. (The Density
Override light is off, indicating automatic or host density selection.)
•
Native default density 10.0 and Compress (assuming the Density Select
button or the host selection was not used.)
How to Select Density
To select density with the DLT2000:
1.
Load the tape in the drive. The yellow Tape in Use light blinks while the tape loads
and calibrates.
2.
After calibration completes, Tape in Use remains lit.
3.
The light shows the tape's prerecorded density, such as 2.6 or 6.0.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 3-7
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
4.
You can use the drive's control panel at various times, not just after loading a tape.
Density selection is inactive until the write from BOT command is issued. The
controller remembers the density selection state until you do one of the following:
•
Change the density selection
•
Unload the tape
Density Select Example
If you have loaded a tape with a prerecorded 2.6 density and you use the Density Select
button to select 10.0 density, the following should happen:
•
The 2.6 light remains lit—density has not changed yet and the steady light indicates
recorded tape density
•
The 10.0 light blinks—density change is pending
•
Density Override lights
When a write from BOT occurs, the following should happen:
•
The 2.6 light turns off
•
10.0 lights steadily
•
Density Override remains lit
3-8 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
Table 3-1 shows the results of density selection.
Table 3-1 Results of Density Selection
If …
Then …
The Density Select button is not
used
The lights show the actual density when the tape is
reading and writing. The lights are on steady and
Density Override is off.
The Density Select button is
used, and if the actual tape
density is the same as the density
you selected
The actual density and the Density Override light.
For example, if the actual tape density is 10.0 GB
and the selected tape density is 10.0 GB, then the
indicator next to 10.0 lights.
The Density Select button is
used, and if the actual tape
density differs from the density
selected
1. The light with the actual density is on steady
2. The light with the selected density blinks
3. Density Override lights steady
For example, if the actual tape density is 10.0 and
the selected density is 6.0, 10.0 lights steady, 6.0
blinks, and Density Override lights steady.
To select density over the SCSI bus:
1.
Do a SCSI MODE SELECT with the density you want. For more details, see
Chapter 8.
2.
Write data to the tape from BOT.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 3-9
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.4 Overview of the Front Panel
The DLT2000 has the following indicators and controls for operating the drive Figure
3-6):
se
U
ed
g
e
n
ct
in
at dle
ni
te te
e
e a pe per an
ri ro
ap Us Cle Ta
W P
O H
T
2.
6
6.
0
C
om
pr
es
t
ad
gh
Lo
Li
o
T
t
ai his
t
W
n
pe
O dle pe
a
T
an
H
rt
se his
t
In
se
lo e
C dl
an
H
d
oa
n
nl
to
U
ut t
o
B gh
T
i
ss L
re
P t
ai his
t
W
n
pe
pe
O dle Ta
an ve
o
em
R
.0
H
10
s
D
U
ty id
si err
en Ov
nl
oa
d
e
D
ty t
si lec
en Se
SELECT BUTTON
CARTRIDGE INSERT/RELEASE HANDLE (DOWN)
ZKO-1217-02-DG
Figure 3-6 DLT2000 Indicators
Indicators (Left Side of Drive)
Indicators (Right Side of Drive)
Density light 2.6
Density light 6.0
Density light 10.0
Compress light
Density Override light
Write Protected light
Tape in Use light
Use Cleaning Tape light
Operate Handle light
Beeper (audible) not visible
Controls
Density Select button
Cartridge insert/release handle
Unload button
3-10 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.5 Description of Controls and Indicators
Section 3.5 includes the following sections:
Topic
Section
Beeper
Unload Button
Cartridge Insert/Release Handle
Indicator Action during Power-on Self-test and
Operation
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.1 Beeper
A beeper sounds when you can operate the cartridge insert/release handle. When you
hear the beep, the green Operate Handle light should be on. To prevent damage to the
drive wait for the sound of the beeper before opening the door!!
3.5.2 Unload Button
The Unload button is used primarily to unload the tape. When the user pushes Unload,
the DLT2000 waits until an active write to tape is completed before beginning the
unload sequence.
The drive then rewinds the tape back into the cartridge. The tape must be completely
rewound and unloaded into the cartridge before you can remove the cartridge from the
drive. An unload operation may take 20 seconds from BOT.
If the drive is in error state (all right-side lights are flashing on the front panel), pushing
the Unload button causes the drive to reset and unload the tape if possible.
3.5.3 Cartridge Insert/Release Handle
Operate the cartridge insert/release handle to load a cartridge or to eject a cartridge only
when the Operate Handle light is on, and after the momentary beep sounds. The handle
lifts to the open position and lowers to the closed position. See Section 3.7 and Section
3.9 for the operating procedures.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 3-11
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.5.4 Indicator Action during Power-On Self-Test and Operation
When you turn on system power, the drive performs the power-on self-test (POST). The
sequence of events is:
3-12 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
Table 3-2 POST Sequence of Events
Stage
What Happens
1.
The lights on the right front panel turn on sequentially from top to bottom. All
lights stay on for a few seconds.
2.
The lights on the left front panel turn on at the same time for about three
seconds and then turn off.
3.
The green Operate Handle, the orange Write Protected, and the yellow Use
Cleaning Tape lights turn off. The yellow Tape in Use light blinks while the
tape drive initializes.
4.
After initialization, the drive is in one of the following four states:
Drive State
Indicator Displays and Actions
a. No cartridge is present
1. The yellow Tape in Use light turns off.
2. The green Operate Handle light turns on.
3. The handle is unlatched.
4. The drive beeps momentarily.
You can now raise the handle and insert a
cartridge.
b. A cartridge is present
and the handle is down
The drive loads the cartridge. When the yellow
Tape In Use light stops blinking and stays on,
the tape's actual density lights. For example, if
the actual tape density is 2.6 GB, then the light
turns on next to the 2.6 label. When Density
Override blinks, you can select a density. The
drive is ready for use. (See Section 3.4.)
c. A cartridge is present,
but the handle is up (not
recommended)
The yellow Tape In Use light turns off. The
green Operate Handle light flashes. When you
lower the handle, the cartridge loads.
d. A cartridge is not
present and the handle
could be up (not
recommended)
The yellow Tape In Use light turns off. The
green Operate Handle light flashes. When you
lower the handle, the cartridge loads.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 3-13
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
Table 3-2 POST Sequence of Events Cont’d
Stage
What Happens
Drive State
Indicator Displays and Actions
e. The drive detects an
error condition
Then all right or left side lights blink repeatedly.
You may try to unload the tape and reinitialize
the drive by pressing the Unload button or turn
drive power off and then on again. The right- or
left-side lights stop blinking and the drive tries
to reinitialize. The lights turn on steady again
and turn off if the test succeeds.
POST completes in about 15 seconds and the drive responds normally to all commands.
However, it might take longer for the media to become ready. After a bus reset, the tape
drive responds within a bus selection timeout period. Use this table to determine the
drive's operating condition:
Table 3-3 Determining the Drive's Operating Condition
Label
Color
State
Operating Condition
Light (Right front panel)
Write Protected
Orange
On
Off
Tape is write-protected.
Tape is write-enabled.
Tape in Use
Yellow
Blinking
On
Tape is moving.
Tape is loaded; ready for use.
Use Cleaning Tape
Yellow
On
Drive head needs cleaning, or the
tape is bad (Section 3.8).
Remains on after
you unload the
cleaning tape
Cleaning tape attempted to clean
the drive head, but the tape
expired, so cleaning was not
done.
After cleaning,
turns on again
when you reload
he data cartridge
Problem data cartridge. Try
another cartridge.
Off
Cleaning is complete, or cleaning
is unnecessary.
3-14 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
Table 3-4 Determining the Drive's Operating Condition (cont’d)
Label
Color
Light (Left Front Panel)
State
Operating Condition
Operate Handle
On
Okay to operate the
cartridge/insert release handle.
Off
Do not operate the cartridge
insert/release handle.
On
POST is starting.
Blinking
An error has occurred. See Table
2-4, DLT2000 Troubleshooting
Chart.
Tape is recorded in 2.6 format.
Tape is recorded in another
density. You selected this
density for a write from BOT.
All four right-side
lights or all left-side
lights
Green
–
2.6
Yellow
On
Blinking
6.0
Yellow
On
Blinking
Tape is recorded in 6.0 format.
Tape is recorded in another
density. You selected this
density for a write ROM BOT.
10.0
Yellow
On (default)
Blinking
Tape is recorded in 10.0 format.
Tape is recorded in another
density. You selected this
density for a write from BOT.
Compress
Yellow
On
Compression mode is enabled.
(Compression can be done in
10.0 density only.)
Compression mode is disabled.
Off
Density Override
Yellow
On
Off (default)
Blinking
You selected a density from the
front panel.
Density to be selected by the
host (automatic).
You are in density selection
mode.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 3-15
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
Table 3-4 Determining the Drive's Operating Condition (cont’d)
Label
Color
Light (Left Front Panel)
All four right-side or
all left-side lights
State
Operating Condition
Blinking
A POST error occurred.
3-16 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.6 Description of the Tape Cartridge
The CompacTape III tape cartridge is a 4-inch, gray/brown, plastic cartridge containing
1100 feet of 1/2 inch magnetic metal particle tape.
3.6.1 Cartridge Write-Protect Switch
The tape cartridge has a write-protect switch to prevent accidental erasure of data.
Before loading the tape cartridge into the drive, position the write-protect switch on the
front of the cartridge (Figure 3-7).
•
Left, so the cartridge is write-protected
•
Right, so the cartridge is write-enabled
When you slide the switch to the left, the small orange rectangle is visible. This means
data cannot be written to the tape. The arrow (beneath the orange rectangle and over the
two lines on the write-protect switch) lets you know that data cannot be written to the
tape.
When the switch is moved to the right (the orange rectangle is not visible) the tape can
be written.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 3-17
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
Figure 3-7 shows the write-protect switch on the tape cartridge :
ORANGE
INDICATOR
WRITEPROTECT
SWITCH
WRITEENABLED
WRITEPROTECTED
ZKO-1217-04-DG
Figure 3-7 Tape Cartridge
3-18 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.6.2 Data Protection
When the cartridge write-protect switch is to the left, the drive turns on the write protect
LED immediately. But, if the drive is writing to the tape, write protect does not take
effect until the write completes.
Table 3-5 describes what happens to data protection when you move the write-protect
switch before loading the cartridge.
Table 3-5 Before Loading the Cartridge
If you move the write-protect switch …
Then …
To the left, the tape is write-protected; the
orange indicator on the cartridge shows
Data cannot be written to the
tape.
To the right, the tape is write-enabled
Data can be written to the tape
(if it is not software writeprotected).
Table 3-6 describes what happens to data protection when you move the write-protect
switch during operation.
Table 3-6 After Loading the Cartridge and Operating
If you move the write-protect switch …
Then …
From the write-protected position to writeenabled
The tape becomes writeenabled after a variable amount
of time (seconds).
From write-enabled to write-protected
The tape becomes writeprotected after a variable
amount of time (seconds).
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 3-19
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.7 Loading a Cartridge
The following are more detailed steps for loading a cartridge (Figure 3-8):
1.
When the green light is on steady, pull the cartridge
insert/release handle open.
2.
Insert the cartridge.
3.
Push the cartridge into the drive.
4.
Push the handle closed.
The green light turns off and the yellow light blinks to show the tape is loading. When
the tape is at the BOT marker, the yellow light turns on steady. The tape is now ready
for use.
3-20 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
Figure 3-8 shows how to load a cartridge into the drive.
Ha
Un
nd
lo
le
ad
1. 2.
3. 4.
Un
lo
ad
ZKO-1217-10-DG
Figure 3-8 Loading a Cartridge
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 3-21
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.7.1 Tape in Use
Whenever the yellow Tape in Use light is on steady, the tape is ready to use. When the
tape is being read, written, or rewound, Tape in Use light blinks.
Use Table 3-7 to determine what is happening during cartridge use.
Table 3-7 What is Happening During Cartridge Use (Right Side Lights)
If …
It means …
The yellow light is on steady
A cartridge is loaded, but the tape is not moving.
This can mean no application is communicating
with the controller, or that the application is
communicating, but is not delivering commands
for tape motion.
The yellow light blinks
irregularly
A calibration read or write is in progress.
The yellow light blinks
regularly
The tape is loading, unloading, or rewinding.
The green light turns on and
the beeper sounds
The tape is unloaded into the cartridge and the
cartridge can now be removed, or if the drive is
unloaded, a cartridge can now be inserted.
All four lights blink
An error has occurred during operation. See
Table 2-4, DLT2000 Troubleshooting Chart.
3-22 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.8 Using the Cleaning Tape Cartridge
Use Table 3-8 to determine when to use the cleaning cartridge.
Table 3-8 When to Use the Cleaning Cartridge
If …
It means …
And you should …
1. Use Cleaning Tape
lights (Figure 3-6)
The drive head needs
cleaning or the tape is
bad (see item 3)
Use the cleaning cartridge.
Follow the instructions in
Section 3.7 for loading a
cartridge into the drive.
When cleaning completes,
the beeper sounds for you to
remove the cleaning
cartridge.
2. A data cartridge
causes Use Cleaning
Tape to blink
The data cartridge
may be damaged
Back up this data onto
another cartridge. Discard
the old cartridge, which may
be damaged. A damaged
cartridge may cause
unnecessary use of the
cleaning cartridge.
3. Use Cleaning Tape
still lights after you
clean the drive head
Your data cartridge
may be causing the
problem
Try another data cartridge.
4. Use Cleaning Tape
lights after you load
the cleaning cartridge
Cleaning has not been
done and the
cartridge is expired
Replace the cleaning
cartridge.
_________________________ Note _____________________________
The cleaning cartridge expires after about 20 uses.
___________________________________________________________
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 3-23
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.9 Unloading a Cartridge
_______________________CAUTIONS ___________________________
Remove a cartridge from the drive before turning off host system power. Failure to
remove a cartridge can result in cartridge and drive damage.
When you remove the cartridge from the drive, return the cartridge to its plastic case to
prolong the cartridge life.
____________________________________________________________
To unload a cartridge from the drive (Figure 3-9):
1.
Press the Unload button (or issue the appropriate system software command). The
yellow Tape in Use light blinks as the tape rewinds.
2.
When the green light turns on (the beeper also sounds), pull the cartridge
insert/release handle open to eject the cartridge.
__________________________CAUTION _________________________
Immediate extraction of the tape cartridge can lead to tape leader failure.
Delay tape cartridge extraction by one to two seconds to avoid this
problem.
____________________________________________________________
3.
Remove the cartridge.
4.
Push the handle closed.
3-24 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
Un
lo
ad
1. 2.
3. 4.
ZKO-1217-09-DG
Figure 3-9 Unloading a Cartridge
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 3-25
Configuring and Operating the DLT2000 Basic Tape Drive
3.10 Preserving Cartridges
For longer life of recorded or unrecorded cartridges, store cartridges in a clean
environment with these conditions:
•
Do not drop or bang the cartridge. This can displace the tape leader, making the
cartridge unusable and possibly damaging the drive.
•
Keep tape cartridges out of direct sunlight and away from heaters and other heat
sources.
•
Store tape cartridges in temperatures between 10°C and 40°C (50°F to 104°F). For
longer cartridge life, always store the cartridge in its plastic container and in room
environment conditions of 72°F ±7°F (22°C ±4°C).
•
If the tape cartridge has been exposed to heat or cold extremes, stabilize the
cartridge at room temperature for the same amount of time it was exposed---up to
24 hours.
•
Do not place cartridges near electromagnetic interference sources, such as
terminals, motors, and video or X-ray equipment. Data on the tape can be altered.
•
Store tape cartridges in a dust-free environment where the relative humidity is
between 20% and 80%. For longer cartridge life, store the cartridge at 40% ± 20%
relative humidity.
•
Place an identification label only in the slide-in slot on the front of the cartridge.
•
Do not adhere labels to a cartridge anywhere except in the slide-in slot.
3-26 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Chapter 4
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500
Mini-Library
4.1 In This Chapter
The configuration section in this chapter applies to the mini-library and its operation.
Chapter 4 includes these main topics and sections:
Topic
Introduction to the Mini-Library
Configure the DLT2500 Mini-Library
Installation Test
Operator Control Panel
Key Lock
Selecting Density
Default Operating Modes
Tape Cartridge Description
Magazine Description
When to Use the Cleaning Tape Cartridge
Section
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-1
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
MLO–012160
Shipping Screw
Locking Lever
Figure 4-1 Loosening the Shipping Screw Under the Mini-Library
4-2 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
MLO–012863
Figure 4-2 Rotate the Locking Lever
Lift the locking lever on the front of the mini-library (Figure 4-2) to rotate the magazine
locking mechanism. This allows you to remove the magazine from the mini-library.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-3
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
MLO-012002
Label
Power Switch/Power Connector
Fan
SCSI Connectors
Figure 4-3 Mini-Library Rear Panel Components
4-4 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
MLO–012131
Magazine Door
Display
Operator Buttons
Key Lock
Figure 4-4 Front of the DLT2500
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-5
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.2 Introduction to the Mini-Library
The mini-library includes a DLT2000 tape drive, a media loader, and a 5-cartridge
removable magazine.
The same SCSI target controller board controls the tape drive and the media loader. If
the controller detects the loader's presence when the system is turned on, the loader is
presented as a SCSI-2 medium changer device on LUN 1.
If you issue the SCSI-2 medium changer commands to the DLT2500:
•
Random access is enabled to the media stored in the magazine slots
•
Sequential access is disabled to the media supported automatically in auto-loading
mode
If you do not issue the SCSI-2 medium changer commands, the default mode of
operation is sequential access to the media supported automatically in auto-loading
mode.
Auto-loading is implemented as a side effect of the SCSI UNLOAD command, as
shown:
If …
An unload is
specified
Then …
After winding the tape back into the cartridge and
moving the cartridge from the drive to the magazine slot
from which it came, the cartridge in the next slot is
moved from the magazine into the drive and made ready.
The next slot is
empty, or the
cartridge unloaded
was for the last slot
in the magazine
No cartridge is loaded into the drive.
4-6 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.3 Configure and Install the DLT2500 Mini-Library
This section describes how to configure and install the mini-library including:
•=
Configuration guidelines
•=
Connecting the SCSI signal cable to the mini-library
The mini-library is factory set to SCSI ID 5, unless otherwise specified.
4.3.1 Configuration Guidelines
Your system uses the SCSI ID to identify, or address, the mini-library. Follow these
guidelines when you configure the mini-library for your system:
Then …
If you are installing the mini-library as …
The only SCSI device on the bus or one of
multiple SCSI devices on the bus
Be sure to use a SCSI ID that is unique
from any other device or system ID on
the SCSI bus.
If you need to change the SCSI ID, see
the section on setting the SCSI ID, later
in this chapter.
The last or only device on the SCSI bus
The user must terminate the bus by
installing a terminator.
4.3.2 Connecting the SCSI Signal Cable to the Mini-Library
Examine the components on the mini-library rear panel (Figure 4-3) to complete the
physical installation.
To connect the SCSI signal cable:
1.
Ensure the mini-library power is turned off.
2.
Connect one end of the SCSI cable to an available SCSI signal connector on the
mini-library rear panel.
3.
Snap the wire cable clamps into place or tighten the screws (whichever is supplied)
to secure the cable.
4.
Connect the other end of the SCSI signal cable to the SCSI connector on your
system, or for daisy-chained configurations, to another SCSI device.
See your system documentation for system SCSI connections.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-7
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.4 Test the Installation
This section tells you how to run the power-on self-test (POST) and what to do after
POST.
4.4.1 Run POST
To test the installation for the mini-library by running POST:
1. Turn on the system power.
2. Set the power switch on the mini-library rear panel to on.
Result: POST runs automatically when you turn on the mini-library
3. Watch the display on the mini-library front panel. Ensure the sequence of events are
the same as listed:
Event
Action
1
The message LDR RST (loader reset) displays.
2
The message LDR ACT (loader active) displays.
3
A series of numbers display as the mini-library elevator goes up
and down.
4
The message LDR RDY (loader ready) displays.
4.4.2 What to Do after POST
Verify whether the POST events took place.
If …
All the events took place
Then …
POST succeeded. The mini-library is ready for
operation.
All the events did not take
place
POST failed. You should see the message LDR RST
(loader reset) display.
1.Verify you terminated the SCSI bus.
2.Turn the mini-library power off and then on
again. If POST still does not succeed, call your
service representative.
4-8 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.5 Operator Control Panel
The operator control panel (OCP) has 4 pushbuttons (Figure 4-5 and Table 4-1).
Display
Mode
Select
MLO-012191
Load/
Unload
Open
Figure 4-5 Mini-Library Operator Control Panel
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-9
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
Table 4-1 lists each button and its function.
Table 4-1 Mini-Library Operator Control Panel
Button
Display Mode
Function
Puts the mini-library in Normal, Density Select, or SCSI ID
Select mode.
Select
•=
•=
Selects SCSI ID and density.
Moves in increments the current slot number on the
display to the next slot number .
Load/Unload
•
•
•
Loads the currently selected cartridge into the tape drive
Unloads the cartridge currently in the tape drive
Resets the mini-library if a loader error has occurred.
When the ERR LDR message displays, press the
Load/Unload button to reset the mini-library.
Open
•=
Opens the magazine door to access the magazine for
loading and unloading cartridges.
Unloads the cartridge currently in the tape drive and
returns the cartridge to its original slot. Then, opens the
magazine door.
•=
4-10 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
Table 4-2 lists the display messages you can see during operation.
Table 4-2 Display Messages
Display Message
WP
Tells you …
The cartridge in the drive is write-protected by one of
these methods:
• The write-protect switch on the cartridge is set to the
write-protect position
• Host software write-protect qualifiers
DRV ACT
Tape is reading or writing
DRV RDY
A cartridge is in the drive and the tape is not moving.
DRV REW
Tape is rewinding.
HC
Use cleaning tape.
LDR RDY
Power is on and no cartridge is in the drive.
LDR ACT
Loader is moving a cartridge.
ERR MAG
The status of cartridges reported by the loader and the
drive is inconsistent.
ERR LDR
A loader transfer assembly error occurred.
ERR DRV
A drive error occurred.
ERR CTL
A controller error occurred.
ERR UNK
An error of unknown origin occurred.
SLOT 0
SLOT 1
SLOT 2
SLOT 3
SLOT 4
The current slot containing the cartridge. Each current
slot number flashes in the display when its corresponding
cartridge moves to or from the drive. Also used with the
ERR MAG or ERR LDR message to show the type of
error.
DNS SEL
The mini-library is in Density Select mode.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-11
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
Table 4-2 Display Messages (Cont’d)
Display Message
OVR
Tells you …
Tape drive activity as follows:
• On steady means you selected a density from the front
panel.
• Off (default) means density is selected automatically.
• Flashing means you are in density select mode.
2.6
Tape drive activity as follows:
• On steady means the tape is recorded in 2.6 format.
• Flashing means the tape is recorded in another
density. You selected this density for a write from
BOT.
6
Tape drive activity as follows:
• On steady means the tape is recorded in 6 GB format.
• Blinking means the tape is recorded in another
density. You selected this density for a write from
BOT.
10
Tape drive activity as follows:
• On steady means the tape is recorded in
10 GB format.
• Flashing means the tape is recorded in another
density. You selected this density for a write from
BOT.
10C
Tape drive activity as follows:
• On means Compression mode is enabled.
Compression can be done in 10 GB density only.
• Off means Compression mode is disabled.
4-12 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.6 Key Lock
The key lock on the front of the mini-library (Figure 4-3) enables or disables use of the
operator control panel (OCP) (Figure 2-5). The key lock prevents unauthorized removal
of the magazine or cartridges, providing a measure of data security.
To unlock or enable the OCP, turn the key toward the opened lock icon next to the key
lock.
To lock or disable the OCP, turn the key toward the locked icon next to the key lock.
_________________________ CAUTION _________________________
Do not force open the magazine door manually. Always use the Open
button to open the door electronically.
___________________________________________________________
4.6.1 OCP Locked or Disabled
When you insert the magazine into the mini-library and close the magazine door, the
elevator scans the magazine. The OCP pushbuttons are disabled.
4.6.2 OCP Unlocked or Enabled
The OCP pushbuttons unlocked or enabled allow operator intervention.
4.6.3 Setting the SCSI ID
Choose an unused SCSI ID between 0 and 7.
To set the SCSI ID via the front panel:
1. Press and hold the Display Mode button (about 5 seconds) until the SCSI ID SEL
message displays including the factory set SCSI ID.
Example
2.
3.
SCSI ID SEL
SCSI ID 0
Keep pressing the Select button quickly until the ID number you want displays
(Figure 4-5).
Press the Display Mode button again. See the display message LDR RDY. At this
point, the mini-library drive cannot yet recognize the SCSI ID.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-13
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.
Issue a bus reset or turn the mini-library power off and then on again so the drive
can recognize the new SCSI ID.
4.7 Selecting Density
This section describes the mini-library's density select feature.
__________________________Caution ___________________________
If a prerecorded tape and write from beginning of tape (BOT), all
prerecorded data is lost. This includes density changes, since they only
occur when writing from BOT.
____________________________________________________________
The user can select density by using any of the following:
1.
On a write from beginning of tape (BOT), tape density is selected by one of the
following:
•
Front panel Density Select mode
__________________________NOTE ____________________________
The user can execute a front panel density selection at any time, but the
selection takes effect only on the next write from BOT.
____________________________________________________________
2.
•
Programmable host selection via your operating system
•
Native default density 10 GB and Compress (assuming you did not use
the Select mode or the host selection)
On all read operations and all write append operations, the recorded density is the
density to be used.
__________________________CAUTION _________________________
Doing any write from BOT destroys existing data on tape.
____________________________________________________________
4-14 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.7.1 Front Panel Density Select Mode
To select density via the front panel:
1.
If a tape is loaded in the drive, the display shows the tape's pre-recorded density.
2.
The user can use the mini-library OCP at various times, not just after you load a
tape. Density selection is inactive until you issue the write from BOT command.
The controller remembers the density selection state until you do one of the
following:
3.
•
Change the density selection
•
Press the Open button to open the door
Enter Density Select mode by pressing the Display Mode button and then the
Select button on the OCP. Using Density Select mode always overrides a host
selection.
Example
If you loaded a tape with a prerecorded 2.6 density and you use Density Select mode to
select 10 density:
Before a write from BOT occurs, you should see the 2.6 show steady, and the 10 and
OVR flash in the display:
LDR RDY
2.6
10 OVR
After a write from BOT occurs, you should see the selected density 10 and the OVR
show steady in the display:
LDR RDY
10 OVR
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-15
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
Table 4-3 shows results.
Table 4-3 Results of not Using or Using Density Select Mode
If …
You did not use Density Select
mode
Then…
…
The display shows the actual density when the tape is
reading and writing.
You used Density Select mode
and the actual tape density is
the same as the density you
selected
The display shows the actual density on steady and
OVR on steady.
You used Density Select mode
and the actual tape density
differs from the density you
selected
On operation before Write from BOT, the display
shows:
1. Actual tape density on steady
2. Selected density flashing
3. OVR flashing
On operation after write from BOT, the display shows:
1. Selected density on steady
2. OVR on steady
4.7.2 Programmable Host Selection via Your Operating System
To select density via the SCSI bus:
1.
Do a SCSI MODE SELECT with the density you want. For more details, see the
chapter on SCSI Interface. .
2.
Write data to the tape from BOT.
4.7.3 Native Default Density
If you did not use the front panel density select mode or programmable host selection,
the selection becomes the native default density of 10 GB when using a CompacTape
III tape (uncompressed).
4-16 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.8 Default Operating Modes
The mini-library operates in 4 modes:
•
Normal
•
Density Select
•
SCSI ID Select
•
Code Update
4.8.1 Normal Mode
Normal mode is used by default after you turn on or reset the mini-library. The
information displayed during this mode depends on the state of the mini-library.
If the display says …
LDR ACT
It means the …
Loader is active
LDR RDY
Loader is inactive and no cartridge is in the
drive
DRV RDY
Drive is ready
DRV ACT
Drive is active
DRV REW
Tape is rewinding
HC
Use cleaning tape
WP
Drive is in write-protect status
Switch Functions
While in Normal mode:
When you press and release the Display Mode button, the mini-library enters Density
Select mode.
When you press and hold the Display Mode button (about 5 seconds), the mini-library
enters SCSI ID Select mode.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-17
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.8.2 Density Select Mode
Density Select mode allows you to select drive density.
It means the …
If the display says …
DNS SEL
Mini-library is in Density Select mode
OVR
Front panel selection overrides host selection
DRV RDY
Drive is ready
DRV ACT
Drive is active
DRV REW
Tape is rewinding
HC
Use cleaning tape
WP
Drive is in write-protect status
Switch Functions
While in Density Select mode:
When you press and release the Display Mode button once, the mini-library enters
Normal mode.
4-18 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.8.3 SCSI ID Select Mode
SCSI ID Select mode allows you to select the SCSI ID for the tape drive and to enter
Code Update mode. If you turn power off and then on again or reset the mini-library,
the SCSI ID you chose reappears after being stored.
It means the …
Mini-library is in SCSI ID Select mode
SCSI ID is set to 0
SCSI ID is set to 1
SCSI ID is set to 2
SCSI ID is set to 3
SCSI ID is set to 4
SCSI ID is set to 5
SCSI ID is set to 6
SCSI ID is set to 7
If the display says …
SCSI ID SEL
SCSI ID 0
SCSI ID 1
SCSI ID 2
SCSI ID 3
SCSI ID 4
SCSI ID 5
SCSI ID 6
SCSI ID 7
If you press the Select button while in SCSI ID Select mode, the stored SCSI ID you
chose moves by one increment. If you press the Select button when the stored SCSI ID
is 7, then the SCSI ID moves to 0.
Switch Functions
While in SCSI ID Select mode:
If you press and release the Display Mode button, the mini-library enters Normal mode.
4.8.4 Code Update Mode
See Chapter 7 to place the mini-library in Code Update mode.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-19
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.9 Description of the Tape Cartridge
The CompacTape III tape cartridge is a 4-inch, gray, plastic cartridge containing 1100
feet of 1/2 inch magnetic metal particle tape.
4.9.1 Cartridge Write-Protect Switch
The tape cartridge has a Write-Protect switch to prevent accidental erasure of data.
Before you load the tape cartridge into the drive, position the write-protect switch on
the front of the cartridge (Figure 4-6). The switch can move to the:
•
Left, so the cartridge is Write-Protected
•
Right, so the cartridge is Write-Enabled
When you slide the switch to the left, the small orange rectangle is visible. This means
data cannot be written to the tape. The arrow (beneath the orange rectangle and over the
two lines on the write-protect switch) lets you know that data cannot be written to the
tape.
On the right side of the write-protect switch is another symbol: an arrow over one line.
This symbol indicates that if you slide the write-protect switch to the right, data can be
written to the tape.
Figure 4-6 shows the write-protect switch on the tape cartridge.
MLO-012010
Orange
Indicator
Write-
Protect
Switch
Write-Enabled
Write-Protected
Figure 4-6 Write-Protect Switch on a Cartridge
4-20 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.9.2 Data Protection
If you move the cartridge write-protect switch to the left, and then load the tape, the WP
(write-protect) message displays.
Table 4-4 describes what happens to data protection when you move the write-protect
switch before you load the cartridge.
Table 4-4 Before Loading the Cartridge
If you move the write-protect switch …
To the left, the tape is write-protected,
with the orange indicator showing
Then …
Data cannot be written to the tape.
To the right, the tape is write-enabled
Data can be written to the tape (if it is not
software write-protected).
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-21
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.10 Description of the Magazine
The front of the magazine has numbers 0 through 4 to indicate each slot number.
__________________________NOTE ____________________________
Insert and remove all cartridges at the front of the magazine.
____________________________________________________________
0
1
2
3
4
MLO-012004
Magazine Handle
Cartridge Slots
Figure 4-7 DLT2500 Magazine
4-22 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.10.1 Inserting a Cartridge into the Front of the Magazine
Before cartridge insertion:
1.
Grasp the cartridge with the write-protect switch on the right side facing you.
2.
Set the cartridge's write-protect switch to the desired position.
If you want to …
Write to the tape
Then …
Slide the switch to the right (orange indicator is not
visible)
Write-protect the tape
Slide the switch to the left (orange indicator is
visible)
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-23
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
MLO-012140
Figure 4-8 Inserting a Cartridge into the Magazine
To insert a cartridge into the magazine (Figure 4-8):
Place the magazine on a flat surface with the slots facing you. Each slot is
numbered to ensure you are inserting the cartridge correctly in the front of the
magazine. Usually, cartridges are inserted into consecutive slots.
Insert the cartridge by pushing it into the slot until you hear a click.
Notice a small metal tab. This holds the cartridge in place.
4-24 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
MLO-012132
Figure 4-9 Removing a Cartridge from the Magazine
4.10.2 Removing a Cartridge from the Magazine
To remove a cartridge from the magazine (Figure 4-9):
At the front of the magazine, where you can see the metal tab next to the slot
number, press in on the cartridge until it stops and you hear a click.
Then, release.
The slot has a spring-release action.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-25
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
__________________________NOTE ____________________________
Never apply labels to the top or bottom of tape cartridges. Doing so can
cause cartridge jams in the mini-library. Use the space on the front of the
cartridge for labels.
____________________________________________________________
4.10.3 Removing the Magazine from the Mini-Library
To remove the magazine from the mini-library, first ensure the OCP is enabled or
unlocked via the key lock (Figure 4-3).
Then:
1.
If a tape is loaded in the drive, press the Load/Unload button to unload the tape
from the drive and load it into the magazine. Press the Open button (Figure 4-5) to
open the door of the mini-library. (Pressing just the Open button also returns the
tape to the magazine and opens the door.)
2.
Slide the door all the way to the left.
3.
Grasp the magazine's handle and pull the magazine out of the mini-library.
4.10.4 Installing the Magazine into the Mini-Library
To install the magazine into the mini-library, open the mini-library door by pressing the
Open button.
__________________________CAUTION _________________________
Do not force open the magazine door manually. Always use the Open
button to open the door electronically
____________________________________________________________
Ensure the door is moved all the way to the left.
1.
Hold the magazine by the handle (Figure 4-7) and slide the magazine into the minilibrary doorway. Since the magazine is slotted, you can insert the magazine in the
correct orientation only.
2.
Slide the door to close.
3.
Ensure the door is fully closed before you proceed.
4-26 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.10.5 Selecting a Cartridge from the Magazine
After a successful initialization, the mini-library automatically selects the first slot
containing a cartridge and the Select button becomes active.
To select a cartridge: press the Select button to advance to the next slot containing a
cartridge.
4.10.6 Loading the Cartridge into the Drive
To load the cartridge from the magazine into the drive: press the Load/Unload button.
Table 4-5 explains what happens after you press the button.
Table 4-5 After Loading the Cartridge
Stage
1
What Happens
The elevator moves to the selected slot.
2
The cartridge is then removed from the magazine and placed in the
elevator.
3
The elevator moves to the drive position and inserts the cartridge
into the drive.
4
The display reads LDR ACT until the tape loads to BOT.
5
After the cartridge is inserted into the drive, the display reads DRV
ACT.
6
After the cartridge is fully loaded and at BOT, the display reads
DRV RDY.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-27
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.10.7 Unloading the Cartridge
__________________________CAUTION _________________________
Do not press the Load/Unload button until backup or other tape
operations are stopped at the terminal. Doing so can result in operation
failure and drive unavailability.
____________________________________________________________
If …
You want to unload the
cartridge from the drive
Then …
Press the Load/Unload button.
• The DRV REW message displays
• The cartridge unloads from the drive and the
display reads LDR ACT. When the cartridge returns
to the magazine, the display reads LDR RDY.
The ERR LDR message
displays, showing a
malfunction
Press the Load/Unload button to reset the mini-library
and try to clear the error.
4.10.8 Opening the Magazine Door
The Open button opens the magazine door for inserting or removing the magazine. The
button is disabled when the key lock is in the locked or disabled position.
When …
A cartridge is not in
the drive
Then …
The LDR RDY message
displays before any
operation begins.
A cartridge is in the
drive
The DRV RDY message
displays before the
operation begins
You should …
Press the Open button. The
door opens.
Press the Open button so
the cartridge unloads from
the drive and moves back
into the magazine. The
door opens.
Result: In both situations, once you close the door again, a magazine scan begins. The
LDR ACT message displays. When the scan completes, LDR RDY message displays.
4-28 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4.11 When to Use the Cleaning Tape Cartridge
Use Table 4-6 to determine when to use the cleaning cartridge.
Table 4-6 When to Use the Cleaning Cartridge
It means …
The drive head needs
cleaning or the tape is
bad (item 3 in this
table).
And you should …
Use the cleaning cartridge. Follow
the instructions in this chapter to
insert a cartridge into the magazine
and load into the drive. When
cleaning completes, the cleaning
cartridge unloads from the drive and
returns to the magazine. The LDR
RDY message displays.
2. A data cartridge
causes the HC message
to display frequently
The data cartridge
may be damaged.
Back up this data onto another
cartridge. Discard the old cartridge,
which may be damaged. A damaged
cartridge may cause unnecessary use
of the cleaning cartridge.
3. The HC message still
displays after you clean
the drive head
Your data cartridge
may be causing the
problem.
Try another data cartridge.
4. The HC message
displays after you load
the cleaning cartridge
Cleaning has not been
done and the
cartridge is expired.
Replace the cleaning cartridge.
If …
1. The HC message
displays
_________________________ NOTE ____________________________
The cleaning cartridge expires after about 20 uses.
___________________________________________________________
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem 4-29
Configuring and Operating the DLT2500 Mini-Library
4-30 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsytem
Chapter 5
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700
Mini-Library
5.1 In This Chapter
Chapter 5 includes these main topics and sections:
Topic
Section
Introduction to the Media Loader
Configure the DLT2700
Mode Select Key
Selecting Density
Operator Control Panel (OCP)
Power-On Process
Slot Select, Load/Unload, and Eject Button
Functions
Magazine
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.2 Introduction to the Mini-Library
The mini-library option includes a DLT2000 tape drive, a media loader, and a 7cartridge removable magazine.
The same SCSI target controller board controls the tape drive and the media loader.
The tape drive is always LUN 0. If the controller detects the loader's presence when the
system is turned on, the loader is presented as a SCSI-2 medium changer device on
LUN 1.
The SCSI-2 medium changer commands allow:
•
Random access to the media stored in the magazine slots
•
Sequential access of the media supported automatically in auto-loading mode
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 5-1
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
Auto-loading is implemented as a side effect of the SCSI UNLOAD command.
If …
And …
Then …
An unload is
specified
A media loader is
present
After winding the tape back into the
cartridge and moving the cartridge
from the drive to the magazine slot
from which it came, the cartridge in
the next slot is moved from the
magazine into the drive and made
ready.
The next slot is
empty, or
the cartridge
unloaded was
for the last slot in
the magazine
No cartridge is loaded into the drive.
5.3 Configure the DLT2700
This section describes how to configure the DLT2700 including:
Topic
Section
Configuration Guidelines
Switchpack Location
Disable Parity Checking
Change the SCSI ID
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.2
5.3.3
The DLT2700 is factory set to SCSI ID5, unless otherwise specified.
If your system generates parity, the DLT2700 can check for correct parity on the SCSI
bus.
5-2 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
5.3.1 Configuration Guidelines
Your system uses the SCSI ID to identify, or address, the DLT2700. Follow these
guidelines when configuring the DLT2700 for your system:
If you install the DLT2700 as …
Then …
The only SCSI device or one of
multiple SCSI devices on the bus
Be sure to use a SCSI ID that is unique
from any other device or system ID on the
SCSI bus.
The last or only device on the SCSI
bus
The user must terminate the bus by
installing a terminator.
5.3.2 Disable Parity Checking
To disable parity, see your service representative.
5.3.3 Change the SCSI ID
The user can change the SCSI ID via the pushbutton switch on the mini-library rear
panel. Press the switch button(s) above or below the number display (0-7) to set the
desired SCSI ID. Press the top button to increase the number or press the bottom button
to decrease the number.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 5-3
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
Figure 5-1 shows the location of the SCSI ID pushbutton switch.
Figure 5-1 Changing the SCSI ID via the Pushbutton Switch
SCSI Connector
Wire Cable Clamps
Fan
Power Connector
Voltage Selection Switch
5-4 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Pushbutton Switch
Power Switch
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
5.4 Mode Select Key
The Mode Select key (Figure 5-2), on the front of the loader, locks the loader transfer
assembly into the enclosure and locks the receiver closed. The key has four modes:
Mode
Use
OCP Disabled
Automatic
Manual
Service
Operational
Operational
Operational
Servicing procedures
5.4.1 OCP Disabled Mode
When the magazine is inserted into the receiver and the receiver is closed, the loader
transfer assembly scans the magazine. The first cartridge in the magazine automatically
loads into the drive.
When you copy data to the tape, operations stop if one of the following happens:
•
Storage capacity of the last tape cartridge is exceeded
•
No tape cartridge is in the next sequential slot in the magazine
To lock the DLT2700 subsystem into the enclosure and lock the receiver, set the Mode
Select key to OCP Disabled. The OCP pushbuttons are disabled.
The following results of setting the Mode Select key to OCP disabled are:
•=
The OCP pushbuttons are disabled.
•=
SCSI media changer commands are disabled.
•=
If the receiver were open and a magazine were then inserted, the lowest-numbered
cartridge is automatically loaded into the drive. Subsequently, issuing the SCSI
‘unload’ command would unload the cartridge and load the next higher-numbered
cartridge.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 5-5
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
Figure 5-2 shows the operator’s control panel.
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL
Eject
Load/Unload
MODE SELECT KEY
BUTTON
AND
INDICATOR
AREA
Slot Select
OCP
DISABLED
0
AUTOMATIC
MODE
Power On
OCP LABEL
CURRENT
SLOT
INDICATORS
0-6
Write
Protected
Tape In Use
1
MANUAL
MODE
Use
Cleaning Tape
SERVICE
MODE
Magazine
Fault
Loader Fault
2
Density Select
Eject
Bus ID
3
Load/Unload
Slot Select
0
Power On
Write
Protected
1
Tape In Use
Use
Cleaning Tape
4
Magazine
Fault
Density
Override
Loader Fault
2
Density Select
3
5
2.6
4
Density
6.0
Override
5
2.6
10.0
6.0
10.0
6
Compress
6
Compress
ZKO-1217-18-DG
Figure 5-2 DLT2700 Operator Control Panel
5-6 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
5.4.2 Automatic Mode
This is the default or normal mode of the DLT2700 subsystem. This mode allows the
DLT2700 to load and unload cartridges as needed during backup procedures.
When the user engages the Automatic Mode a SCSI ‘unload’ command is issued, not
only is the currently loaded cartridge unloaded from the drive and restored to its
position in the magazine, the next higher-numbered cartridge is loaded into the drive.
A SCSI ‘load’ command is unnecessary, except to load the lowest-number cartridge
upon inserting the magazine.
When you copy data to the tape, operations stop if one of the following happens:
•
Storage capacity of the last tape cartridge is exceeded
•
No tape cartridge is in the next sequential slot in the magazine
To lock the DLT2700 subsystem into its normal operating position in the enclosure, but
leave the receiver unlocked, set the Mode Select key to Automatic mode.
The following results of setting the Mode Select key to Automatic mode are:
•=
The OCP pushbuttons are enabled.
•=
SCSI media changer commands are enabled.
•=
Cartridge are sequentially loaded by the SCSI ‘unload’ command, but the lowestnumbered cartridge is not automatically loaded upon magazine insertion. Behavior
in this mode is modified by the EEPROM parameters ENALDRAUTOLD (1) and
DISLDRAUTOLDMC (0), which enable both sequential and random-access
functionality.
5.4.3 Manual Mode
Automatic loading and unloading of cartridges does not occur in this mode. You must
press the Load/Unload button to move each cartridge. This mode is most useful for, but
not restricted to, copying specific files to or from tape. Basically, only the OCP
pusbuttons are enabled, as SCSI commands are disabled.
To lock the DLT2700 subsystem into the enclosure, set the Mode Select key to Manual
mode.
The following results of setting the Mode Select key to Manual mode are:
•=
The receiver is unlocked and can be opened.
•=
SCSI move media commands are disabled
•=
SCSI load/unload commands are disabled.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 5-7
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
__________________________Note _____________________________
During Manual mode, the cartridge returns to the magazine, but the
current Slot Select indicator does not advance forward to the next
available cartridge.
____________________________________________________________
5.4.4 Service Mode
Service mode allows for servicing procedures.
•=
SCSI ‘test unit ready’ commands always return not ready
For details on controls and indicators and operation, see the sections after Section 5.5
in this chapter.
5-8 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
5.5 Selecting Density
Section 5.5 describes the loader's density select feature.
_________________________ Caution __________________________
If a prerecorded tape and write from beginning of tape (BOT),
all prerecorded data is lost. This includes density changes,
since they only occur when writing from BOT.
___________________________________________________________
Ways of Selecting Density
Density selection is only available when you use a CompacTape III tape..
The user can select CompacTape III tape density by using any of the following:
1.
On all read operations and all write append operations, the recorded density is the
density to be used.
2.
On a Write from BOT, the tape density may be changed by:
•
The Density Select button. Using the Density Select button always
overrides a host selection.
•
A programmable host selection via your operating system. (The Density
Override light is off, indicating automatic or host density selection).
•
Native default density 10.0 GB for the CompacTape III (assuming the
Density Select button or the host selection was not used).
How to Select Density
To select density with the DLT2700 using the CompacTape III cartridge:
1.
Press the Load/Unload button to load the cartridge into the drive. The yellow Tape
in Use light blinks while the tape loads and calibrates.
2.
After calibration completes, the yellow Tape in Use light remains lit.
3.
The indicator shows the tape's prerecorded density lights, such as 2.6, 6.0 or 10.0.
4.
The user can use the loader operator control panel at various times, not just after
loading a tape. Density selection is inactive until the write from BOT command is
issued. The controller remembers the density selection state until you do one of the
following:
•
Change the density selection
•
Eject the magazine from the loader
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 5-9
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
Density Select Example using a CompacTape III Tape
If you have loaded a CompacTape III tape with a prerecorded 2.6 GB density and you
use the Density Select button to select 10.0 GB density, the following should happen:
•
The 2.6 light remains lit−density has not changed yet and the steady light indicates
recorded tape density
•
The 10.0 light blinks−density change is pending
•
Density Override lights
When a write from BOT occurs, the following should happen:
•
2.6 turns off
•
10.0 lights steady
•
Density Override remains lit
5-10 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
Table 5-1 shows the results of density selection using a CompacTape III tape.
Table 5-1 Results of Density Selection using a CompacTape III tape
If …
Then …
You did not select the
Density Select button
The lights show the actual density when the tape is
reading or writing. The lights are on steady and the
Density Override light is off.
You select the Density
Select button, and if the
actual tape density is
the same as the density
you selected
The actual density and Density Override light. For
example, if the actual tape density is 10.0 GB and
the selected tape density is 10.0 GB, then the light
next to 10.0 is on.
You select the Density
Select button, and if the
actual tape density
differs from the density
selected
1. The light with the actual density is on steady
2. The light with the selected density blinks
3. Density Override lights steady
For example, if the actual tape density is 10.0 GB
and the selected density is 6.0 GB, the 10.0 lights
steady, 6.0 light blinks, and Density Override lights
steady.
To select density over the SCSI bus:
1.
Do a SCSI MODE SELECT with the density you want. For more details, see
Chapter 8.
2.
Write data to the tape from BOT.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 5-11
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
5.6 Operator Control Panel
The DLT2700 operator control panel (OCP) has 4 OCP pushbuttons and 23 lights
(Table 5-2) used with the Mode Select key. See Section 5.4 for information on the
Mode Select key and its functions. See Section 5.8 for more details on button and
indicator operations.
Table 5-2 lists each button/indicator and its function.
Table 5-2 DLT2700 Operator Control Pane
Button/Indicator
Color
Function
Eject button
−
Opens the receiver, allowing access to the magazine
for removal and insertion of cartridges. Also
unloads the tape from the drive to the magazine, if a
tape is inserted.
Eject light
Green
Indicates you can press the Eject button to unload
cartridges from the drive to the magazine and open
the receiver. Lights when a magazine fault has
occurred to indicate Eject is the only function
available at that time.
Load/Unload button
−
•=
•=
•=
=
Loads the currently selected cartridge into the
tape drive
Unloads the cartridge currently in the tape drive
Resets the subsystem if there is a loader fault
Load/Unload light
Green
The user can press the Load/Unload button.
Slot Select button
−
Increments the current slot indicator to the next slot.
Slot Select indicator
Green
The user can press the Slot Select button to move
the current slot indicator to the next slot.
Power On light
Green
The DLT2700 is in a known good power state and
dc voltages are within tolerance).
5-12 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
Table 5-2 DLT2700 Operator Control Panel (Cont’d)
Button/Indicator
Color
Function
Write Protected
light
Orange
When on, indicates the cartridge in the drive is
write-protected by one of these methods:
•= The write-protect switch is set to the writeprotect position
•= Host software write-protect qualifiers
•= When off, indicates that the cartridge in the
drive is write-enabled.
Tape In Use light
Yellow
Indicates tape drive activity as follows:
•= Slow blinking indicates tape is rewinding
•= Rapid blinking indicates tape is reading or
writing
•= When on steadily, indicates a cartridge is in
the drive and the tape is not moving
•= When off, indicates no cartridge is in the drive
Use Cleaning Tape
light
Orange
The read/write head needs cleaning. See Chapter
3.
Magazine Fault light
Red
Indicates a magazine failure.
Loader Fault light
Red
Indicates a loader transfer assembly error
or drive error.
Current Slot lights
0-6
Green
Identifies the current slot (see Slot Select button).
Each current slot light blinks when its
corresponding cartridge moves to or from the
drive. Also used with the Magazine Fault or
Loader Fault light to show the type of fault
(Section 6.6.1 and Section 6.6.2.).
Density Select
Green
Indicates you can choose a density on the OCP
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 5-13
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
Table 5-2 DLT2700 Operator Control Panel (Cont’d)
Button/Indicator
Color
Function
Density Override
Yellow
Indicates tape drive activity as follows:
On steadyyou selected a density from the front
panel.
Off (default)density to be selected by the host
(automatic).
Blinkingyou are in density selection mode.
2.6
Yellow
Indicates tape drive activity as follows:
On steadytape is recorded in 2.6 GB format.
Blinkingtape is recorded in another density.
You selected this density for a write from BOT.
6.0
Yellow
Indicates tape drive activity as follows:
On steadytape is recorded in 6.0 GB format.
Blinkingtape is recorded in another density.
You selected this density for a write from BOT.
10.0
Yellow
Indicates tape drive activity as follows:
On steadytape is recorded in 10.0 GB format.
Blinkingtape is recorded in another density.
You selected this density for a write from BOT.
Compress
Yellow
Indicates tape drive activity as follows:
OnCompression mode enabled. Compression
can be done in 10.0 GB density only.
OffCompression mode disabled.
5-14 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
5.7 Power-On Process
_________________________ Caution __________________________
Before applying power, verify the DLT2700 is set (see the
label on the mini-library rear panel) for the available ac
supply voltage.
___________________________________________________________
Table 5-3 explains what happens during each phase of the DLT2700 operation.
Table 5-3 Loader Power-On Self-Test
Phase
1.
2.
3.
4.
What Happens
When you power on the DLT2700, the Loader Fault and Power On lights
on the loader OCP are on.
One second later, all lights are on. Within 15 seconds, POST of the
loader mechanics completes.
•= If the Magazine Fault and Loader Fault lights turn off, loader POST
succeeded.
•= If the Magazine Fault and Loader Fault lights stay on, loader POST
failed.
A few seconds later, the drive controller resets the loader.
Loader POST starts again.
If …
Then POST …
The Magazine Fault and Loader Fault lights
turn off and shortly after, all OCP lights but
Power On turn off
The Magazine Fault and Loader Fault lights
stay on
Passed
Failed
_________________________ Note _____________________________
If the Magazine Fault or Loader Fault lights remain on, POST
detected an error. See Chapter 6 for error conditions.
___________________________________________________________
5.
The elevator scans the magazine to determine which slots contain
cartridges.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 5-15
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
Table 5-3 Loader Power-On Self-Test (cont’d)
Phase
6.
What Happens
If the subsystem magazine has a cartridge in slot 0, and no cartridge is in
the drive, these lights should be on:
•= Power On
•= Eject
•= Load/Unload
•= Slot Select
•= Slot 0
5-16 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
5.8 Slot Select, Load/Unload, and Eject Button Functions
The Slot Select, Load/Unload, Eject, and Density Select buttons are OCP pushbuttons.
They contain a green light and they are operable only when their corresponding lights
are on.
_________________________ Note _____________________________
The Load/Unload button has three functions:
•= Load
•=
Unload
•=
Reset
If a loader fault occurred and the Loader Fault light is on,
press Load/Unload to reset the DLT2700.
___________________________________________________________
5.8.1 Selecting a Cartridge
To select a cartridge: press the Slot Select button to advance the slot light to the next
available slot. After a successful initialization, the DLT2700 subsystem automatically
selects slot 0 and the Slot Select button becomes active. The Load/Unload and Eject
lights remain on during slot selection.
5.8.2 Loading the Cartridge
To load the cartridge from the loader into the drive: press the Load/Unload button.
Table 5-4 explains what happens after pressing the button.
Table 5-4 Load/Unload Functions
Stage
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
What Happens
The Select Slot, Load/Unload, and Eject lights turn off, and the
elevator moves to the selected slot, indicated by the light.
The cartridge is then removed from the magazine and placed in the
elevator.
The elevator moves to the drive position and inserts the cartridge into
the drive.
The lights remain off until the tape loads to the (BOT).
After the cartridge is loaded into the drive, the Eject and Load/Unload
lights turn on, and the corresponding buttons are enabled. The Slot
Select light remains off.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 5-17
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
5.8.3 Unloading the Cartridge
__________________________Caution ___________________________
Do not press the Load/Unload button until backup or other
tape operations are stopped at the terminal. Doing so can
result in operation failure and drive unavailability.
__________________________Note _____________________________
The Load/Unload light must be on before you press the
Load/Unload button to load or unload a cartridge.
____________________________________________________________
If …
Then …
You want to unload the
cartridge from the drive
Press the Load/Unload button.
•=The Select Slot, Load/Unload, and Eject lights turn
off.
•=The cartridge unloads from the drive into the
magazine.
•=However, automatic operation now stops and the
Select Slot operation does not move in increments.
The lights turn on once the cartridge is returned to
the magazine.
The Loader Fault light is
on, showing a malfunction
Press the Load/Unload button to reset the subsystem
and try to clear the error.
5-18 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
5.8.4 Opening the Receiver
The Eject button opens the receiver for insertion or removal of the magazine. The
button is disabled when the Mode Select key is in the OCP Disabled position. The Eject
button can also be used to unload a tape from the drive.
When …
Then …
You should …
A cartridge is not in
the drive
The Slot Select,
Load/Unload, and Eject
lights are on before any
operation begins.
Press the Eject button to
turn off all lights. The
elevator then returns to its
home position and the
receiver opens.
A cartridge is in the
drive
The Eject and
Load/Unload lights are on
before the operation
begins
Press the Eject button to
turn off both lights and the
cartridge unloads from the
drive and moves back into
the magazine. The receiver
then opens to allow access
to the magazine.
Result: In both situations, once the receiver is closed again, a magazine scan begins,
and the lights turn back on when the scan completes.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 5-19
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
5.9 Magazine
The front of the magazine has numbers, 0 through 6, that indicate the number of the
slot.
__________________________Note _____________________________
Insert and remove all cartridges at the front of the magazine.
____________________________________________________________
5.9.1 Inserting a Cartridge into the Front of the Magazine
To simplify cartridge insertion: place the magazine on a flat surface with the slots
facing you (Figure 5-4). Each slot is numbered to ensure you are inserting the cartridge
correctly in the front of the magazine. Usually, cartridges are inserted into consecutive
slots.
To insert a cartridge into the magazine:
1.
Grasp the cartridge with the write-protect switch on the right side facing you
(Figure 5-3).
2.
Set the cartridge's write-protect switch to the desired position.
3.
If you want to …
Then …
Write to the tape
Slide the switch to the right (orange indicator is
not visible)
Write-protect the
tape
Slide the switch to the left (orange indicator is
visible)
Insert the cartridge (Figure 5-4) by pushing it into the slot until you hear a click. A
small metal tab holds the cartridge in place.
5-20 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
ORANGE
INDICATOR
WRITEPROTECT
SWITCH
WRITEENABLED
WRITEPROTECTED
ZKO-1217-04-DG
Figure 5-3 Write-Protect Switch on a Cartridge
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 5-21
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
BACK OF
MAGAZINE
0
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
1
2
3
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
NOTE: Push tape in
until a click is heard
FRONT OF
MAGAZINE
SLOT
NUMBERS
0-6
ZKO-1217-05-DG
Figure 5-4 Inserting a Cartridge into the Magazine
5-22 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
5.9.2 Removing a Cartridge from the Magazine
To remove a cartridge from the magazine: at the front of the magazine press in on the
cartridge (Figure 5-5) until it stops and you hear a click. Then, release. The slot has a
spring-release action.
_________________________ Note _____________________________
Never apply labels to the top or bottom of tape cartridges. Doing so can
cause cartridge jams in the DLT2700 subsystem. Use the space on the
front of the cartridge for labels.
___________________________________________________________
5.9.3 Removing the Magazine from the Receiver
To remove the magazine from the receiver, first ensure:
1.
The Power On light is on (Figure 5-2).
2.
The Eject light is on. (It must be on before you can press the Eject button.)
Then:
1.
Press the Eject button (Figure 5-2) to open the receiver. If a tape is loaded in the
drive, pressing the Eject button also causes the tape to unload.
2.
Grasp the receiver after it opens (Figure 5-6), and gently pull it forward to access
the magazine.
3.
Grasp the magazine's handle only to lift the magazine out of the receiver.
5.9.4 Installing the Magazine into the Receiver
To install the magazine into the receiver:
1.
Slide the magazine down into the receiver (Figure 5-6) while holding the magazine
by the handle. Since the magazine is slotted, you can restore it in the correct
orientation only.
2.
Push the receiver closed.
3.
Observe that the receiver is fully closed in the DLT2700 subsystem before
proceeding.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 5-23
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
BACK OF
MAGAZINE
0
1
2
NOTE: Push tape in
until a click is heard
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
0
1
2
1
3
2
4
4
3
5
5
4
6
5
6
SLOT
NUMBERS
0-6
FRONT OF
MAGAZINE
ZKO-1217-06-DG
Figure 5-5 Removing a Cartridge from the Front of the Magazine
5-24 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
Ejec
Loa
Slot
Pow
Wri
t
d/U
nloa
Sele
er O
n
te P
ro
Tap
Driv
Den
tect
e In
Use
Use
Cle
anin
Loa
d
ct
g Ta
pe
e Fa
u
d Fa
u
sity
lt
lt
Sele
ct
Den
sit
Ove y
rrid
e
2.6
6.0
10.0
15.0
Com
pres
s
ZKO-3135-04-DG
Figure 5-6 Receiver Opened
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 5-25
Configuring and Operating the DLT2700 Mini-Library
5-26 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting Guide for the
DLT2500/DLT2700 Mini-Library
6.1 In This Chapter
Chapter 6 includes the following main topics and sections:
Topic
Section
Conditions Necessary for Button Operation
Backup Operation Failure
Avoiding Basic Problems
Error Conditions : DLT2500
DLT2700
Power Problems
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.2 Conditions Necessary for Button Operation
Be sure to review information in the previous chapters to ensure you are correctly
operating the DLT2500/DLT2700 mini-library.
Before you press the Slot Select, Load/Unload, or Eject button on the
DLT2500/DLT2700 OCP, check for the conditions listed in Table 6-1 and ensure the:
•
Power On indicator is on
•
Receiver is closed
•
Mode Select key is not set to OCP Disabled
Pressing these buttons has no effect if their indicators are off.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 6-1
Troubleshooting Guide for the DLT2500/DLT2700 Mini-Library
__________________________Note _____________________________
Do not press the Load/Unload button to abort any function of the
DLT2500/DLT2700 subsystem. Press [Ctrl/Y] or [Ctrl/C] instead.
____________________________________________________________
See Chapter 4 for more information on the functions of the DLT2500 OCP buttons.
Table 6-1 DLT2500 OCP Button Conditions
If you want to …
Select another slot in
the magazine
First, ensure the …
• Magazine contains at
Then you can press
this button …
Select
least two cartridges
• LDR RDY displays
Load the selected
cartridge into the tape
drive
• Magazine contains at
Return the selected
cartridge to its original
slot in the magazine
DRV RDY displays
Load/Unload
Clear a magazine or
loader error
ERR MAG or ERR LDR
displays
Load/Unload
Open the door or
unload the cartridge
from the drive and open
the door
LDR RDY displays
Open
Load/Unload
least one cartridge
• LDR RDY displays
6-2 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Troubleshooting Guide for the DLT2500/DLT2700 Mini-Library
See Chapter 5 for more information on the functions of the DLT2700 OCP buttons.
Table 6-2 DLT2700 OCP Button Conditions
If you want to …
First ensure the …
Select another slot in the
magazine
• Magazine contains at
Load the selected cartridge
into the tape drive
• Magazine contains at
Return the selected cartridge
to its original slot in the
magazine
Load/Unload light is on
Load/Unload
Clear a magazine or loader
fault
• Load/Unload light is on
• Magazine Fault or Loader
Load/Unload
Then you can press
this button …
Slot Select
least two cartridges
• Slot Select light is on
Load/Unload
least one cartridge
• Load/Unload light is on
Fault light is on
Open the receiver, or unload
the cartridge from the drive
and open the receiver
Eject light is on
Eject
6.3 Backup Operation Failure
Some manual operations, if not performed correctly, may cause backup operations to
fail during BACKUP:
•
Loading write-protected CompacTape III cartridges when executing write
operations
•
Selecting the incorrect cartridge slot from which to initialize operations
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 6-3
Troubleshooting Guide for the DLT2500/DLT2700 Mini-Library
6.4 Avoiding Basic Problems
Follow these guidelines when you operate the DLT2500/DLT2700 subsystem to avoid
basic problems:
•
Use CompacTape III cartridges.
•
Check the tape leader in the cartridge by lifting the cartridge latch that opens the
door to expose the leader. Be sure the leader is in the same position as the one
shown in Figure 6-1.
__________________________Caution ___________________________
Do not touch the exposed magnetic tape. If the tape leader is not in the
correct position, use a new cartridge.
____________________________________________________________
•
Be sure the receiver is fully closed and the current slot indicator is on for the
starting cartridge.
•
Be sure no slots in the magazine are empty between the starting cartridge and the
expected completion cartridge.
Cartridge
Leader
Door Lock
(Release by lifting
door lock with thumb)
MLO-012718
Figure 6-1 Opening the Cartridge Door to Check the Tape Leader
6-4 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Troubleshooting Guide for the DLT2500/DLT2700 Mini-Library
6.5 DLT2500 Error Conditions
Error indications fall into these main categories:
•
Magazine Error
•
Loader Error
•
Drive Error
•
Controller Error
•
Unknown Error
6.5.1 DLT2500 Magazine Error
The ERR MAG message tells you the status of cartridges reported by the loader and
drive is inconsistent. In some magazine errors, the mini-library retries the error three
times before showing failure. All magazine errors cause the ERR MAG message to
display.
6.5.1.1 DLT2500 Clearing a Magazine Error
When you press the Open button, the mini-library attempts to clear the error. The door
opens to let you remove the magazine. Verify that cartridges are inserted securely into
the magazine and the magazine is not defective.
If you still cannot clear the error, call your service representative.
6.5.2 DLT2500 Loader Error Description
The ERR LDR message tells you the mini-library detected an error in the loader
transfer assembly. In some loader transfer assembly errors, the mini-library retries the
error three times before showing failure. All loader errors cause the ERR LDR message
to display.
6.5.3 DLT2500 Drive Error Description
The ERR DRV message tells you the mini-library detected an error in the tape drive. In
some drive errors, the mini-library retries the error three times before showing failure.
All drive errors cause the ERR DRV message to display.
6.5.4 DLT2500 Controller Error Description
The ERR CTL message tells you the mini-library detected an error in the controller. In
some controller errors, the mini-library retries the error three times before showing
failure. All controller errors cause the ERR CTL message to display.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 6-5
Troubleshooting Guide for the DLT2500/DLT2700 Mini-Library
6.5.5 DLT2500 Unknown Error Description
The ERR UNK message tells you the mini-library detected an error of unknown origin.
In some unknown errors, the mini-library retries the error three times before showing
failure.
6.5.5.1 DLT2500 Clearing a Loader, Drive, Controller, or Unknown Error
When you press the Load/Unload button, the mini-library attempts to clear the error.
When you press the Open button, the door opens to let you access the magazine.
If you still cannot clear the error, call your service representative.
6.6 DLT2700 Error Conditions
Error indications fall into two main categories:
•
Magazine Fault − In most cases, this is an operator-correctable condition, indicated
when the Magazine Fault light is on. If you cannot resolve the fault, call your
service representative.
•
Loader Fault − This condition most likely requires service from a service
representative. It is indicated when the Loader Fault light is on.
6.6.1 DLT2700 Magazine Fault Cases
A magazine fault can occur during any of the following cases:
1.
A cartridge has been removed from the magazine incorrectly.
__________________________Note _____________________________
This can only occur if the loader has been opened in service mode and
cannot occur under normal operation.
____________________________________________________________
2.
A cartridge was manually unloaded from the drive.
3.
A cartridge that was loaded into a drive by the loader was manually unloaded and
put back into the magazine.
4.
A cartridge was manually inserted into the drive.
When these conditions are present, the Magazine Fault light turns on, indicating a
situation that can be corrected by the operator. Eject is also on to inform you that this is
the only function available at this time.
6-6 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Troubleshooting Guide for the DLT2500/DLT2700 Mini-Library
6.6.1.1 Detecting Cases 1, 2, and 3
The user can tell these cases have occurred when the Magazine Fault light and slot
lights 0 and 5 are on.
_________________________ Caution __________________________
Never remove a cartridge from the magazine by moving the metal tab in
front of the cartridge. This is the main source of magazine faults. Use the
proper procedure, Chapter 5.
___________________________________________________________
To clear a magazine fault caused by cases 1, 2, and 3:
1.
Press the Eject button to open the receiver.
2.
Remove the magazine and check for a metal tab over an open slot. This is the slot
from which the cartridge was removed.
If …
Then …
A metal tab is found over
an open slot
1. Reinsert the missing cartridge properly by pushing
the tab aside and insert cartridge until it snaps into
place. If no cartridge is needed in this slot, push one
into the slot and then remove it according to normal
procedure (Chapter 5). This step is critical to avoid
more magazine faults.
2. Insert the magazine into the receiver.
3. Close the receiver.
6.6.1.2 Detecting Case 4
The user can tell this case occurred when the Magazine Fault light and slot lights 0 and
6 are on. This is the only time slot lights 0 and 6 are on for a magazine fault. To clear a
magazine fault caused by case 4:
1.
Press the Eject button to open the receiver.
2.
Close the receiver to clear the Fault light.
3.
Press the Load/Unload button; the cartridge loads, but is not removed from the
drive. The Magazine Fault light comes on, and the receiver opens. The service
person must remove the magazine, reach in and lift the handle on the front of the
drive, and pull out the cartridge.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 6-7
Troubleshooting Guide for the DLT2500/DLT2700 Mini-Library
__________________________Note _____________________________
Slot 0 lights in all error conditions to indicate an error occurred. It is not
a Slot Select indicator in this case.
____________________________________________________________
After you clear the error try loading and unloading cartridges to verify operation.
6.6.2 DLT2700 Loader Fault Description
A loader fault indicates the DLT2700 detected a fatal error in the loader transfer
assembly or in the tape drive. In some loader transfer assembly errors, the subsystem
retries the error three times before indicating failure. All loader faults cause the Loader
Fault light and an associated subcode to light.
Loader Fault indicates errors in the loader transfer assembly, controller module, or
drive. The suspected fault location is indicated by the following slot lights:
•
Slots 4 and 0a controller module
•
Slots 5 and 0a loader transfer assembly
•
Slots 6 and 0drive
__________________________Note _____________________________
Error lights do not blink. During hardware failures, the controller module
determines action.
____________________________________________________________
6.6.2.1 Clearing a DLT2700 Loader Fault
When a loader fault occurs, the Load/Unload and Eject lights are on. When you press
the Load/Unload button, the DLT2700 attempts to clear the error. When you press
Eject, the receiver opens to let you access the magazine.
6.7 Power Problems
If the Power On light is not on, or your system does not recognize the
DLT2500/DLT2700 subsystem:
•=
Ensure the power plug is secure.
•=
Verify with your system manager that the subsystem configuration is correct.
6-8 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
7
Firmware Update (From Tape)
7.1 In This Chapter
Chapter 7 includes the following main topics and sections:
Topic
Section
DLT2000 Firmware Update Overview
Creating a "Firmware Update Tape"
Firmware Update Procedure
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.2 DLT2000 Firmware Update Overview
Through the use of the front panel the DLT2000 Cartridge Tape Subsystem family can
automatically update the controller firmware directly from a tape containing the
appropriate information.
The user places the subsystem into firmware Update Mode via the front panel and then
simply load a tape that includes the DLT2000 firmware image file.
The subsystem automatically reads and verifies the tape information has a valid
DLT2000 firmware image. If the image data passes all the verifications, the image data
is installed into the controller's nonvolatile code memory.
This chapter details the firmware update procedure.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 7-1
Firmware Update (From Tape)
7.2.1 Before Doing the Procedure
Before doing the procedure, remember:
__________________________Caution ___________________________
During the firmware update, when the new image is actually being
programmed into the FLASH EEPROMs, a power fail (but not BUS
RESET) causes the controller module to be unusable. When doing a
firmware update, take reasonable precautions to prevent a power fail.
____________________________________________________________
7.2.1.1 Updating Firmware on a Standalone System
The user can update the subsystem, even when the subsystem is not attached to a SCSI
bus, that is, a standalone system. However, to do an update, the Power-On Self-Test
(POST) must pass first, and to pass, POST needs a properly terminated bus.
The single-ended DLT2000 controller module has active terminators. Note the jumper
covering the two pins labeled on the etch: TRM PWR/TRM ENB.
The differential DLT2000 controller module does not have on-board termination.
To do a firmware update on a standalone system:
1. Find the TRM PWR/TRM ENB connector on the left side of the
DLT2000 drive (Figure 7-1, number ).
7-2 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Firmware Update (From Tape)
Front
Bezel
1
Left Side
Front
Bezel
2
3
Right Side
ZKO−1217−17−RGS
Figure 7-1 DLT2000 Subsystem Connectors
TRM PWR/TRM ENB Connector
SCSI ID Connector
Loader Connector
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 7-3
Firmware Update (From Tape)
2. Ensure the TRM PWR/TRM ENB jumpers are in position (Figure 7-2,
number ).
1
3
2
4
ZKO−1217−18−RGS
Figure 7-2 Jumper Settings for TRM PWR/TRM ENB Connector
No Term Power/Disable
Active Termination
No Term Power/Enable
Active Termination
Term Power/Disable
Active Termination
Term Power/Enable
Active Termination
From the time the tape is inserted and the drive handle is closed, updating the firmware
takes from 2 to 3 minutes.
7.3 Creating a "Firmware Update Tape"
To do the firmware update, you must have a CompacTape III cartridge with a copy of
the firmware image. This image must be byte-written onto the tape in a 4K block
format. The image must be "copied" onto the tape instead of using the backup utility.
7.3.1 On UN*X Systems
The FTP utility can be used to transfer the binary firmware image file onto the UN*X
system. Be sure to specify "type image" before doing the "get" or "put." Otherwise,
extra characters may be added to the file, causing the image file to be invalid. The
image file should be exactly 1152*512 bytes in size.
When making the update tape, copy the image file to the tape media using a block size
of 4096, that is dd, ltf, and so forth. The tape has to be uncompressed.
7-4 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Firmware Update (From Tape)
7.4 Firmware Update Procedure
Section 7.4 describes the procedure for updating the firmware (code) of the DLT2000
subsystem controller. The update is done from a cartridge that stores the firmware
image. Firmware update from the host is also supported. See the section on the SCSI
WRITE BUFFER command in Chapter 8 for details.
Firmware updates are supported on the DLT2000 with and without the media loader.
The steps for performing the update are similar for each. To update the firmware with
the:
•
Drive only configuration, see "Updating the Firmware on DLT2000 (Drive
Only Configuration)"
•
Drive and loader configuration, see "Updating the Firmware on the DLT2500
(Drive and Loader Configuration)"
•
Drive and loader configuration, see "Updating the Firmware on the DLT2700
(Drive and Loader Configuration)"
_________________________ Caution __________________________
Never turn off power if you think the firmware is being updated. This can
damage the controller.
___________________________________________________________
7.4.1 Updating the Firmware on DLT2000 (Drive Only
Configuration)
1. Get or make a CompacTape III with the firmware image of the desired
revision level copied to it.
2. Put the DLT2000 subsystem into firmware update mode. To do this:
a. Remove any cartridge that is in the target DLT2000 drive and
close the handle (down position).
b. Press the Unload button on the drive front panel and hold the
button (about 6 seconds) until the Write Protect indicator
blinks. This means the DLT2000 subsystem has recognized
your request for firmware update mode and is waiting for the
sequence to complete.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 7-5
Firmware Update (From Tape)
If the Write Protect indicator does not blink, check that:
1. POST passed
2. The drive is unloaded
3. The drive handle is in the down position
c.
Then, release the Unload button and press the button again
within 4 seconds. The second press should take less than 1
second.
d. The Tape in Use and the Write Protect indicators blink,
showing the tape subsystem recognizes the firmware update
mode has been selected.
e.
If selecting the firmware update mode is not successful (for
example, pressing the button the second time takes longer than
one second) the Write Protect indicator should stop blinking
within several seconds.
Try the procedure again. If the drive and controller are not
properly communicating, you cannot select firmware update.
3. Once you have selected the firmware update mode, insert a cartridge
into the drive, which:
a. Temporarily turns off the Tape in Use and Write Protect
indicators.
__________________________Note _____________________________
Calibration and directory processing cause the tape to move for a few
minutes before data is actually read.
____________________________________________________________
b. Automatically reads the cartridge
c.
Examines the data
d. Verifies the data is a valid DLT2000 firmware image
Firmware update mode is automatically cleared at this
point. If the firmware image is valid and:
•=
If the drive code is up-to-date, the drive code does not
go through an update.
•=
If the drive code is not up-to-date, the drive code goes
through an update, taking 2 to 3 minutes.
7-6 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Firmware Update (From Tape)
4. While the drive code goes through the update, the Write Protect and
Tape in Use indicators flash alternately.
5. When the drive code update is complete, the drive resets, and goes
through Power-On Self-Test (POST). The process waits until the tape is
reloaded at beginning of tape (BOT).
6. If the firmware image is valid, the controller's flash EEPROM memory
is automatically updated with the new firmware image. The Write
Protect and Tape in Use indicators flash again during the controller
firmware update.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 7-7
Firmware Update (From Tape)
7.4.1.1 Interpreting the Results (DLT2000 Code Update)
Two possible results can occur:
•
The firmware update cartridge is unloaded: this means a successful
update.
On the DLT2000, the media is placed into the cartridge, the door is
unlocked, and the green Operate Handle indicator is turned on.
•
The firmware update cartridge is NOT unloaded: this means the update
was unsuccessful.
The subsystem should still be usable, but this depends on why the
update failed. Reasons for failure could be:
1. Power failure
2. Bad image on the tape
3. Broken Flash EEPROMs
7-8 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Firmware Update (From Tape)
Table 7-1 gives additional details.
Table 7-1 Results (DLT2000 Code Update)
Then...
1. The flash EEPROM containing the current
firmware is erased.
2. The new image is programmed in. The
subsystem completes the update in about 2
minutes. Then:
•=The tape drive resets itself.
If...
The image is valid
•=POST takes place.
•=The drive automatically unloads the tape
cartridge containing the firmware image,
so you can remove the cartridge. This
shows a successful firmware update.
1. The tape is NOT a valid
firmware update tape.
2. The tape does not contain a
valid image
No update is attempted. The Write Protect and
Tape In Use indicators do not blink. The drive
resets and the tape stays loaded to signal the
firmware update was unsuccessful.
The tape contains a valid image,
but for some reason the
reprogramming flash memory
fails
The controller is probably unusable and needs
to be replaced. The tape drive resets itself and
reruns POST, which fails if flash memory does
not contain a valid image.
_________________________ Caution __________________________
Code update can appear finished, but in fact it is still processing. Wait 20
seconds for the green light to appear to ensure the code update has been
completed.
___________________________________________________________
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 7-9
Firmware Update (From Tape)
7.4.2 Updating the Firmware on the DLT2500 (Drive and Loader
Configuration)
1.
Get or make a CompacTape with the code image of the specified revision level
copied to it.
2.
Put the mini-library into code update mode. To do this:
3.
a.
With the LDR RDY message displaying, press the OCP Open button to
open the door and remove the magazine. Then, close the door.
b.
Remove all cartridges from the magazine and install the code update
cartridge into the magazine.
c.
Press and hold the Display Mode button (about 5 seconds) until the SCSI
ID SEL message displays.
d.
Press and hold the Load/Unload button until the SCSI ID SEL message
starts to flash. Immediately release the button, and then press it again.
The CODE UPDATE MODE message now displays.
Press the Open button two times to open the magazine door. Load the magazine
with the code update tape into the mini-library and close the door. Wait until the
elevator stops scanning the magazine. Press the Load/Unload button to load the
code update tape into the tape drive.
If …
The DLT2500 code revision is
the same revision as that of the
update tape
Then …
The DLT2500 code does not go through an
update.
The DLT2500 code revision is
not the same revision as that of
the update tape
The DLT2500 code goes through an update,
taking about 5 minutes.
7-10 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Firmware Update (From Tape)
4.
During a DLT2500 code update, the drive:
a.
Automatically reads the tape.
_________________________ NOTE ____________________________
Calibration and directory processing cause the tape to move for a few
minutes before data is actually read.
___________________________________________________________
5.
b.
Examines the data.
c.
Verifies the data is a valid DLT2500 code image. When the drive code
update completes, the controller's flash EEPROM memory is updated
with the new code image.
d.
Resets and goes through POST, and the code update tape cartridge
returns to the magazine. The LDR RDY message displays.
If the code update succeeds, the mini-library resets itself. A magazine scan takes
place.
7.4.2.1 Interpreting the Results (DLT2500 Code Update)
The following results can occur:
Table 7-2 Results (DLT2500 Code Update)
If …
The code update
cartridge unloads from
the drive and loads into
the magazine slot from
which it came.
This means …
The update succeeded. The
controller's flash EEPROM
memory is updated with the
new firmware image.
The code update
cartridge does NOT
unload from the drive
and load into the
magazine.
The update failed.
The drive may reset and the
ERR UNK message may
display. The mini-library
should still be usable, but this
depends on why the update
failed. The reasons for failure
could be:
And you should …
Begin operating the
mini-library.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 7-11
Firmware Update (From Tape)
Table 7-2 Results (DLT2500 Code Update) Cont'd
If …
•
This means …
The code update
cartridge contains a
corrupted image file or
the file is built
improperly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
And you should …
Press the Unload button to unload
the tape cartridge from the drive.
Press the Open button to open the
magazine door.
Remove the magazine and close the
door. The mini-library does an
elevator scan.
Open the door again. The message
LDR RDY displays.
Verify you have the valid image for
your drive type (variant) in the
magazine. Ensure the image copied
to the tape cartridge is using a
block size of 4096.
Try the code update procedure
again using the valid tape image.
If you still cannot do the update,
call your service representative.
7-12 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Firmware Update (From Tape)
Table 7-2 Results (DLT2500 Code Update) Cont'd
If …
•
This means …
The tape cartridge
with the valid update
image is not
readable.
And you should …
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the Unload button to
unload the tape cartridge
from the drive.
Press the Open button to
open the magazine door.
Remove the magazine and
close the door. The minilibrary does an elevator scan.
Open the door again. The
message LDR RDY displays.
Rebuild the valid image on a
good cartridge.
Try the code update
procedure again using the
valid tape image.
If you still cannot do the
update, call your service
representative.
•
A power failure
occurs during the
code update. The
drive may be
unusable.
Try unloading the cartridge
from the drive, as described in
this table, to do the code
update again.
If you still cannot do the
update, call your service
representative.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 7-13
Firmware Update (From Tape)
Table 7-2 Results (DLT2500 Code Update) Cont'd
If …
•
This means …
A controller
failure occurs. The
drive is most likely
unusable and
needs to be
replaced.
And you should …
Turn off mini-library power
and then on again.
If you still have a drive
controller failure, see your
service representative.
7.4.3 Updating the Firmware on the DLT2700 (Drive and Loader
Configuration)
1. Get or make a CompacTape with the firmware image of the desired
revision level copied to it.
2. Put the DLT2700 subsystem into firmware update mode. To do this:
a. Remove any magazine in the DLT2700 loader receiver and
close the receiver.
b. Put the Mode Select key in Service Mode (wrench icon).
c.
Press the Load/Unload button on the operator control panel
(OCP) and hold the button (about 6 seconds) until the Write
Protect indicator blinks. This means the DLT2700 subsystem
has recognized your request for firmware update mode and is
waiting for completion of the sequence.
If the Write Protect indicator never blinks, check that:
1. POST succeeded
2. The drive is unloaded
3. The drive handle is in the down position
4. No magazine is in the loader
5. The receiver door is closed
6. The Mode Select key is in Service Mode
d. Then, press and release the Unload button and press the
button again within 4 seconds. The second press should be less
than 1 second.
7-14 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Firmware Update (From Tape)
e.
The Tape in Use and the Write Protect indicators blink,
showing the subsystem recognizes the firmware update mode
has been selected.
f.
If selecting firmware update mode is not successful (for
example, because of not pushing the Unload button properly
the second time), the Write Protect indicator should stop
blinking within several seconds. Try the procedure again.
3. Once you have selected the firmware update mode, press the OCP
EJECT button twice, which causes the receiver door to open. The Write
Protect and Tape In Use indicators stop blinking, even though the
subsystem is still in Update mode.
4. Place a magazine with the Firmware Update Tape in the first slot in the
loader receiver and close the receiver. (The remainder of the update
procedure goes faster if the magazine contains only the firmware
update cartridge. But the procedure still works if other cartridges are
present.)
5. Press the Load/Unload button to load the Firmware Update Tape into
the drive.
6. Once you have selected the firmware update mode, the drive:
a. Automatically reads the tape
_________________________ Note _____________________________
Calibration and directory processing cause the tape to move for a few
minutes before data is actually read.
___________________________________________________________
b. Examines the data
c.
Verifies the data is a valid DLT2700 firmware image
Firmware update mode is automatically cleared at this point. If
the firmware image is valid and:
d. If the drive code is up-to-date, the drive code does not go
through an update.
e.
If the drive code is not up-to- date, the drive code goes through
an update, taking 2 to 3 minutes.
f.
While the drive code goes through the update, the Write
Protect and Tape in Use indicators flash alternately.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 7-15
Firmware Update (From Tape)
g. When the drive code update is complete, the drive resets, and
goes through Power-On Self-Test (POST). The process waits
until the tape is reloaded at beginning of tape (BOT).
h. If the firmware image is valid, the controller's flash EEPROM
memory is automatically updated with the new firmware
image.
i.
Whether the firmware update is successful, the subsystem
resets itself. A full, extended scan of the loader takes place. The
scan goes quickly if the firmware update cartridge was the only
tape cartridge in the magazine. If six other cartridges are
present, the scan takes an extra minute or more.
7.4.3.1 Interpreting the Results (DLT2700 Code Update)
Two possible results can occur:
•
The firmware update cartridge is unloaded: this means a successful
update.
On the DLT2700, the cartridge is unloaded from the drive and into the
magazine slot from which it came. If another cartridge is in the
magazine, that next cartridge loads into the drive.
•
The firmware update cartridge is NOT unloaded: this means the update
was unsuccessful.
The subsystem should still be usable, but this depends on why the update
failed. Reasons for failure could be:
1. Power failure
2. Bad image on the tape
3. Broken flash EEPROMs
7-16 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Firmware Update (From Tape)
Table 7-3 gives additional details.
Table 7-3 Results (DLT2700 Code Update)
If …
Then …
The image is valid
1. The Flash EEPROM containing the
current firmware is erased.
2. The new image is programmed in. The
subsystem completes the update in
about 2 minutes. Then:
•=The tape drive resets itself.
•=POST takes place.
•=The drive automatically unloads the
tape cartridge containing the
firmware image so you can remove
the cartridge.
This shows a successful firmware update.
The tape is NOT a valid firmware
update tape
No update is attempted. Write Protect and
Tape In Use do not blink.
The tape contains a valid image, but
for some reason reprogramming of
Flash memory fails
The controller is probably unusable and
needs to be replaced. The tape drive resets
itself and reruns POST, which fails if the
Flash memory does not contain a valid
image.
_________________________ Caution __________________________
Never turn off power if you think the firmware is being updated. Doing
so can damage the controller.
___________________________________________________________
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 7-17
Firmware Update (From Tape)
7-18 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
8
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.1 Overview
This chapter details the SCSI Protocol features the DLT2000 implements.
The following sections do not fully reiterate the ANSI SCSI specification, but describes
the supported commands, messages, and options supported, and the error recovery
procedures.
8.2 General SCSI Bus Operation
8.2.1 Data Transfer
The DLT2000 supports asynchronous and synchronous data transfers. The product has
differential and single ended versions. Odd parity is generated during all information
transfer phases where the device writes data to the SCSI bus, and checked during all
information transfer phases where data is read from the bus. Parity checking can be
disabled. Refer to Chapter 2 for details.
_________________________ Note _____________________________
The SCSI specification referrers to mini-libraries as “medium changers”
where as Quantum uses the term “min-libraries” throughout this manual.
___________________________________________________________
The DLT2000 supports a maximum block size of 1 Byte to 16 MBytes.
Disconnects from the SCSI bus will be done at regular intervals during a data transfer.
This allows other devices to access the bus. This disconnecting is configurable by use
of the Disconnect-Reconnect Mode Parameters page.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-1
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.2.2 Initiator/Target Operation
The DLT2000 does not act as an initiator on the SCSI bus. Therefore, the device will
not do any of the following:
•
Generate unsolicited interrupts to the host
•
Initiate its own SCSI commands
•
Assert bus reset
8.2.3 SCSI IDs and Logical Unit Numbers (LUNs)
The DLT2000 with optional medium changer has two logical units. The tape drive will
always appear as LUN 0. The medium changer defaults to appearing as LUN 1, but
may be configured via the MODE SELECT command to any LUN from 1 to 7. Refer to
MODE SELECT section in this chapter.
Unsupported LUNs will be treated as follows: If the LUN specified in the IDENTIFY
message is invalid, the DLT2000 shall accept the Command Descriptor Block (CDB).
There are three cases of what happens next:
1.
If the command is INQUIRY, the target shall return the INQUIRY data with the
peripheral qualifier set to 011, indicating that the target will never support the LUN
in question.
2.
If the command is REQUEST SENSE, the target shall return sense data. The
sense key shall be ILLEGAL REQUEST, with an additional sense code of
INVALID Logical Unit Number.
3.
For any other command, the target shall terminate the command with CHECK
CONDITION status, and generate the above Sense Data.
8-2 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.2.4 Unit Attention Condition
Queued Unit Attentions are implemented on this device, and are maintained separately
for each valid LUN for each Initiator. Unit Attentions will be created in the following
circumstances:
•
Power on
•
BUS Reset
•
Bus Device Reset message
•
When the media may have changed asynchronously
•
Another initiator changed the Mode Parameters
•
A firmware (microcode) update has completed
Two queued Unit Attentions are not unusual. For example, if a unit is powered up and a
cartridge is loaded, Power Up and Not-ready to Ready Transition Unit Attentions are
created. Due to a limited number of Unit Attention buffers, if an initiator does not clear
Unit Attentions queued for it, at some point the tape device will stop generating new
Unit Attentions for that I-L combination (but existing ones will be left queued).
A LOAD command will not generate a Unit Attention for the initiator that issued the
command, since the transition to ready is synchronous.
8.2.5 Behavior Around Power-On and SCSI Bus Reset
•
All device SCSI lines shall go to high impedance when the DLT2000 is powered
off.
•
The DLT2000 will not generate any spurious signals on the SCSI bus at power-on.
•
Within 5 seconds of power on, and within 250 milliseconds (typically under 4 ms)
after a Bus Reset, the DLT2000 will respond to SCSI bus selections and return
appropriate, normal, responses. Tape motion commands will be returned with
Check Condition status, Sense Key Not Ready, until the media has been made
ready.
•
The Hard Bus Reset option is implemented.
•=
Cached write data are flushed to the media upon bus reset.
•
The media is rewound to BOP (Beginning of Partition, i.e. Beginning of Tape).
The DLT2000 will be able to recognize multiple bus resets in succession and bus resets
of arbitrarily long duration. It will recover within the time limits specified above,
following the last bus reset.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-3
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.2.6 Data Cache and Tape Write Interaction
The DLT2000 contains a data cache that buffers blocks (records) until they are written.
This section defines specific times that blocks shall be written to tape. A Mode Select
parameter allows the data cache to be disabled (unbuffered mode). In this mode, every
WRITE command will cause the data to be written to the media before the STATUS
byte and the COMMAND COMPLETE message is returned to the host. Unbuffered
mode is not recommended due to the poor performance that will result.
__________________________NOTE ____________________________
Unbuffered mode is not recommended due to the poor performance that
will result.
____________________________________________________________
The write data cache shall be written (flushed) to the media under the following
circumstances:
•
When WRITE FILEMARKS command is issued with the immediate bit is set to
zero.
•
When a WRITE 0 FILEMARKS command is issued.
•
Data in the cache longer than specified by the value of the Mode Parameter "Write
Delay Time" shall be automatically written to media.
•
When a nonwrite type media access command is received (for example, SPACE,
READ, UNLOAD, . . .)
•=
When a SCSI Bus Reset or a Bus Device Reset message is received.
8.2.7 Other SCSI Functionality
1.
Linked commands are supported.
2.
Untagged queuing is supported.
3.
The DLT2000 does not use the Wide-SCSI data path.
8.2.8 Bus Phases
The DLT2000 conforms to the bus state transition table shown in the SCSI-2 standard,
"Phase Sequences." The information in the following sections also applies.
8-4 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.2.9 ATTENTION Signal Response
The DLT2000 will respond to an ATN condition at least at every phase transition, as
long as the initiator sets the ATN bit before the target deasserts the REQ for the last
byte of the previous phase. Generally ATN will be recognized immediately by the
DLT2000, and it will change the bus phase to Message Out.
8.2.10 STATUS phase
The DLT2000 will enter the status phase just once per command, unless a retry is
requested by the initiator. The only exception is during error cases when the device
goes immediately to bus free, as defined in the SCSI-2 standard.
Status bytes the tape drive returns are as follows:
•
GOOD (00): This status indicates the drive successfully completed the command.
•
CHECK CONDITION (02): A contingent allegiance condition occurred. The
REQUEST SENSE command should be sent following this status to determine the
nature of the event.
•
BUSY (08): The target is busy. This status is returned whenever the device is
unable to accept a command from an otherwise acceptable initiator. The initiator
should reissue the command at a later time.
•
INTERMEDIATE GOOD (10h): This status is returned instead of GOOD status
for commands issued with the LINK bit set. Following the return of this status, the
drive will proceed to the COMMAND phase for the transfer of the next linked
command.
•
RESERVATION CONFLICT (18h): This status is returned by the drive whenever
a SCSI device attempts to access the drive when it has been reserved for another
initiator with a RESERVE UNIT command.
•
COMMAND TERMINATED (22h): This is the status returned for a command that
was terminated by a TERMINATE I/O PROCESS message. This status also
indicates that a contingent allegiance condition has occurred.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-5
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
___________________Note _____________________________
In contrast to the BUSY status condition, the DRIVE NOT
READY Sense Key is returned as part of the Sense data following
a REQUEST SENSE command and indicates that a media access
command has been issued and the media is not ready to be
accessed (for example, the media is not installed, the media has
been unloaded, the drive is currently initializing the media to
prepare it for access, and so forth.)
_____________________________________________________
In the not ready state, the initiator cannot perform any operation which would cause
tape motion (for example, write, read, verify, space, and so forth). These commands
will return a CHECK CONDITION status with a DRIVE NOT READY sense key. The
initiator may, however, execute commands that do not require access to the media and a
GOOD status may be returned. These commands are as follows:
These commands are as follows:
•
INQUIRY
•
LOAD UNLOAD
•
LOG SENSE/SELECT
•
MODE SELECT
•
MODE SENSE
•
PREVENT/ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL
•
READ BLOCK LIMITS
•
READ BUFFER
•
READ ELEMENT STATUS
•
RECEIVE DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
•
REQUEST SENSE
•
RESERVE/RELEASE UNIT
•
SEND DIAGNOSTIC (non-media access diagnostics)
•
WRITE BUFFER
The TEST UNIT READY command is used to determine whether the tape drive would
accept a media access command without returning CHECK CONDITION status.
8-6 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.2.11 BUS FREE
There are several situations when the device might or will go to BUS FREE
unexpectedly, as defined in the SCSI-2 standard (see sections 6.1.1 and 6.3):
•
An internal hardware or firmware fault that makes it unsafe for the device to
continue operation without a full reset (similar to a power-up reset).
•
ATN asserted or bus parity error detected during non-tape data transfers.
8.2.12 BUS PARITY ERRORS
The occurrence of bus parity errors (i.e. single bit errors) are very serious because they
imply the possibility of undetected double-bit errors on the bus, which most likely
would result in undetected data corruption. On properly configured SCSI buses, parity
errors should be extremely rare. If any are detected, they should be quickly addressed
by improving the configuration of the SCSI bus. A well configured SCSI system in a
normal environment should be virtually free of bus parity errors
Bus parity errors cause the drive to either retry the operation, go to STATUS phase, or
go to bus free and prepare Sense Data (see section 6.1.1 in the SCSI-2 specification).
Retrying of parity errors during Data Out Phase when writing is normally not done, but
can be enabled by changing the EnaParErrRetry parameter in the VU EEROM Mode
Page. This feature is not enabled by default because of negative impacts on device
performance (the data stream on writes cannot be pipelined as well).
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-7
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.3 SCSI Message System
The message system allows communication between an initiator and a target for the
purpose of physical path management.
To support certain SCSI-1 initiators, an Identify message is not required by the
DLT2000. If a message is sent by the initiator after the SELECTION phase, it should
be an IDENTIFY, ABORT, or BUS DEVICE RESET message. If the DLT2000
receives any other message in this case, it will go directly to BUS FREE phase.
The following messages are supported:
Table 8-1 Supported SCSI Messages
Code
In/Out Description
Section
06
0D
0C
0E
00
04
01
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
In
Both
ABORT (06h)
ABORT TAG (0Dh)
BUS DEVICE RESET (0Ch)
CLEAR QUEUE (0Eh)
COMMAND COMPLETE (00h)
DISCONNECT (04h)
ExtENDED MESSAGE (01h)
08-FF
05
Both
Out
0A
In
0B
In
09
07
08
03
02
Out
Both
Out
In
In
ABORT
ABORT TAG
BUS DEVICE RESET
CLEAR QUEUE
COMMAND COMPLETE
DISCONNECT
EXTENDED MESSAGE (SDTR
only and wide Data Transfer
Request-See note)
IDENTIFY
INITIATOR DETECTED
ERROR
LINKED COMMAND
COMPLETE
LINKED COMMAND
COMPLETE w/flag
MESSAGE PARITY ERROR
MESSAGE REJECT
NO-OP
RESTORE POINTERS
SAVE DATA POINTER
8-8 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
IDENTIFY (80h-FFh)
INITIATOR DETECTED ERROR
(05h)
LINKED COMMAND COMPLETE
(0Ah)
LINKED COMMAND COMPLETE,
with flag (0Bh)
MESSAGE PARITY ERROR (09h)
MESSAGE REJECT (07h)
NO-OP ( NO OPERATION)(08h)
RESTORE POINTERS (03h)
SAVE DATA POINTER (02h)
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
ABORT (06h)
This message is sent from the initiator to the target to clear, on the selected unit, the
current I/O process. Buffered (cached) write operations will be completed if possible.
The target goes directly to the BUS FREE phase after successful receipt of this
message. Current settings of Mode Select parameters and reservations are not affected.
Commands, data, and status for other initiators is not affected.
This message can be sent to a logical unit that is not currently performing an operation
for the initiator. If no unit has been selected, the target goes to BUS FREE and no
commands, data, or status on the target is affected.
ABORT TAG (0Dh)
This message is sent from the initiator to the target to clear, on the selected unit, the
current I/O operation only. The target goes directly to the BUS FREE phase after
successful receipt of this message. Current settings of Mode Select parameters and
reservations are not affected. The data on the cache will be flushed to the tape.
BUS DEVICE RESET (0Ch)
This message from an initiator clears all commands, data, and status in the tape
controller. When it recognizes this message, the drive flushes the cache to tape and
proceeds to the BUS FREE state. The drive then executes a hard reset which leaves it as
if a Bus Reset had occurred. All data in the write buffer will be flushed to the media.
CLEAR QUEUE (0Eh)
This message clears all I/O processes for all initiators. A Unit Attention condition will
be generated for all other initiators that had outstanding I/O processes, with Additional
Sense Code (ASC) of Command Cleared by Another Initiator. The target goes directly
to the BUS FREE phase after successful receipt of this message. Current settings of
Mode Select parameters and reservations are not affected. The data on the cache will be
flushed to the tape.
COMMAND COMPLETE (00h)
This message is sent from a target to an initiator to indicate that the execution of a
command (or a series of linked commands) has completed and valid status has been
sent to the initiator. After it has sent the message successfully, the target goes to the
BUS FREE phase by releasing BSY. If received by the tape unit, it is handled as an
illegal message; the drive returns MESSAGE REJECT and enters the STATUS phase
reporting CHECK CONDITION with the sense key set to COMMAND ABORTED.
DISCONNECT (04h)
A target sends DISCONNECT to tell an initiator that the present physical path is going
to be broken (the target intends to disconnect by releasing BSY). Later, reselection is
required in order to complete the current operation. This message does not cause the
initiator to save the Data pointer.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-9
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
When received from an initiator, the tape drive enters the message in phase and return
MESSAGE REJECT.
EXTENDED MESSAGE (01h)
This is sent as the first byte of a multiple-byte message (> 2 bytes) by either initiator or
target. ExtENDED MESSAGE has the following format:
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
0
1
2
3
Extended
Extended
Extended
Extended
Message
Message
Message
Message
Identifier − 01h
Length
Code
additional parameters
Figure 8-1 Extended Message Format
The Extended Message Length specifies the length of the Extended Message plus the
number of additional parameter bytes that are to follow. The length does not include
bytes 0 and 1. A value of zero for the Extended Message Length indicates 256 bytes to
follow.
Possible Extended Message codes are:
00h - MODIFY DATA POINTER (not supported)
01h - SYNCHRONOUS DATA TRANSFER REQUEST
02h - Reserved
03h - WIDE DATA TRANSFER REQUEST (supported on some models)
04h-7Fh - Reserved
80-FFh - Vendor Unique
If the tape drive receives an extended message which it does not support,
it switches to message in phase and returns MESSAGE REJECT after all
the bytes of the message have been transferred.
8-10 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
IDENTIFY (80h-FFh)
These messages are sent either by the initiator or by the target to establish (or
reestablish) the physical connection path between an initiator and target for a particular
logical unit. The message byte consists of the following bits:
Bit 7: Always set to one.
Bit 6: Set by initiator if target is allowed to disconnect/reconnect.
Bit 5: Must be set to zero ("Target Routines" not supported).
Bit 4: Reserved. Must be set to zero.
Bit 3: Reserved. Must be set to zero.
Bits 2-0: Logical Unit Number (LUN).
When the Identify message is sent from a target to an initiator during reconnection, a
RESTORE POINTERS message is implied.
INITIATOR DETECTED ERROR (05h)
This message is sent from an initiator to inform a target that an error (for example, a
bus parity error) has occurred that does not prevent the target from trying the operation
again. When received, the DLT2000 attempts to retransfer the last command, data, or
status bytes by using the RESTORE POINTERS message mechanism.
LINKED COMMAND COMPLETE (0Ah)
This message is sent from a target to an initiator to indicate that the execution of a
linked command (with the Flag bit zero) is complete and that status has been sent. The
initiator then sets the pointers to the initial state for the next command.
When received as a target, it is handled as an illegal message; the drive enters the
MESSAGE IN phase and returns MESSAGE REJECT.
LINKED COMMAND COMPLETE, with flag (0Bh)
This message is sent from a target to an initiator to indicate that the execution of a
linked command (with the Flag bit set to one) is complete and that status has been sent.
MESSAGE PARITY ERROR (09h)
This message is sent from the initiator to the target to indicate that one or more bytes in
the last message it received had a parity error.
To indicate that it intends to send the message, the initiator sets the ATN signal before
it releases ACK for the REQ/ACK handshake of the message that has the parity error.
This provides an interlock so that the target can determine which message has the parity
error. If the target receives this message under any other conditions, it proceeds directly
to the BUS FREE state by releasing the BSY signal, signifying a catastrophic error.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-11
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
The target's response to this message shall be to switch to the MESSAGE IN phase and
re-send from the beginning all the bytes of the message which generated the original
MESSAGE PARITY ERROR message.
MESSAGE REJECT (07h)
This message is sent from the initiator or target to indicate that the last message
received was inappropriate or has not been implemented.
To indicate its intentions of sending this message, the initiator asserts the ATN signal
before it releases ACK for the REQ/ACK handshake of the message that is to be
rejected.
MESSAGE REJECT is issued in response to any messages the drive considers to be
illegal or not supported. When sending to the initiator, the tape device will do so before
requesting any additional message bytes.
NO-OP ( NO OPERATION) (08h)
If a target requests a message, the initiator sends NO-OP if it does not currently have
any other valid message to send. The message is accepted when the drive is acting as a
target, and may be sent when it is an initiator. If NO-OP is received during a selection,
the drive proceeds to the COMMAND phase (provided ATN does not continue being
asserted). The NO-OP message is ignored by the tape drive.
RESTORE POINTERS (03h)
This message is sent from a target to direct the initiator to restore the most recently
saved pointers (for the currently attached logical unit). Pointers to the command, data,
and status locations for the logical unit are restored to the active pointers. Command
and Status pointers are restored to the beginning of the present Command and Status
areas. The Data pointer is restored to the value at the beginning of the data area in the
absence of a SAVE DATA POINTER message, or to the value at the last SAVE DATA
POINTER message that occurred for that logical unit.
When the RESTORE POINTERS message is received as a target, the target switches to
the message in phase and returns MESSAGE REJECT.
SAVE DATA POINTER (02h)
This message, sent from a target to the initiator, saves a copy of the present active Data
pointer for the logical unit currently attached.
As a target, the tape drive sends this message before a disconnect during a data
transfer. It does not send a SAVE DATA POINTER message if it intends to move
directly to STATUS phase. When received as a target, it switches to message in phase
and returns MESSAGE REJECT.
8-12 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Synchronous Data Transfer Request (SDTR)
This extended message allows the target and initiator to agree on the values of the
parameters relevant to synchronous transfers. DLT2000 will not initiate the
Synchronous Data Transfer Request message, but relies on the Initiator to do so. The
SDTR message has the following format:
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
0
1
2
3
4
Extended Message Identifier − 01h
Length = 3
Message Code = 1 (SDTR msg)
Transfer Period (min=50. = 32h)
Transfer Req/Ack Offset (max=15)
Figure 8-2 SDTR Extended Message Format
_________________________ NOTE ____________________________
The tape drive supports initiating synchronous transfer negotiations with
the host, but this feature is disabled by default. To enable it, set the Mode
Select VU ERROM parameter EnaInitSyncNeg.
___________________________________________________________
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-13
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4 Tape Drive SCSI Commands
8.4.1 Control Byte - Flag and Link Bits
The control byte of the Command Descriptor Block contains the Flag and Link bits.
Use of these bits is entirely initiator dependent. Setting the Link bit provides an
automatic link to the next command, bypassing the usual ARBITRATION,
SELECTION, and MESSAGE OUT phases which would normally occur between
commands.
All other bits in the Control Byte are considered to be reserved.
8-14 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.2 Summary of Supported Sequential-Access Device
Commands
The following table shows what SCSI commands are supported by the DLT2000 tape
drive.
Table 8-2 DLT2000 Supported SCSI Commands
Opcode
Command
19
12
1B
2B
4C
4D
15
1A /5A
1E
08
05
3C
34
1C
17
03
16
01
1D
11
00
13
0A
3B
10
ERASE
INQUIRY
LOAD-UNLOAD
LOCATE
LOG SELECT
LOG SENSE
MODE SELECT
MODE SENSE
PREVENT/ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL
READ
READ BLOCK LIMITS
READ BUFFER
READ POSITION
RECEIVE DIAG RESULTS
RELEASE UNIT
REQUEST SENSE
RESERVE UNIT
REWIND
SEND DIAGNOSTIC
SPACE
TEST UNIT READY
VERIFY
WRITE
WRITE BUFFER
WRITE FILEMARK
Section
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.4.6
8.4.7
8.4.8
8.4.9
8.4.10
8.4.11
8.4.12
8.4.13
8.4.14
8.4.15
8.4.16
8.4.17
8.4.18
8.4.19
8.4.20
8.4.21
8.4.22
8.4.23
8.4.24
8.4.25
8.4.26
8.4.27
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-15
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.3 ERASE (19h)
Bit
7
6
0
1
Byte
5
4
3
1
0
Immed
Long
Flag
Link
Operation Code (19h)
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
2
Unused
Reserved
Figure 8-3 ERASE CDB
ERASE causes data on the tape to be erased. Any write data currently held in buffer
memory and not written to tape yet is flushed to tape before the ERASE is executed.
Immed
If the Immediate bit is set to zero, the target will not return status until the selected
operation has completed. If the bit is set to one, status will be returned as soon as the
operation has been initiated.
Long
The Long bit controls the distance to be erased. If the bit is set, filler and EOD blocks
will be written if needed, and then the entire rest of the tape will be erased.
__________________________Note _____________________________
This command is an NOP on the DLT2000 unless the Long bit is set. Issuing
the ERASE command away from BOT is an ILLEGAL REQUEST.
____________________________________________________________
8-16 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.4 INQUIRY (12h)
Bit
7
6
0
1
5
4
Logical Unit Number
1
0
Reserved
EVPD
Page Code
3
Reserved
4
5
2
Operation Code (12h)
2
Byte
3
Allocation Length
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-4 INQUIRY CDB
INQUIRY tells the drive to send information regarding the device's parameters to the
initiator.
The INQUIRY command executes normally even if the specified LUN is not attached.
INQUIRY returns a Check Condition status only when the target cannot return the
requested Inquiry data. If INQUIRY is received from an initiator with a pending UNIT
ATTENTION condition (before the drive reports CHECK CONDITION status), the
target will perform the INQUIRY and will not clear the UNIT ATTENTION condition.
EVPD
The DLT2000 implements the Vital Product Data pages option on LUNs 0 and the
optional medium loader LUN.
Page Code
There are three Vital Product Data pages implemented:
00h - Supported Vital Product Data pages
80h - Unit Serial Number page
C0h - Code Build Information page
If the page code field contains a different value, the drive generates a CHECK
CONDITION with ILLEGAL REQUEST sense key.
Allocation Length
This specifies the maximum number of bytes that the initiator has allocated for returned
Inquiry data. An Allocation Length of zero indicates that no Inquiry data is transferred.
This condition is not considered an error. The drive will terminate the DATA IN phase
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-17
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
when Allocation Length bytes have been transferred, or when all available Inquiry data
has been transferred to the initiator, whichever is less.
8.4.4.1 Drive Inquiry Response
The DLT2000 passes back the following information in response to an INQUIRY
command on the drive LUN:
7
6
2
3
Byte
5
3
Peripheral Qualifier
0
1
Bit
4
RMB
TrmIOP
ANSI-Approved Version
Reserved
Response Data Format
4
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
RelAdr
0
ECMA Version
Additional Length (33h)
7
1
Device Type Modifier
ISO Version
Anec
2
Peripheral Device Type
WBus32
WBus16
Sync
Linke
d
RSVD
CmdQue
SftRe
Vendor ID = “Quantum “
8-15
Product ID = “DLT2000
16-31
“
Product Revision Level = “hhss”
32-35
Vendor Unique bytes
36-55
Figure 8-5 INQUIRY Response Data
Peripheral Qualifier
The tape drive returns one of the following values in this field:
•
000b - The indicated Peripheral Device Type is connected to the logical unit.
•
001b - The indicated Peripheral Device Type is not connected to the logical unit;
however, the tape drive is capable of supporting the indicated Peripheral Device
Type at the specified logical unit.
•
011b - The target is not capable of supporting a physical device on this logical unit.
For this case, the Peripheral Device Type will be set to 1Fh.
Peripheral Device Type
On the tape drive LUN, this field is set to 01h, indicating a sequential access device. On
the Medium Changer LUN, this field is set to 08h. All other LUNs will return 1FH.
8-18 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Other Inquiry Data Fields
The rest of the fields in the Inquiry Response are used as follows:
•
Byte 1
RMB - The Removable Medium bit is one.
•
Device-Type Modifier - Set to 0.
Byte 2:
IOS Version - Set to 0
ECMA Version - Set to 0
•
ANSI Approved Version - Set to 02h, indicating compliance with SCSI-2
Byte 3:
ANEC - Set to 0 (Asynchronous Event Notification not supported)
TrmIOP - Set to 1 (TERMINATE I/O PROCESS message supported)
•
Response Data Format - Set to 2 (Inquiry Data in SCSI-2 format)
Byte 4: Additional Length - The tape drive sets this field to indicate the number of
additional bytes of INQUIRY Response Data available
•
Byte 6: All bits set to zero, except:
•
MChngr - Set to 1 if an integrated Media Loader is present and EEROM
parameter EnbIngMedChgr is set to 1. This SCSI-3 bit indicates that the Read
Element Status and Move Medium commands can be issued to the drive LUN
(0). By default, this bit is off on the DLT4000 products.
Byte 7: All bits set to zero, except:
Sync - Set to 1 (synchronous data transfer supported)
•
Linked - Set to 1 (linked commands supported)
Vendor Identification - See figure 8-6
•
Product Identification - See figure 8-6
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-19
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
•
Product Revision Level - This field contains four bytes of ASCII data, which define the
product's software Revision Levels. The first tow bytes are the version number of servo
code. in the DLT2000 products, this firmware is located in a PROM and is not field
updateable. The second two bytes are the version number of the SCSI/read/write code.
When a firmware update is performed on the DLT2000 , this part of the Revision Level
field will change appropriately.
__________________________Note _____________________________
If a 5 cartridge media loader is attached to the tape drive, the Product ID will
indicate "DLT2500" instead of "DLT2000".
If a 7 cartridge media loader is attached to the tape drive, the Product ID will
indicate "DLT2700" instead of "DLT2000".
____________________________________________________________
Product Revision Level
This field contains four bytes of ASCII data, which define the product's software
Revision Levels. The first two bytes are the version number of servo code; the second
two bytes are the version number of the SCSI/read/write code. When a firmware
update is performed on the DLT2000 , the product Revision Level field will change
appropriately.
Vendor Specific
Vendor Specific - See next section.
8-20 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.4.2 Vendor Unique Inquiry Data
The following information can be used to precisely identify the revision of subsystem
components.
Byte
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
5155
Bit
Released SCSI (controller) Firmware
Firmware Major Version #
Firmware Minor Version #
EEPROM Format Major Version #
EEPROM Format Minor Version #
Firmware Personality
Firmware Sub-personality
Tape Directory Format Version #
Controller Hardware Version #
Drive EEPROM Version #
Drive Hardware Version #
Media Loader Firmware Version #
Media Loader Hardware Version #
Media Loader Mechanical Version #
Media Loader Present flag
Module Revision
Figure 8-6 INQUIRY Vendor Unique Bytes Definition
Vendor Specific Inquiry Bytes
To more precisely identify the product and the installed firmware, additional
information is available.
Released Flag
This flag differentiates between released and test versions of firmware. One indicates
released code (Vxxx) or field test code (Txxx). Released code has no Minor FW
Version number (byte 38 is 0). Field Test and engineering versions of code have nonzero Minor FW Version numbers for tracking purposes.
Various Version Numbers
In binary, not ASCII (see figure).
Firmware Personality
Numeric indicator of firmware personality. Set to 4.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-21
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Sub-Personality
Further differentiates product versions, currently set to a 1.
Loader Present
Nonzero if a media loader is present.
Library Present
Nonzero if a library is attached.
Module Revision
A four byte ASCII string represents the revision of the ECM module.
8.4.4.3 Vital Product Data Pages
The following figures show the information in the supported Vital Product Data Pages.
7
0
Byte
6
Bit
4
5
Peripheral Qualifier
3
2
1
Peripheral Device Type
1
Page Code (00h)
2
Reserved
3
Page Length (3 more bytes)
4
00h - (this page)
5
80h - Unit Serial Number page
6
C0h - Firmware Build Info page (VU)
Figure 8-7 Supported Vital Product Data Pages
8-22 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
0
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
7
0
Byte
6
Bit
4
5
Peripheral Qualifier
3
2
1
0
Peripheral Device Type
1
Page Code (80h)
2
Reserved
3
Page Length (0Ah)
4 - 13
Serial Number
Figure 8-8 Unit Serial Number page
Serial Number
The serial number is the serial number of the printed circuit card mounted on the
bottom of the DLT2000. It can be found on the bar code label. The serial number is
returned in ASCII.
7
0
Byte
6
Bit
4
5
Peripheral Qualifier
3
2
0
Peripheral Device Type
1
Page Code (C0h)
2
Reserved
3
Page Length (20h)
4-5
1
Servo Firmware Checksum
6-7
Servo EEPROM Checsum
8 - 11
Read/Write Firmware Checksum
12 -35
Read/Write Firmware build Data
Figure 8-9 Firmware Build Information page - VU
The checksums are binary, and are for positive Firmware and EEPROM identification.
Firmware Build Date is an ASCII string in the DD-Mmm-YYYY HH:MM::SS format.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-23
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.4.4 Media Loader Inquiry Response
The DLT2000 controller generates INQUIRY Data on the Medium Changer LUN that
is very similar to that of the tape drive LUN. The key differences are:
•
Peripheral Device Type is set to "8" for SCSI-2 Medium Changer
•
Product ID bytes are set to DLT2500 or DLT2700 for 5 or 7 cartridge loader,
respectively.
8-24 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.5 LOAD-UNLOAD (1Bh)
Bit
7
6
5
0
1
Byte
4
2
1
0
Operation Code(1Bh)
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
5
3
Reserved
Unused
EOT
Reserved
Immed
Re−Ten
Load
Flag
Link
Figure 8-10 LOAD-UNLOAD CDB
LOAD-UNLOAD tells the target to load or unload the media in the tape cartridge. If no
cartridge is in the drive, both LOAD and UNLOAD will return a CHECK
CONDITION status with a NOT READY sense key set. If the drive has received an
UNLOAD command with the Immed bit set and then receives another command which
would involve tape motion or TEST UNIT READY, the drive will return a CHECK
CONDITION status with a NOT READY sense key set.
Operation of the Unload version of this command will be different if a media loader is
present.
Two modes of operation are possible when a media loader is attached. If none of the
media loader specific commands has been issued, then the device will operate in the
sequential mode of operation. Once a media loader specific command has been issued,
the sequential mode of operation is disabled and the UNLOAD command becomes a
no-op.
If the device is still in the default sequential mode of operation and an UNLOAD
command is received by the subsystem, the current cartridge will be unloaded and
automatically moved to the magazine slot from which it originated. Then, the cartridge
from the next slot in the magazine, if not empty, is automatically moved from the
magazine into the drive, loaded, and made ready. If the next magazine slot is empty, no
CHECK CONDITION status is created.
When the cartridge is unloaded into magazine slot 6 (the last one), the subsystem does
not cycle back to slot 0. This prevents accidental overwriting of data when using the
subsystem in sequential auto-loading mode. The next cartridge must be selected and
loaded manually, or with a SCSI Move Medium command.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-25
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
EEROM parameters ENALDRAUTOLD and DISLDRAUTOLDMC can be modified
to enable/disable the sequential loading feature (Table 8-3).
A media loader does not affect the device's processing of the LOAD flavor of the
LOAD-UNLOAD command.
The command specific bits are used as follows:
•
Immed - If this bit is set, status is returned as soon as the operation is started.
Otherwise, the status is returned after the operation has completed.
•
Re-Ten - Re-tension operations are not needed on the DLT2000, so this bit is
ignored (that is, good status, if the bit is set).
•
Load - When a cartridge is inserted, the media is automatically loaded and
positioned by the drive at BOM. Logically, the drive will be positioned at the
beginning of Partition 0.
If the Load bit is set, and the media is already loaded, no action is taken. If the
media was unloaded but the cartridge was not removed, a Load will cause it to be
loaded to BOP again and made ready.
If the Load bit is zero and media is loaded, the drive writes any buffered data and
filemarks to the tape and rewinds the tape to BOM and unloads the media into the
DLT2000 cartridge. The green Operate Handle light turns on and the cartridge can
be removed from the drive. If the media is already unloaded, no action is taken.
•
EOT - This bit is ignored by the DLT2000, unless both the EOT and Load bits are
both set, then the drive returns CHECK CONDITION, ILLEGAL REQUEST.
8-26 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.6 LOCATE (2Bh)
Bit
7
0
1
Byte
5
4
3
2
1
0
BT
CP
Imm
Operation Code (2Bh)
Logical Unit Number
2
3
6
Reserved
Reserved
(MSB)
4
Block Address
5
6
(LSB)
7
Reserved
8
Partition
9
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-11 LOCATE CDB
The LOCATE command is used to do high-speed positioning to the specified block
address. Average positioning time is about 45 seconds; maximum time is under 90
seconds.
The READ POSITION command can be used to obtain the block address, when
Writing, where particular blocks of data (for example, a data file) are about to be
written. Then the LOCATE command can be used to position back to the same logical
position for high performance restore operations of particular blocks of data.
•
BT - The Block Type bit indicates how the Block Address field is interpreted. For
the DLT2000 products, SCSI Logical Block addresses are always returned, that is,
setting the BT bit does not affect the values returned. The first recorded object
(block or filemark) is at address zero, and Block Addresses count both data blocks
and filemarks.
•
CP - Since multiple partitions are not supported this bit must be zero.
•
Imm - If set, STATUS is returned when the command has been started.
Block Address
The Block Address field defines the SCSI Logical Block Address to which the media
will be positioned. These addresses start at zero, and include data blocks and filemarks,
so they could also be considered an object address.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-27
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.7 LOG SELECT (4Ch)
Bit
7
6
0
5
4
Byte
Reserved
PC
1
0
PCR
SP
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
2
Operation Code (4Ch)
1 Logical Unit Number (0)
2
3
(MSB)
Parameter List Length
8
9
(LSB)
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-12 LOG SELECT CDB
LOG SELECT allows the host to manage statistical information maintained by the
device about its own hardware or the installed media. The description should be read in
conjunction with the description of the LOG SENSE command which follows it, to
provide the reader with information about log page format, parameters, and supported
pages. The command specific bits are used as follows:
•
PCR - If Parameter Code Reset bit is set to 1 and parameter list length is 0, all
accumulated values of page code 2, 3, and 32 are set to zero and all threshold
values are set to default. If PCR is set to 1 and the Parameter List Length Field is
not zero, the command will be terminated with a CHECK CONDITION Status,
with Sense Key of ILLEGAL REQUEST, and ASC of INVALID FIELD IN CDB.
•
SP - The Save Page bit is not supported and must be set to zero. If the SP bit is set,
the command will be terminated with CHECK CONDITION Status, with Sense
Key of ILLEGAL REQUEST, and ASC of INVALID FIELD IN CDB.
•
PC - The Page Control field defines the type of parameter values to be selected:
8-28 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
PC
Type of Parameter Values
00b
01b
10b
11b
Threshold Values
Cumulative Values
Default Threshold Values
Default Cumulative Values
Figure 8-13 LOG Page Control Definitions
All types of parameter values are changeable through Log Select.
When the PC field is set to 00b or 01b and the Parameter List Length is zero, the
command is terminated with a CHECK CONDITION Status, with Sense Key of
ILLEGAL REQUEST, and ASC of INVALID FIELD IN CDB. This is because
modification of Current Threshold Values and Current Cumulative Values is not
supported.
When the PC field is set to 10b and the Parameter List Length field is 0 then all Current
Threshold Values will be reset to the Default Threshold Values. This is equivalent to no
change as Threshold Values cannot be modified.
When the PC field is set to 11b and the Parameter List Length field is 0 then all Current
Cumulative Values will be reset to the Default Cumulative Values. This is equivalent to
clearing all log pages which can be cleared.
Parameter List Length
This field specifies the length in bytes of the LOG SELECT parameter list to be
transferred from the initiator to the target during the DATA OUT phase. A parameter
list length of zero indicates that no data is to be transferred. This condition is not
considered an error (see the description of Parameter Code Reset and Page Control
fields in this section).
Error Detection Summary in LOG SELECT CDB
The following conditions constitute errors that will be detected by the drive in relation
to the CDB. The request sense data is set to ILLEGAL REQUEST, INVALID FIELD
IN CDB.
•
If PCR bit is set to 1 and parameter list length is not zero
•
If SP bit is set 1
• A parameter
list length that would cause a parameter within a
valid page to be truncated or otherwise incompletely initialized.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-29
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.7.1 Operation of LOG SELECT
The purpose of the LOG SELECT command is to allow the initiator to modify and
initialize parameters within the logs supported by the device.
There are two ways to initialize the log parameters. First, set the PCR bit in the LOG
SELECT CDB; this clears all parameters. Secondly, individual pages can be cleared by
specifying the log page and the parameter value as the log parameters. The following
pages can be cleared in this manner.
Page Code
02h
03h
32h
Page Description
Write Error Counter Page
Read Error Counter Page
Compression ratio page
Figure 8-14 Clearable Log Pages
If multiple pages are sent during this DATA OUT phase, they must be sent in ascending
order according to page code. Otherwise the command will terminate with a CHECK
CONDITION status with the sense key set to ILLEGAL REQUEST and an additional
sense code of INVALID FIELD IN PARAMETER LIST. The same status will be
returned if an unsupported Page Code appears in any header, or if the specified page
cannot be cleared.
8-30 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
LOG SELECT PAGE FORMAT
Each Log page will begin with a 4-byte header followed by N log parameter blocks
(one block for each parameter code). Each block, except for parameter code 05h, will
be 8 bytes. The parameter block for code 05h will be 12 bytes.
Log Page Header
7
0
Byte
6
5
Reserved
3
2
1
Reserved
(MSB)
Page Length
(LSB)
3
Log Parameters
(MSB)
0
Parameter Length
(LSB)
1
2
DU
3
Byte
4
5
0
Page Code
1
2
Bit
4
DS
TSD
ETC
TMC
Rsvd
LP
Parameter Length
(MSB)
Parameter Value
6
(LSB)
7
Figure 8-15 Read/Write Error Log Select Page Format
Page Code
The Page Code specifies what Log Page this LOG SELECT command is for.
Page Length
The page length specifies the total number of bytes contained in this log page, not
including the four bytes of the header.
Parameter Code
Parameter codes supported for the read/write error counter pages are described in figure
8-16.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-31
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Parameter
Code
Description
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
05h
06h
8000h
Errors corrected with substantial delays
Errors corrected with possible delays
Total rewrites or rereads
Total errors corrected
Total times correction algorithm processed
Total bytes processed
Total uncorrected errors
Vendor Unique
Figure 8-16 Parameter Codes Supported
Parameter codes 00h, 01h, and 04h will always return a value of zero.
__________________________Note _____________________________
Parameter value for code 05h will be 8 bytes; the parameter length will be set
to 8.
____________________________________________________________
Byte 2 of Log parameter block in Figure 8-15 is referred to as the parameter control
byte.
•
DU–Disable Update: DU bit is not defined for LOG SELECT and the target shall
ignore any value.
•
DS and TSD–Saving parameters is not supported; they both should be set to 1. If
the DS and/or TSD are set to zero, the command is terminated with CHECK
CONDITION status with the sense key set to ILLEGAL REQUEST with the
additional sense code set to INVALID FIELD IN PARAMETER LIST.
•
ETC–Enable Threshold Comparison: When set to 1, the drive will perform a
comparison with threshold values once the cumulative value is updated.
Comparison criteria is defined in TMC. If the comparison is met and the RLEC bit
of MODE SELECT/SENSE Control Page is set to 1, then a UNIT ATTENTION is
generated for all initiators. The additional sense code is set to LOG EXCEPTION
and the additional sense code qualifier is set to THRESHOLD CONDITION MET.
If the RLEC bit is zero and the comparison is met, then UNIT ATTENTION is not
generated.
•
TMC–Threshold Met Criteria: See Figure 8-23 for the list of criteria. Once the
specified criteria in this field is met and the ETC bit is 1 and the RLEC bit in
MODE SENSE/SELECT Control Page is set to 1, then UNIT ATTENTION is
generated for all initiators.
8-32 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
•
LP–List Parameter: This bit should always be set to 0 to indicate parameter codes
are treated as data counters.
Error Detection Summary in Log Select Pages
The host should issue a LOG SENSE command to initialize host software which allows:
•
Correct determination of the pages the drive uses
•
Determination of the parameter codes and length of each parameter
The following conditions constitute errors in the parameter block that will cause the
drive to return CHECK CONDITION with the sense data set to ILLEGAL REQUEST
and additional sense code INVALID FIELD IN PARAMETER LIST:
•
If a page header is received with unsupported page codes
•
Incorrect log page length is specified in the page header
•
An illegal parameter code within a valid page code
•
Parameter codes for a supported page are not sent in ascending order
•
LP bit is set to 1 in the parameter control byte
•
DS bit is set to zero in the parameter control byte
•
TSD bit is set to zero in the parameter control byte
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-33
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.8 LOG SENSE (4Dh)
Bit
7
6
0
5
4
Byte
Reserved
PC
1
0
PPC
SP(0)
Page Code
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
2
Operation Code (4Dh)
1 Logical Unit Number (0)
2
3
(MSB)
Parameter Pointer
6
7
(LSB)
(MSB)
Allocation Length
(LSB)
8
9
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-17 LOG SENSED CDB
LOG SENSE allows the host to retrieve statistical information maintained by the device
about its own hardware or the installed media. It is a complementary command to LOG
SELECT.
PPC
The Parameter Pointer Control bit must be zero. A Parameter Pointer Control bit of
zero indicates that the parameter data requested from the device will start with the
parameter code specified in the Parameter Pointer field and return the number of bytes
specified in the Allocation Length field in ascending order of parameter codes from the
specified log page. A PPC bit of zero and a Parameter Point field of zero causes all
available parameter data for that page code to be returned to the initiator.
__________________________Note _____________________________
The current implementation of the Read/Write Compression Page does not
support a parameter pointer other than zero.
____________________________________________________________
If PPC bit is set or the Parameter Pointer is larger than the highest numbered parameter
on the page, then the target will terminate the command with CHECK CONDITION
8-34 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
status. The sense key is set to ILLEGAL REQUEST and the additional sense code is set
to INVALID FIELD IN CDB.
If the target does not support a parameter code within this page then it will not return
any data associated with this parameter.
SP
Saving log parameters is not supported and shall be always zero.
If the SP bit is set, the command is terminated with CHECK CONDITION status with
the sense key set to ILLEGAL REQUEST, and an additional sense code of INVALID
FIELD IN CDB.
PC
The Page Control field defines the type of parameter values to be returned:
PC
Type of Parameter Values
00b
01b
10b
11b
Threshold Values
Cumulative Values
Default Threshold Values
Default Cumulative Values
Figure 8-18 LOG Page Control Definitions
The Default Threshold Values are the maximum values that each parameter can attain.
The Current Cumulative Values are the values computed since the last reset of the
device (either by power-cycling, BUS DEVICE RESET, or SCSI RESET).
The Default Cumulative Values are the values to which each parameter gets initialized
on a reset condition as described previously. Default values are zero.
By default Current threshold values = Default threshold values.
_________________________ Note _____________________________
All types of Parameter values are changeable through LOG SELECT.
___________________________________________________________
Page Code
The Page Code field identifies which log page is being requested by the initiator. If the
page is not supported then the command terminates with a CHECK CONDITION status
with the sense key set to ILLEGAL REQUEST and an additional sense code of
INVALID FIELD IN CDB. Supported pages are as follows:
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-35
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Page Code
00h
02h
03h
07h
32h
Page Description
List of Supported Pages Page
Write Error Counter Page
Read Error Counter Page
Last n Errors Events Page
Compression ratio page
Figure 8-19 LOG SENSE Pages Supported
Parameter Pointer
The Parameter Pointer field allows the host to specify at which parameter within a log
page the requested data should begin. For example, if a page supports parameters 0
through 5, and the Parameter Pointer field contains 3, then only parameters 3, 4, and 5
are returned to the initiator. Similarly, if a page supports parameters 1, 3, and 6, and the
Parameter Pointer field contains 2, then only parameters 3 and 6 are returned to the
initiator.
If Parameter Pointer is larger than the highest numbered parameter on the page, then the
target will terminate the command with CHECK CONDITION status. The sense key is
set to ILLEGAL REQUEST and the additional sense code is set to INVALID FIELD
IN CDB.
__________________________Note _____________________________
Parameters within a page are always returned in ascending order according to
parameter code.
____________________________________________________________
Allocation Length
The Allocation Length field is used to inform the target how much space the initiator
has allocated for data. There must be sufficient space allocated for all the requested
data, otherwise the command will terminate with a CHECK CONDITION Status with
Sense Key of ILLEGAL REQUEST, and ASC of INVALID FIELD IN CDB.
Error Detection Summary in LOG SENSE CDB
The following conditions constitute errors that will be detected by the drive in relation
to the CDB. The request sense data is set to ILLEGAL REQUEST, INVALID FIELD
IN CDB.
•
If a page is not supported
•
If the parameter pointer is larger than the highest numbered parameter on the page
•
If SP bit is set to 1
8-36 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.8.1 Supported Pages Log Page (Page 0)
When page 0 is requested, the 4-byte page header is returned followed by the pages
supported in ascending order, one byte for each.
7
0
Byte
6
Reserved
1
2
5
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
Page Code (00h)
Reserved
(MSB)
Page LENGTH (05H)
(LSB)
3
4
00h
5
02h
6
03h
7
07h
8
32h
Figure 8-20 Supported Pages Page Format
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-37
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.8.2 Read/Write Error Log Page (Page 2 and 3)
Each Log page will begin with a 4-byte header followed by n number of log parameter
blocks, each block of 8 bytes except for parameter code 5h.
The log parameter block for the Parameter total bytes processed (5h) will be 12 bytes,
since the parameter value is 8 bytes long.
Log Page Header
7
0
Byte
6
5
Bit
4
Reserved
3
2
1
Page Code
1
Reserved
(MSB)
2
Page Length
(LSB)
3
Log Parameters
(MSB)
0
Parameter Length
(LSB)
1
2
DU
3
Byte
0
DS
TSD
ETC
TMC
Rsvd
LP
Parameter Length
(MSB)
4
—
Parameter Value
—
11
(LSB)
Figure 8-21 Read/Write Error Log SENSE Page Format
Page Code
The Page Code echoes the page code that was specific in the LOG SENSE CDB.
Page Length
The Page Length specifies the total number of bytes contained in this log page, not
including the four bytes of the heads.
For example, if PPC bit is zero and parameter pointer is zero then target will return 4
bytes of page header with page length of 44h followed by 8 bytes of parameter value
data for each parameter code except for parameter code 5h. For 5h, it will return 12
bytes.
So, for Parameter code 0h, 1h, 2h, 3h, 4h, 6h, and 8000h, each page will be 8 bytes. For
parameter code 5h, page will be 12 bytes.
8-38 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Parameter Code
The following parameter codes are supported for the read/write error counter pages.
Parameter
Code
Description
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
05h
06h
8000h
Errors corrected with substantial delays
Errors corrected with possible delays
Total rewrites or rereads
Total errors corrected
Total times correction algorithm processed
Total bytes processed
Total uncorrected errors
Vendor Unique
Figure 8-22 Parameter Codes Supported
Parameter codes 00h, 01h, and 04h will always return a value of zero.
DU, DS, TSD, ETC, TMC, and LP are collectively referred to as parameter control
byte.
•=
DU–Disable Update: A zero value indicates that target shall update all log
parameter values. A value of 1 indicates that target will not update the log
parameter values except in response to LOG SELECT. This bit is set by the drive
when accumulated values reach maximum. This is also returned set if the host set
the bit in the last LOG SELECT command. The default is zero.
_________________________ Note _____________________________
For parameter types other than threshold and cumulative values, this bit is
always zero.
___________________________________________________________
•
DS–Disable Save: Saving parameters is not supported; this bit will always be set to
1.
•
TSD–Target Save Disable: Saving parameters is not supported; this bit will always
be set to 1.
•
ETC–Enable Threshold Comparison: ETC of 1 indicates that comparison to
threshold is performed. ETC of zero indicates that this comparison is not
performed. This bit is set to 1 by MODE SELECT. Default is zero.
•
TMC–Threshold Met Criteria: This field is valid only if host sets ETC to 1. It
determines the basis for comparison and is specified by host by LOG SELECT. If
the result of comparison is true (cumulative = threshold) and MODE
SELECT/SENSE control mode page RLEC bit is set 1, then a unit attention is
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-39
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
generated for all initiators. The sense key will be set to UNIT ATTENTION, ASC
will be set to LOG EXCEPTION and ASCQ will be set to THRESHOLD
CONDITION MET. If the RLEC bit in control mode page is zero then, UNIT
ATTENTION will not be generated.
__________________________Note _____________________________
This comparison is performed in real time. Therefore, you do not need to issue
a Log Sense command to get the check condition. Once ETC is selected,
RLEC bit in Control mode page, the check condition will be issued based on
the criteria defined in the TMC bits if the criteria is met in Real time. Check
condition will not identify for which parameter code the criteria is met. The
user will need to issue Log Sense to read the counters to see for which
parameter code criteria is met.
____________________________________________________________
Code
00b
01b
10b
11b
Basis of Comparison
Every update of the cumulative value
Cumulative value
equal to threshold value
Cumulative value not equal to threshold value
Cumulative value greater than threshold value
Figure 8-23 Threshold Met Criteria
•
LP–List Parameter: This bit will always be set to zero as we treat the parameter
codes as data counter. When the data counter reaches its defined maximum value,
it shall not increment and DU bit shall be set to 1. If the data counter is at or
reaches its maximum value during the execution of a command, the drive will
complete the command. If the RLEC bit of CONTROL MODE PAGE is 1, the
drive then will issue the status of CHECK CONDITION and set the sense key to
RECOVERED ERROR with additional sense code set to LOG COUNTER AT
MAXIMUM.
Parameter Length
This field specifies the number of bytes of the parameter value.
Parameter Value
This field is the actual value of this log parameter
8-40 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.8.3 Last n Error Events Page (07h)
This page returns one parameter at a time that consists of the ASCII text for the
specified event log. The Parameter Number field in the CDB specifies the log event to
return. The log events EEROM are numbered 0 to 255, after which the number wraps
back to 0, and only a limited number of events are stored at a given time (up to 14). The
log event returned is the one whose number is equal to, or the first one greater than, the
Parameter Number specified in the CDB.
Parameter Code
Parameter code values are assigned from 0 to 27, where 0 would be the oldest event
stored, and the highest parameter code returned would be the most recent event.
Hex ASCII String
The text of the parameter includes a "Packet #", which is a value from 0 to 255. This
internal number is assigned when the packet is written into EEROM. Zero is normally
the oldest packet, but packet numbers can wrap around from 255 to 0. For a detailed
description of the packet string, see Appendix D.
7
6
5
(MSB)
4
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
Parameter Length
(LSB)
5
Byte
6
DU
7
DS
TSD
ETC
TMC
0
LP
Parameter Length
(MSB)
8
—
Hex ASCII string for Event n
—
(LSB)
n
Figure 8-24 Last n Error Events Page
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-41
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.8.4 Read/Write Compression Ratio Page Format (32h)
The Read/Write Compression Ratio page begins with a 4-byte header followed by the
log parameter blocks of 6 or 8 bytes, depending on the parameter code selected.
Parameter Codes
The following parameter codes are supported for the Read/Write Compression Ratio
page.
Parameter
Description
Code
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
05h
06h
07h
08h
09h
Read Compression Ratio × 100
Write Compression Ratio × 100
MBytes Transferred to Host
Bytes Transferred to Host
MBytes Read from Tape
Bytes Read from Tape
MBytes Transferred from Host
Bytes Transferred from Host
MBytes Written to Tape
Bytes Written to Tape
Figure 8-25 Parameter Codes Supported
7
0
Byte
6
5
Bit
4
Reserved
2
1
0
Page Code
1
2
3
Reserved
(MSB)
Additional Length
3
(LSB)
Figure 8-26 Read/Write Compression Ratio Page Header
Additional Length
The additional length field specifies the number of bytes available and depends on the
parameters requested
8-42 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Parameter Block for Parameter Codes 00 and 01
7
0
6
Bit
4
5
(MSB)
3
2
1
Parameter Code
(LSB)
1
Byte
2
DU
3
4
0
DS
TSD
ETC
TMC
Rsvd
LP
02h
(MSB)
Compression Ratio x 100
(LSB)
6
Figure 8-27 Read/Write Compression Ratio LOG SENSE Page Format
Parameter Control Byte
• DU–Disable Update: This bit is always zero.
•
DS–Disable Save: Saving parameters is not supported; this bit will always be set to
1.
•
TSD–Target Save Disable: Saving parameters is not supported; this bit will always
be set to 1.
•
ETC–Enable Threshold Comparison: Threshold checking is not supported on this
page; this bit is always a zero.
•
TMC–Threshold Met Criteria: Always a zero.
•
LP–List Parameter: This bit will always be set to zero, as we treat the parameter
codes as data counter.
Compression Ratio
The compression ratio is reported as the actual compression ratio times 100.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-43
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Parameter Block for Parameter Codes 02 through 09
7
0
6
5
(MSB)
Bit
4
3
2
1
Parameter Code
(LSB)
1
2
DU
DS
TSD
ETC
3
Byte
4
5
0
TMC
Rsvd
LP
04h
(MSB)
Counter Value
6
7
(LSB)
Figure 8-28 Read/Write Bytes Transferred LOG SENSE Page Format
Parameter Control Byte
• DU–Disable Update: This bit is always zero.
•
DS–Disable Save: Saving parameters is not supported; this bit will always be set to
1.
•
TSD–Target Save Disable: Saving parameters is not supported; this bit will always
be set to 1.
•
ETC–Enable Threshold Comparison: Threshold checking is not supported on this
page; this bit is always a zero.
•
TMC–Threshold Met Criteria: Always a zero.
•
LP–List Parameter: This bit will always be set to zero as we treat the parameter
codes as data counter.
Counter Value
These parameter codes provide a count of the number of bytes transferred since the
current tape cartridge was inserted or since the last time the counters were reset via a
MODE SELECT command.
Parameter codes 02 and 03 report the counts of bytes transferred from the tape drive to
the initiator. Parameter code 02 reports the number of full megabytes transferred.
Parameter code 03 reports the number of bytes less than a full megabyte that has been
transferred. Multiplying the counter returned for parameter 02 by 1,048,576 and then
adding the counter value returned for parameter 03 will give the actual total bytes
transferred to the initiator.
8-44 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Parameter codes 04 and 05 report the counts of bytes transferred from the tape to the
buffer. Parameter code 04 reports the number of full megabytes transferred. Parameter
code 05 reports the number of bytes less than a full megabyte that has been transferred.
Multiplying the counter returned for parameter 04 by 1,048,576 and then adding the
counter value returned for parameter 05 will give the actual total bytes transferred from
tape to buffer.
Parameter codes 06 and 07 report the counts of bytes transferred from the initiator to
the buffer. Parameter code 06 reports the number of full megabytes transferred.
Parameter code 07 reports the number of bytes less than a full megabyte that has been
transferred. Multiplying the counter returned for parameter 06 by 1,048,576 and then
adding the counter value returned for parameter 07 will give the actual total bytes
transferred from the initiator to the buffer.
Parameter codes 08 and 09 report the counts of bytes written to the tape. Parameter
code 08 reports the number of full megabytes transferred. Parameter code 09 reports the
number of bytes less than a full megabyte that has been transferred. Multiplying the
counter returned for parameter 08 by 1,048,576 and then adding the counter value
returned for parameter 09 will give the actual total bytes written to the tape.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-45
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.9 MODE SELECT (15h)
Bit
7
6
0
1
Byte
5
4
3
2
0
Operation Code (15h)
Logical Unit Number
PF
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Parameter List Length
5
1
Unused (00)
Reserved
SP(0)
Flag
Link
Figure 8-29 MODE SELECT CDB
MODE SELECT enables the host to configure the device. Implementing MODE
SELECT and MODE SENSE requires a certain amount of handshaking between the
host and the drive. Before configuring the drive, the host should issue a MODE SENSE
to get the current configuration and determine what parameters are configurable. The
host interprets this information and may then issue MODE SELECT to set the drive to
the host's preferred configuration.
The drive always powers up with its default configurations set. This is also true if the
drive receives a BUS DEVICE RESET message or a hard reset through the RST line on
the SCSI bus.
PF
The Page Format bit indicates that the data sent by the host after the MODE SELECT
header and block descriptors complies with the definition of pages in the SCSI-2
specification. The SCSI-1 format will not be implemented, so this bit is required to be
set. It is an ILLEGAL REQUEST to have page parameters while the PF bit is off.
SP
This bit must be zero. The save Parameters bit instructs the drive to save all savable
pages. This is not supported.
PARAMETER LIST LENGTH
This specifies the length in bytes of the MODE SELECT parameter list that is
transferred during the DATA OUT phase. A zero Parameter List Length indicates that
no data is transferred.
8-46 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.9.1 MODE SELECT Parameter List
The MODE SELECT parameter list shown below, contains a 4-byte header, followed
by one 8-byte block descriptor.
Bit
7
Byte
6
5
4
3
0
Reserved
1
Media Type
2
WP
Buffered Mode
3
2
1
0
Speed
Block Descriptor Length (08h)
Block Descriptor
0
1
Density Code
(MSB)
2
Number of Blocks (000000h)
3
Byte
(LSB)
4
Reserved
5
(MSB)
6
Block Length
7
(LSB)
Page Descriptor
0
Byte
PS (0)
0
Page Code
1
Additional Length
2
Page Defined or Vendor-Unique Parameter Bytes
Figure 8-30 MODE SELECT Parameter List
Media Type
This field is ignored for Mode Select parameter.
WP
This field is ignored for Mode Select parameter.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-47
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Buffered Mode
The drive will implement Immediate Reporting on WRITE commands through
Buffered mode.
If the field is zero, then the drive does not report a GOOD status on WRITE commands
until the data blocks are actually written to tape. If the Buffered Mode field is one, then
the drive reports GOOD status on WRITE commands as soon as the data block has
been transferred to the buffer. This is the default configuration for the drive.
If Buffered mode is not used, the tape drive will suffer a significant degradation in
performance, and maybe capacity as well, depending on tape format, block size and
compression. If writing 2.6 or 6.0 GByte formats, if the block size is a multiple of 4
Kbytes, there is no capacity loss. When using the 10 GByte format, if compression is
disabled and the block size is a multiple of 8 Kbytes, there is no capacity loss.
When using the 10 GByte format and compression enabled, not having buffered mode
enabled will cause some capacity loss, depending on compression ratios. This is
because the block packing feature is essentially disabled by turning off buffered mode.
If this field is greater than 1, the command will be rejected with a Check Condition,
with a Sense Key of ILLEGAL REQUEST.
Speed
The tape drive supports only one speed, the default speed.
Block Descriptor Length
This specifies the length in bytes of all the block descriptors. Since the drive only
allows one block descriptor, this value must be 8 or 0. Any other value causes a
CHECK CONDITION status with an ILLEGAL REQUEST sense key to be returned.
Density Code
This field should match the current density of the media, or will be set to zero if the
density is unknown.
•=
00h - use default density
•=
0Ah - 6667 bpi MFM serial cart. tape X3B5/86-199 (Read only) (CompacTape)
•=
16h - 10000 bpi MFM serial cart tape X3.193-1990 (Read only) (CompacTape
II)
•=
17h - 42500 bpi MFM serial cart tape X3B5/91-174 - 2.6 GB (CompacTape III)
•=
18h - (Same as 17h but with 56 track pairs vs. 24) - 6.0 GB (CompacTape III)
•=
19h - 62500 bpi, 64 track pairs, serial cart tape - 10 GB (CompacTape III)
•=
7Fh - No change from previous density (NOP)
8-48 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
•=
80h - 62500 bpi, 64 track pairs, serial cart tape - 10 GB (CompacTape III)
(Without compression)
•=
81h - 62500 bpi, 64 track pairs, serial cart tape -20 GB (CompacTape III) (With
compression)
_________________________ Note _____________________________
1.
If EEROM parameter EnaThirdPtyDens is set, which is true by
default, Mode Select command does not reject non-supported
density code. The third party density code Selected is translated into
default density code (i.e. 00h)
2. Default density is the optimum density supported by the specific
media. For CompacTape III, it is 20 GB (with compression).
___________________________________________________________
Number of Blocks
This MODE SENSE field will be sent as zero, indicating that all of the remaining
logical blocks on the tape will have the medium characteristics specified by the block
descriptor.
Block Length
This specifies the length in bytes of each logical block transferred over the SCSI bus. A
block length of zero indicates that the length is variable (specified in the I/O command).
Any other value indicates the number of bytes per block to use for read, write and
verify type commands that specify a "Fixed" bit of 1 (i.e., fixed block mode) which also
causes the transfer length in the CDB to be defined as a block count.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-49
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.9.2 MODE SELECT Pages
Following the Block Descriptor are the MODE SELECT pages, which set the device
parameters. Each page has a 2-byte header which identifies the page code and indicates
the number of bytes in that page.
The supported Page Codes are as follows:
Page Code
0Ah
0Fh
10h
02h
01h
11h
3Eh
Description
Control Mode Page
Data Compression Page
Device Configuration
Disconnect/Reconnect
Error Recovery Page
Medium Partition
EEPROM Parameter
Sense/Select
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Figure 8-31 MODE SELECT Pages Supported
PS Bit
For the MODE SELECT command this bit is reserved. For the MODE SENSE
command, a Parameters Savable (PS) bit of one indicates that the page can be saved in
nonvolatile memory by the drive. If the PS bit is zero, the supported parameters cannot
be saved. (Saveable pages are not supported.)
Additional Page Length
This indicates the number of bytes in that page. However, the value does not include
bytes 0 and 1. The length is returned on MODE SENSE and must subsequently be set
to the same value when performing MODE SELECT. If the page length does not match
that expected by the drive, a CHECK CONDITION status is returned with the sense
key set to ILLEGAL REQUEST.
The drive also returns a CHECK CONDITION status with an ILLEGAL REQUEST
sense key if the host sends an unsupported Page Code, or a Page field with values not
supported or changeable. In this case, no parameters will be changed by the command.
8-50 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.9.3 Control Mode Page (0Ah)
The control mode page provides controls over several features such as tagged queuing,
extended contingent allegiance, asynchronous event notification, and error logging.
Bit
7
0
6
5
4
RSVD
RSVD
3
Queue Algorithm Modifier
EECA
0
RLEC
Reserved
Reserved
RAENP
QErr
DQue
UAAENP
EAENP
Reserved
5
6
1
Page Length
2
4
2
Page Code
1
Byte
3
(MSB)
Ready AEN Holdoff Period
7
(LSB)
Figure 8-32 Control Mode Page (0Ah)
A report log exception condition (RLEC) bit of one specifies the target shall report log
exception conditions. An RLEC bit of zero specifies the target shall not report log
exception conditions.
Page Code
The Page Code identifies the type of MODE SELECT page being transferred. This is
the Control Mode Page. The valid value for Page Code is (0Ah).
Page Length
The Page Length indicates the number of bytes in the Control Mode Page that follow
this byte. The valid value for this byte is (06h).
RLEC
The RLEC bit works with the READ/WRITE Error Log Sense Page. Refer to the
previous section Read/Write Error Log SENSE Page Format (Page 2 and 3) under the
TMC bit description.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-51
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
The RLEC bit indicates whether the DLT2000 should return Check Condition status
with the sense key set to Unit Attention (6h) when one of its write and read error
counters of the log pages reaches a specified threshold as follows: (See LOG SELECT
command section on how to change the threshold.)
0 - Do not return Unit Attention when a threshold condition is met
1 - Return Unit Attention when a threshold condition is met
Queue Algorithm Modifier
This field must be 0.
QErr (Queue Error)
This bit must be 0.
DQue (Disable Queuing)
This bit must be 0.
EECA (Enable Extended Contingent Allegiance)
The DLT2000 does not support extended contingent allegiance, so this bit must be 0.
RAENP (Ready AEN Permission)
The DLT2000 does not support asynchronous event notification (AEN), so this bit must
be 0.
UAAENP (Unit Attention AEN Permission)
The DLT2000 does not support asynchronous event notification, so this bit must be 0.
EAENP (Error AEN Permission)
The DLT2000 does not support asynchronous event notification, so this bit must be 0.
Ready AEN Holdoff Period
The DLT2000 does not support asynchronous event notification, so this field must be 0.
8-52 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.9.4 Data Compression Page (0Fh)
The Data Compression Page specifies parameters for the control of data compression.
This page allows you to turn DLT2000 compressed format on and off independently of
the tape's position and allows you to enable or disable decompression of DLT2000
compressed data during write operations.
Bit
7
0
6
5
RSVD
3
2
1
0
Page Code
1
Byte
4
Page Length
2
DCE
3
DDE
4
(MSB)
DCC
Reserved
RED
Reserved
Compression Algorithm
7
8
(LSB)
(MSB)
Decompression Algorithm
11
(LSB)
12
Reserved
15
Figure 8-33 Data Compression Page (0Fh)
Page Code
The Page Code identifies the type of MODE SELECT page being transferred. This is
the Data Compression Page. The valid value for the Page Code is (0Fh).
Page Length
The Page Length indicates the number of bytes in the Data Compression Page that
follow this byte. The valid value for this byte is (0Eh).
DCE (Data Compression Enable)
The Data Compression Enable bit specifies whether the DLT2000 should enable or
disable data compression. When the DCE bit is 1, the DLT2000 starts in compressed
format.
DCC (Data Compression Capable)
The Data Compression Capable bit is used by the MODE SENSE command to indicate
that the DLT2000 supports data compression.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-53
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
DDE (Data Decompression Enable)
When the DLT2000 reads compressed data from tape, it automatically decompresses
the data before sending it to the initiator. Data compression is always enabled, so this
bit must be set to 1 (enable data decompression).
RED (Report Exception on Decompression)
The DLT2000 does not report exceptions on decompression (boundaries between
compressed and uncompressed data). The RED field must be (00h).
Compression Algorithm
The Compression Algorithm field indicates which compression algorithm the DLT2000
will use to process data from the initiator when the DCE bit (byte 02, bit 7) is 1. The
only value currently supported for this field is 10h.
__________________________Note _____________________________
Specifying a value other than (10h) for this field causes the DLT2000 to
return Check Condition status with the sense key set to Illegal Request (5h).
____________________________________________________________
Decompression Algorithm
The Decompression Algorithm field indicates which decompression algorithm the
DLT2000 will use when decompressing data encountered on the tape. The only value
currently supported for this field is (10h).
__________________________Note _____________________________
Specifying a value other than 10h for this field causes the DLT2000 to return
Check Condition status with the sense key set to Illegal Request (5h).
____________________________________________________________
8-54 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.9.5 Device Configuration Page (10h)
The drive supports the Device Configuration Page which has the following format:
Bit
0
7
6
PS (0)
0
1
2
Byte
5
4
3
2
0
Page Code(10h)
Additional Page Length (0Eh)
Res
CAP
Active Format
CAF
Active Partition
3
4
Write Buffer Full Ratio
5
Read Buffer Empty Ratio
6
1
(MSB)
Write Delay Time
(LSB)
7
8
DBR
BIS
9
AVC
SOCF
RBO
REW
Gap Size
EOD Defined
10
11
RSmk
EEG
SEW
Reserved
(MSB)
12
Buffer Size at Early Warning (optional)
13
(LSB)
14
Select Data Compression Algorithm
15
Reserved
Figure 8-34 Device Configuration Page Format
In this page, only the Write Delay Time and Select Data Compression Algorithm
parameters are changeable.
PS
Must be zero.
CAP, CAF, Active Format
These fields are not supported and must be zero on MODE SELECT.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-55
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Active Partition
Only partition 0 is supported. Setting this field to any other value will be rejected by the
drive with a CHECK CONDITION status and the ILLEGAL REQUEST sense key set.
Write Buffer Full Ratio and Read Buffer Empty Ratio
These indicate how full/empty the buffer memory should be before restarting the
writing/reading of the media. The DLT2000 will set these fields to zero (unused)
because it uses an automatic, adaptive mechanism to dynamically adjust its Full/Empty
ratios according to the average data rates over the SCSI bus.
Write Delay Time
This indicates the maximum time that the drive will wait with a partially full buffer
before forcing the data to tape (100 ms increments). The buffer Full/Empty ratio, which
is dynamic, can cause data to be written sooner than the Write Delay time would
indicate. The Write Delay Time defaults to 200 (C8h). This causes the buffer to be
flushed in 20 seconds. Maximum value is 6500 (1964h) and the minimum is 15 (0Fh).
This represents delays from almost 11 minutes down to 1.5 seconds.
Values between 0 and 15, on a MODE SELECT, are rounded down to 0. This causes
the data to go straight to the media without delay.
Byte 8:
DBR - set to 0 (data buffer recovery not supported)
BIS - set to 1 (Block Identifiers Supported in media format)
RSmk - set to 0 (Setmarks not supported)
AVC - set to 0
SOCF - set to 0
RBO - set to 0
REW - set to 0 (Do not report Early Warning EOM on reads)
Gap Size
This field is not used and is set to zero.
EOD Defined
This field is set to (00h); any other value will be rejected by the drive.
EEG
The Enable EOD Generation bit is set to indicate that the drive will generate an EOD.
The drive generates an EOD mark before any change of direction following a write-type
operation. This bit is ignored on MODE SELECT.
8-56 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
SEW and Buffer Size At Early Warning
The Synchronize at Early Warning bit is set to 1. Buffer Size at EW is not supported
and must be zero.
Select Data Compression Algorithm
One enables data compression; a zero disables it.
The front panel setting will override what is specified in the MODE SELECT, but no
error will result. If the front panel is returned to automatic mode, the value from the last
MODE SELECT command will determine whether compression will be used or not.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-57
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.9.6 Disconnect/Reconnect Page (02h)
The drive shall support the Disconnect/Reconnect Page which has the following format:
Bit
0
Byte
7
6
PS (0)
0
5
4
3
2
0
Page Code(02h)
1
Additional Page Length (0Eh)
2
Buffer Full Ratio
3
Buffer empty Ratio
4
1
(MSB)
Bus Inactivity Limit
5
6
(LSB)
(MSB)
Disconnect time Limit
7
8
(LSB)
(MSB)
Connect Time Limit
9
(LSB)
10 (MSB)
Maximum Burst Size
11
12
(LSB)
Reserved
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
DTDC
Figure 8-35 Disconnect/Reconnect Page Format
In this page, only the Maximum Burst Size parameter is changeable.
The following parameters in this page are supported:
Maximum Burst Size
This value specifies the maximum amount of data that will be transferred without
disconnecting. A value of zero sets no limit. This value is in units of 512 bytes. For
example, a value of 8 means 4k bytes. Values that are not multiples of 8 are rounded up
to the closest multiple of 8.
8-58 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Data Transfer Disconnect Control (DTDC)
The DTDC field defines further restrictions on when a disconnect is permitted.
DTDC
Description
00b
Data transfer disconnect control is not used. Disconnect is controlled by
the other fields in this page
01b
A target does not attempt to disconnect once the data transfer of a
command has started until all data the command is to transfer has been
transferred.
10b
Reserved
11b
A target does not attempt to disconnect once the data transfer of a
command has started, until the command is complete.
Figure 8-36 Data Transfer Disconnect Control
If DTDC is non-zero and the maximum burst size is non-zero, the DLT2000 returns
CHECK CONDITION status. The sense key is set to ILLEGAL REQUEST and the
additional sense code set to ILLEGAL FIELD IN PARAMETER LIST.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-59
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.9.7 Medium Partition Page (11h)
The drive supports the Medium Partitions Parameter Page, which has the following
format:
Bit
0
Byte
7
6
PS (0)
0
5
4
3
2
Additional Page Length (06)
2
Maximum Additional Partitions
3
Additional Partitions Defined
FDP
SDP
0
PageCode(11h)
1
4
1
IDP
PSUM
Reserved
5
Medium Format Recognition (01)
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Figure 8-37 Medium Partition Page Format
Maximum Additional Partitions
No additional partitions are supported, this field must be zero.
Additional Partitions Defined
The field specifies the number of additional partitions to be defined for the tape based
on the settings of the SDP and IDP bits. The maximum allowed is the value returned in
the Maximum Additional Partitions field. Since only one partition is supported, this
field must be zero.
Option Flags
FDP - Fixed Data Partitions bit must be zero.
SDP - Select Data Partitions bit must be zero.
IDP - Initiator Defined Partitions bit must be zero.
PSUM - Partition Size Unit of Measure field must be zero.
Medium Format Recognition
This field is only valid on a MODE SENSE and is set to 01h indicating that automatic
Format Recognition is supported.
8-60 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.9.8 Read/Write Error Recovery Page (01h)
The drive shall support the Error Recovery Page which has the following format:
Bit
0
7
6
PS (0)
0
1
2
Byte
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTE
DCR
Page Code(01h)
Additional Page Length (0Ah)
rsvd
rsvd
TB
rsvd
EER
3
Read Retry Count
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
8
Write Retry Count
9
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
PER
Figure 8-38 Error Recovery Page Format
In this page, only the Post Error (PER) flag parameter is changeable. If PER is set,
Check Conditions will be created, with Sense Key of Recovered Error, and VU Sense
Data detailing the cause. Normally, these events should be rare, and only occur if the
recovered write or read retry rates reach excessive levels.
Option Flags
• TB - The Transfer Block (when not fully recovered) function is not supported.
•
EER - The Enable Early Recovery function is always enabled.
•
PER - The Post Error bit turns on reporting of Check Condition to report recovered
read/write errors. The default setting of this bit is zero.
•
DTE - The Disable Transfer on Error feature is not supported so this bit must be
zero.
•
DCR - The Disable ECC Correction bit feature is not supported so this bit must be
zero.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-61
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Read Retry Count
This field reports the maximum number of rereads that are done before declaring an
unrecoverable error.
Write Retry Count
This field reports the maximum number of overwrite retries that will be performed
before declaring an unrecoverable error.
8-62 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.9.9 EEROM Vendor Unique Page (3Eh)
The drive shall support a vendor unique page, which you can use to modify savable
parameters. Only one savable parameter may be changed per Mode Select command. It
has the following format:
0
1
2
PS
0
Page Code
Additional Page Length
ASCII String of parameter name and value
Figure 8-39 EEROM Vendor Unique Page Format
The ASCII string has a parameter name, followed by one or more space characters, a
parameter value, and an ASCII line feed or null character. When the string is parsed the
parameter value will be interpreted as indicated in the following table. The parameter
name may be in upper- or lowercase.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-63
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Table 8-3 EEROM Vendor Unique Page Parameters
Length Usage
Skip
Default1 (Bytes)
Name
Value Rep.
Default
VENDORID
ASCII
DEC
1
8
PRODUCTID
ASCII
DLT2000
1
16
FORCEDENSITY
ASCII
Decimal
0
0
1
FORCECOMP
ASCII Binary
0
0
1
DEFAULTCOMPON
ASCII Binary
1
0
1
DEFFIXEDBLKLEN
ASCII
Decimal
ASCII Binary
0
0
8
0
0
1
1
0
1
REWINDONRESET
ASCII
Decimal
ASCII Binary
1
0
1
ENALDRAUTOLD
ASCII Binary
1
0
1
ENBINQMEDCHGR
LOADERLUN
1Parameter
Vendor Identification field in
Inquiry Data
Product Identification field in
Inquiry Data
0=automatic2, 1=DLT260,
2=DLT600, 3=DLT2000
0=automatic2, 1=Always
compress unless front panel
selection disables it
0=Compression defaulted off
on powerup/reset,
1=Compression defaulted to
on, on powerup/reset
Default fixed block size
0=disable media changer bit,
1=enable media changer bit
in byte 6 of inquiry data
1-7 = LUN to report media
loader device on
0=Do not rewind on Bus
Reset or BDR msg (Caution:
May have partial block data
written to the tape, if reset
happens during writing.)
1=Rewind the media to BOT
on reset.
To turn on/off sequential
loading with loader.
setting, if set, remains after the firmware update.
2Parameter
is not forced to a special format, which is decided by the parameters
selected in MODE SELECT.
8-64 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Table 8-3 EEROM Vendor Unique Page Parameters (cont’d)
Name
Value Rep. Default Skip
Length Usage
Default1 (Bytes)
DISLDRAUTOLDMC
ASCII Binary
1
ENAPARERRRETRY
ASCII Binary
0
0
1
ENAMODEPG22
ASCII Binary
0
0
1
NODISCONFXDBLK
ASCII Binary
1
0
1
FOURLAMPMODEL
ASCII Binary
0
1
1
PROTECTDIRONWP
ASCII Binary
0
0
1
ENACLNGLTRPT
ASCII Binary
1
0
1
LONGXPORTPAGE
ASCII Binary
1
0
1
FORCEEEREBUILD
ASCII Binary
0
0
1
SCSIINQVS
ASCII Binary
0
0
1
DEFSEW
ENAINITSYNCNEG
ASCII Binary
ASCII Binary
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
To partially disable sequential
loading with loader if any media
loader command has been
received.
To turn on/off parity error etry
feature.
To enable vendor unique Data
Compression (Status Mode
Page).
To turn on/off feature of not to
disconnect on every fixed block
data transfer.
If turned on, front panel
SELECT button can only select
2.6 GB, 10.0 GB, or
Compress (done with 10.0 GB
only)
To protect tape directory if the
cartridge write-protect switch is
in write protect position.
To report error status if cleaning
light is on.
To report 18 or 6 bytes medium
transport element status
descriptor if parameter is on or
off.
To force all the EEROM
parameters reset to default, if set
To return vendor unique inquiry
string, if set
To set default SEW parameter
To enable target initiated
synchronous negotiation, if set.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-65
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Table 8-3 EEROM Vendor Unique Page Parameters (cont’d)
Length Usage
Default Skip
Default1 (Bytes)
Name
Value Rep.
REPORTRCVDPERRS
ASCII Binary
1
0
1
ENATHIRDPTYDENS
ASCII Binary
1
0
1
FORCEREADSILI
ASCII Binary
0
0
1
CACHETMS
ASCII
Decimal
0
0
1
LDRCYCLERESET
ASCII Binary
0
0
1
ENAREPDECOMP
ASCII Binary
0
0
1
8-66 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
To report recovered error if
parity error has been
retried successfully, if set.
To make non-DLT density
code act as the default
density (same as density
code 0), if set.
To make variable Read
command handled as if the
SILI bit is set, if set.
0,1=Don't cache filemarks
unless Imm bit is 1;
2=Cache if not 2 in a row
unless Imm bit is 1;
3=Always cache filemarks
To cause the first cartridge
to be loaded if unloading
the last cartridge when the
loader product is operated
in sequential mode ,if set.
If set and the drive is in
Read mode, the
decompression algorithm
field in Data Compression
mode page will be set if the
last block requested by the
host was decompressed,
otherwise it is cleared.
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
This is an example of an EEROM vendor unique page that will modify the VENDORID
parameter to "XXXYY."
0
1
0
0
Page Code (3EH)
Page Length (0FH)
2
"v"
(76H)
3
"e"
(65H)
4
"n"
(6EH)
5
"d"
(64H)
6
"o"
(6FH)
7
"r"
(72H)
8
"i"
(69H)
9
"d"
(64H)
10
""
(20H)
11
"X"
(58H)
12
"X"
(58H)
13
"X"
(58H)
14
"Y"
(59H)
15
"Y"
(59H)
16
<LF>
(0AH) or (00H)
Figure 8-40 EEROM Vendor Unique Page Example 1
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-67
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
This is an example of an EEROM vendor unique page that will modify the
FORCEDENSITY parameter to 1.
0
1
0
0
Page Code (3EH)
Page Length (0FH)
2
"F"
(46H)
3
"O"
(4FH)
4
"R"
(52H)
5
"C"
(43H)
6
"E"
(45H)
7
"D"
(44H)
8
"E"
(45H)
9
"N"
(4EH)
10
"S"
(53H)
11
"I"
(49H)
12
"T"
(54H)
13
"Y"
(59H)
14
""
(20H)
15
"1"
(31H)
16
<LF>
(0AH) or (00H)
Figure 8-41 EEROM Vendor Unique Page Example 2
8-68 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.9.10 MODE SELECT Changeable Parameters
The following table lists the changeable mode parameters and their minimum and
maximum values allowed. See the previous definitions for the units that are used.
Parameter rounding is supported for all parameters except the block descriptor length.
Table 8-4 Changeable Mode Parameters
Page: Parameter
Default
Minimum
Maximum
Header: Buffered Mode, Device Specific Byte
Block Descriptor Length
Block Descriptor: Block Length
2.6 GB and 6.0 GB mode
10.0 GB and 20.0 GB mode
1
08h
0
00h
1
08h
0
0
0
0
40000h
FFFFFFh
0
0
1
0080h
0
0
0
0000h
1
1
1
FFFFh
0
C8h
1
1
0
Fh
0
0
3
1964h
1
1
Read-Write Error Recovery (01h): PER Bit
Control Mode (0Ah): RLEC
Data Compression (0Fh): DCE
Disconnect-Reconnect (02h): Maximum Burst
Size
Disconnect-Reconnect (02h): DTDC
Device Configuration (10h): Write Delay Time
Device Configuration (10h): SEW
Device Configuration (10h): Select Data
Compression Algorithm
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-69
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.10 MODE SENSE (1Ah /5Ah)
MODE SENSE allows the drive to report its media, current or changeable configuration
parameters to the host. It is a complementary command to MODE SELECT.
Bit
7
6
0
1
Byte
2
5
4
3
1
0
Operation Code (1Ah)
Logical Unit Number
Reser.
PC
DBD
Reserved
4
Allocation Length
Unused
Reserved
Page Code
3
5
2
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-42 MODE SENSE CDB (6)
The DLT2000 products also support the 10-byte MODE SENSE, which is required to
request the VU EEROM Parameter page because of the large amount of data that needs
to be passed back. MODE SENSE (10) can be used to retrieve the other pages as well.
Note that MODE SENSE (10) returns a different format of descriptor data.
8-70 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Bit
7
6
0
1
2
Byte
5
4
3
1
0
Operation Code (5Ah)
Logical Unit Number
PC
Rsvd
DBD
reserved
Page Code
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
2
(MSB)
Allocation Length
(LSB)
8
9
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-43 MODE SENSE CDB (10)
DBD
If the Disable Block Descriptors bit is zero, the device returns the Block Descriptor
Data. If set, then the Block Descriptor information is not returned.
PC
The Page Control field indicates the type of page parameter values to be returned to the
host as shown in the following table:
PC
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Description
Report
Report
Report
Report
Current Values
Changeable Values
Default Values
Saved Values
Figure 8-44 MODE SENSE Page Control Definition
The Additional Page Length field of each page returned by the drive indicates the
number of bytes supported for that page.
Page Code
This allows the host to select any specific page, or all the pages supported by the drive.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-71
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Allocation Length
The Allocation Length field specifies the number of bytes that the host has allocated for
returned MODE SENSE data. An Allocation Length of zero means that the drive will
return no MODE SENSE data. This is not considered an error and GOOD status is
returned.
8-72 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.10.1 MODE SENSE Parameter List
The MODE SENSE (6) data contains a 4-byte header followed by one 8-byte block
descriptor, followed by zero or more variable length pages, depending on the Page
Code and the Allocation Length.
7
Byte
6
5
Bit
4
3
0
Sense Data Length
1
Media Type
2
WP
3
Buffered Mode
2
1
0
Speed (0)
Block Descriptor Length (08h)
LSB)
Figure 8-45 MODE SENSE (6) Data Header
The MODE SENSE (10) data contains an 8-byte header followed by one 8-byte block
descriptor, followed by zero or more variable length pages. The MODE SENSE (10)
data header format is as follows:
7
0
Byte
5
Bit
4
3
0
(LSB)
Media Type
WP
Buffered Mode
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
7
1
Mode Sense Data Length
2
6
2
(MSB)
1
3
6
Speed (0)
(MSB)
Block Descriptor Length (8)
(LSB)
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-73
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Figure 8-46 MODE SENSE (10) Data Header
7
6
5
0
Byte
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
Density Code
(MSB)
1
2
Number of Blocks (000000h)
(LSB)
3
4
Reserved
(MSB)
5
6
Block Length
(LSB)
7
Figure 8-47 MODE SENSE Block Descriptor
7
0
Byte
6
PS
5
Bit
4
3
0
2
1
0
Page Code
1
Additional Page Length
2
Page Defined or Vendor-Unique Parameter Bytes
Figure 8-48 MODE SENSE Page Descriptor
Data Length
The Sense Data Length specifies the length in bytes of the following MODE SENSE
data that is available to be transferred during DATA IN phase. The Sense Data Length
does not include itself.
Media Type
This field indicates the media type. The value is as follows:
00h: Unknown media or media not present.
81h: Cleaning tape.
82h: CompacTape or CompacTape II
83h: CompacTape III
8-74 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
WP
A Write-Protected bit of zero indicates that the tape is write-enabled. A Write-Protected
bit of one indicates that the tape is write-protected.
Buffered Mode
The drive implements Immediate Reporting on WRITE commands through Buffered
mode.
If the field is zero, then the drive does not report a GOOD status on WRITE commands
until the data blocks are actually written to tape. If the Buffered Mode field is one, then
the drive reports GOOD status on WRITE commands as soon as the data block has
been transferred to the buffer. This is the default configuration for the drive. If Buffered
mode is not used, the tape drive will suffer a significant degradation in performance, but
not capacity.
Speed
The tape drive supports only one speed, the default speed.
Block Descriptor Length
This specifies the length in bytes of all the block descriptors. Since the drive only
allows one block descriptor, this value will be 8.
Density Code
This field matches the current density of the media, or zero if the density is unknown.
•=
00h - use default density
•=
0Ah - 6667 bpi MFM serial cart. tape X3B5/86-199 (Read only) (CompacTape)
•=
16h - 10000 bpi MFM serial cart tape X3.193-1990 (Read only) (CompacTape
II)
•=
17h - 42500 bpi MFM serial cart tape X3B5/91-174 - 2.6 GB (CompacTape III)
•=
18h - (Same as 17h but with 56 track pairs vs. 24) - 6.0 GB (CompacTape III)
•=
19h - 62500 bpi, 64 track pairs, serial cart tape - 10 GB (CompacTape III)
•=
7Fh - No change from previous density (NOP)
•=
80h - 62500 bpi, 64 track pairs, serial cart tape - 10 GB (CompacTape III)
(Without compression)
•=
81h - 62500 bpi, 64 track pairs, serial cart tape -20 GB (With compression)
Number of Blocks
This field will be sent as zero, indicating that all of the remaining logical blocks on the
tape will have the medium characteristics specified by the block descriptor.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-75
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Block Length
This specifies the length in bytes of each logical block transferred over the SCSI bus. A
block length of zero indicates that the length is variable (as specified in the I/O
command). Any other value indicates the number of bytes per block that will be used
for read, write, and verify type commands that specify a "Fixed" bit of 1 (fixed block
mode).
8-76 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.10.2 MODE SENSE Pages
Following the block descriptor are the MODE SELECT pages, which set the device
parameters. Each page has a 2-byte header which identifies the page code and indicates
the number of bytes in that page.
The supported Page Codes are:
Page Code
00h
0Ah
0Fh
10h
02h
01h
11h
3Eh
3Fh
Description
No Requested Page
Control Mode Page
Data Compression Page
Device Configuration
Disconnect/Reconnect
Error Recovery Page
Medium Partition
EEPROM parameter
All Pages
Sense/Select
Sense
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Sense
Figure 8-49 MODE SENSE Pages Supported
PS Bit
A Parameters Savable (PS) bit of one indicates that the page can be saved in nonvolatile
memory by the drive. If the PS bit is zero, the supported parameters cannot be saved.
(Saveable pages are not supported.)
Additional Page Length
This indicates the number of bytes in that page. However, the value does not include
bytes 0 and 1. The length is returned on MODE SENSE and must subsequently be set
to the same value when performing MODE SELECT.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-77
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.10.3 Control Mode Page (0Ah)
The Control Mode Page allows you to determine whether the DLT2000 will return
Check Condition status when one of its write and read error counters reaches a
specified threshold.
Bit
7
0
6
5
4
RSVD
RSVD
3
Queue Algorithm Modifier
EECA
0
RLEC
Reserved
Reserved
RAENP
QErr
DQue
UAAENP
EAENP
Reserved
5
6
1
Page Length
2
4
2
Page Code
1
Byte
3
(MSB)
Ready AEN Holdoff Period
7
(LSB)
Figure 8-50 Control Mode Page (0Ah)
Page Code
The Page Code identifies the type of MODE SENSE page being transferred. The value
returned for the Page Code is (0Ah) (Control Mode Page).
Page Length
The Page Length indicates the number of bytes in the Control Mode Page that follow
this byte. The value returned for this byte is (06h).
RLEC (Report Log Exception Condition)
The RLEC bit indicates whether the DLT2000 should return Check Condition status
with the sense key set to Unit Attention (6h) when one of its write and read error
counters reaches a specified threshold, as follows:
0 - Do not return Unit Attention when a threshold condition is met
1 - Return Unit Attention when a threshold condition is met
Queue Algorithm Modifier
The value returned for this field is 0.
8-78 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
QErr (Queue Error)
The value returned for this field is 0.
DQue (Disable Queuing)
The value returned for this field is 0.
EECA (Enable Extended Contingent Allegiance)
The DLT2000 does not support extended contingent allegiance, so the value returned
for this field is 0.
RAENP (Ready AEN Permission)
The DLT2000 does not support asynchronous event notification (AEN), so the value
returned for this field is 0.
UAAENP (Unit Attention AEN Permission)
The DLT2000 does not support asynchronous event notification, so the value returned
for this field is 0.
EAENP (Error AEN Permission)
The DLT000xt does not support asynchronous event notification, so the value returned
for this field is 0.
Ready AEN Holdoff Period
The DLT2000 does not support asynchronous event notification, so the value returned
for this field is 0.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-79
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.10.4 Device Configuration Page (10h)
The drive shall support the Device Configuration Page which has the following format:
Bit
0
7
6
PS
0
5
Byte
3
2
0
Additional Page Length (0Eh)
Res
CAP
Active Format
CAF
Active Partition
3
4
Write Buffer Full Ratio
5
Read Buffer Empty Ratio
6
1
Page Code(10h)
1
2
4
(MSB)
Write Delay Time
(LSB
7
8
DBR
BIS
RSmk
9
10
11
AVC
SOCF
RBO
REW
Gap Size
EOD Defined
EEG
SEW
Reserv ed
(MSB)
Buffer Size at Early Warning (optional)
12
13
(LSB)
14
Select Data Compression Algorithm
15
Reserved
Figure 8-51 Device Configuration Page Format
PS
Saving parameters is not supported and will be zero.
CAP, CAF, Active Format
These fields are not supported and will be zero.
Active Partition
Only partition 0 is supported.
8-80 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Write Buffer Full Ratio and Read Buffer Empty Ratio
These indicate how full/empty the buffer memory should be before restarting the
writing/reading of the media. The DLT2000 will set these fields to zero (unused)
because it uses an automatic, adaptive mechanism to dynamically adjust its full/empty
ratios according to the average data rates over the SCSI bus.
Write Delay Time
This indicates the maximum time that the drive will wait with a partially full buffer
before forcing the data to tape (100 ms increments). Note that the buffer full/empty
ratio, which is dynamic, can cause data to be written sooner than the Write Delay time
would indicate. The Write Delay Time defaults to 200 (C8h). This causes the buffer to
be flushed in 20 seconds. Maximum value is 6500 (1964h) and the minimum is 15 (Fh).
This represents delays from almost 11 minutes down to 1.5 seconds.
Byte 8:
DBR–set to 0 (Data buffer recovery not supported)
BIS–set to 1 (Block Identifiers Supported in media format)
RSmk–set to 0 (Setmarks not supported)
AVC–set to 0
SOCF–set to 0
RBO–set to 0
REW–set to 0 (Do not report Early Warning EOM on reads)
Gap Size
This field is not used and is set to zero.
EOD Defined
This field is set to 00h.
EEG
The Enable EOD Generation bit is set to indicate that the drive will generate an EOD.
The drive generates an EOD mark before any change of direction following a write-type
operation.
SEW and Buffer Size at Early Warning
The Synchronize at Early Warning bit is set to 1. Buffer Size at EW fields are not
supported and will be zero.
Select Data Compression Algorithm
One enables data compression; zero disables it.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-81
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.10.5 Data Compression Page (0Fh)
The Data Compression Page specifies parameters for the control of data compression.
Bit
0
7
6
5
PS
RSVD
1
Byte
4
3
2
1
0
Page Code
Page Length
2
DCE
3
DDE
4
(MSB)
DCC
Reserved
RED
Reserved
Compression Algorithm
7
8
(LSB)
(MSB)
Decompression Algorithm
11
(LSB)
12
Reserved
15
Figure 8-52 Data Compression Page)
PS (Parameters Savable)
The Parameters Savable bit indicates if the MODE SENSE parameter data contained in
this page is savable. The DLT2000 does not support this feature. The value returned for
this bit is 0.
Page Code
The Page Code identifies the type of MODE SENSE data being transferred. The value
returned for this field is 0Fh (Data Compression Page).
Page Length
The Page Length indicates the number of Data Compression Page bytes that follow this
byte. The value returned for this byte is 0Eh.
8-82 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
DCE (Data Compression Enable)
The Data Compression Enable bit indicates whether data compression is enabled. The
value returned for this bit depends on the current write density of the DLT2000 as
follows:
0 - Data compression is disabled.
1 - Data compression is enabled.
DCC (Data Compression Capable)
The Data Compression Capable bit indicates whether the device supports data
compression as follows:
0 - The device does not support data compression
1 - The device supports data compression and will process any data sent to it by the
initiator according to the setting of the DCE bit (byte 02, bit 7)
The DLT2000 supports data compression in its native mode, so the value returned for
this bit is 1.
DDE (Data Decompression Enable)
The Data Decompression Enable bit indicates whether data decompression is enabled
or disabled as follows:
0 - Data decompression is disabled.
1 - Data decompression is enabled.
When the DLT2000 reads compressed data from tape, it automatically decompresses
the data before sending it to the initiator. Therefore, the value returned for this bit is
always 1 (data decompression enabled).
RED (Report Exception on Decompression)
The DLT2000 does not report exceptions on decompression (boundaries between
compressed and uncompressed data). The value returned for the RED field is 00h.
Compression Algorithm
The value returned for the Compression Algorithm field is 10h. This indicates LempelZiv (DLZ) high efficiency data compression algorithm.
Decompression Algorithm
The value returned for the Decompression Algorithm field is 10h. This indicates
Lempel-Ziv (DLZ) high efficiency data decompression algorithm. If EEROM parameter
EnaRepDCcomp is set, zero value will be reported if the last block read is not
decompressed.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-83
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.10.6 Disconnect/Reconnect Page (02h)
The drive will support the Disconnect/Reconnect Page which has the following format:
Bit
0
Byte
7
6
PS
0
5
4
3
2
0
Page Code(02h)
1
Additional Page Length (0Eh)
2
Buffer Full Ratio
3
Buffer empty Ratio
4
1
(MSB)
Bus Inactivity Limit
5
(LSB)
6
(MSB)
Disconnect time Limit
7
(LSB)
8
(MSB)
Connect Time Limit
9
(LSB)
10 (MSB)
Maximum Burst Size
11
12
(LSB)
Reserved
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
DTDC
Figure 8-53 Disconnect/Reconnect Page Format
The following parameters in this page are supported:
Maximum Burst Size
This value specifies the maximum amount of data that will be transferred without
disconnecting. A value of zero sets no limit. This value is in units of 512 bytes. For
example, a value of 8 means 4K bytes. Values that are not multiples of 8 are rounded up
to the closest multiple of 8.
Data Transfer Disconnect Control (DTDC)
This value specifies the restriction when a disconnect is permitted.
8-84 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.10.7 Medium Partition Page (11h)
The drive supports the Medium Partitions Parameter Page, which has the following
format:
Bit
0
Byte
7
6
PS
0
5
4
3
2
Additional Page Length (06)
2
Maximum Additional Partitions
3
Additional Partitions Defined
FDP
SDP
0
PageCode(11h)
1
4
1
IDP
PSUM
Reserved
5
Medium Format Recognition (01)
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Figure 8-54 Medium Partition Page Format
Maximum Additional Partitions
No additional partitions are supported; this field will be zero.
Additional Partitions Defined
The field specifies the number of additional partitions to be defined for the tape based
on the settings of the SDP and IDP bits. The maximum allowed is the value returned in
the Maximum Additional Partitions field. Since only one partition is supported, this
field will be zero.
Option Flags
FDP–The Fixed Data Partitions bit will be zero.
SDP–The Select Data Partitions bit will be zero.
IDP–The Initiator Defined Partitions bit will be zero.
PSUM–The Partition Size Unit of Measure field will be zero.
Medium Format Recognition
This field is set to 01h indicating that automatic Format Recognition is supported.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-85
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.10.8 Read/Write Error Recovery Page (01h)
The drive will support the Error Recovery Page, which has the following format:
Bit
0
7
6
PS
0
1
2
Byte
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTE
DCR
Page Code(01h)
Additional Page Length (0Ah)
rsvd
rsvd
TB
rsvd
EER
3
Read Retry Count
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
8
Write Retry Count
9
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
PER
Figure 8-55 Error Recovery Page Format
Option Flags
• TB–The Transfer Block (when not fully recovered) function is not supported.
•
EER–The Enable Early Recovery function is always enabled.
•
PER–The Post Error bit turns on reporting of Check Condition to report recovered
read/write errors. The default setting of this bit is off.
•
DTE–The Disable Transfer on Error feature is not supported so this bit will be
zero.
•
DCR–The Disable ECC Correction bit feature is not supported so this bit will be
zero.
Read Retry Count
This field reports the maximum number of rereads that are done before declaring an
unrecoverable error.
8-86 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Write Retry Count
This field reports the maximum number of overwrite retries that will be performed
before declaring an unrecoverable error.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-87
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.10.9 EEROM Vendor Unique Page (3Eh)
The drive supports the EEROM vendor unique page (3Eh). All the EEROM parameters
that are settable through MODE SELECT EEROM vendor unique page are returned.
__________________________Note _____________________________
Because of the long list of parameters, use MODE SENSE (10) instead of
MODE SENSE (6) to retrieve EEROM parameters
____________________________________________________________
Because of the length of the EEROM parameter, a 10-byte MODE SENSE command is
required to retrieve the parameters. If a 6-byte MODE SENSE command is used to
retrieve the EEROM parameter page, the data returned is as follows:
"Send a 10-byte MODE SENSE command to get the Parameter List."
The data returned by the 10-byte MODE SENSE command for the EEROM page is in
the form of a MODE SENSE (10) data header followed by block and page descriptors.
The data in the page descriptor is organized in the form of a parameter header followed
by the actual parameters value. The parameter header is as follows:
"Name T Current Default Minimum Maximum
-------------------------------- -----------"
Name refers to the parameter name, for example, PRODUCTID or
DEFFAULTCOMPON.
T designates data type: 'b' specifies binary type, 'A' specifies string type, and it is
decimal data type if not specified.
Current/Default/ Minimum/Maximum specifies the current/default/minimum/maximum
value of the parameter.
8-88 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.11 PREVENT/ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL (1Eh)
Bit
7
6
0
1
Byte
5
4
2
1
0
Operation Code (1Eh)
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
5
3
Reserved
Unused
Reserved
Prevent
Flag
Link
Figure 8-56 PREVENT/ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL CDB
This command enables or disables the unloading of the tape cartridge.
Prevent
If this bit is set, the Unload button on the drive front panel is effectively disabled, and
the UNLOAD command will not unload the media or the cartridge. The Prevent/Allow
status in the device is maintained separately for each initiator.
When the Prevent bit is set to zero, then the Prevent state corresponding to that initiator
is cleared. Only when all initiators have cleared their Prevent state are the Unload
button and Unload commands enabled again. By default after power up, hard reset, or
Bus Device Reset message, the Prevent Medium Removal function is cleared.
If a Media Loader is present, the Move Medium command will not be allowed to
remove a cartridge if PREVENT has been selected.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-89
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.12 READ (08h)
Bit
7
6
0
1
2
Byte
5
4
3
2
1
0
SILI
Fixed
Operation Code (08h)
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
(MSB)
3
Transfer Length
4
5
(LSB)
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-57 READ CDB
READ transfers one or more data blocks to the initiator starting with the next block on
the drive.
Fixed
This bit specifies the meaning of the Transfer Length field and whether fixed-length or
variable-length blocks are to be transferred.
If the Fixed bit is set to zero, a Variable Block mode is requested. A single block is
transferred with the Transfer Length specifying the maximum number of bytes the
initiator has allocated for the returned data.
If the Fixed bit is set to one, the Transfer Length specifies the number of blocks to be
transferred to the initiator. This is valid only if the logical unit is currently operating in
Fixed Block mode.
When the Transfer Length is zero, no data is transferred and the current position on the
logical unit is not changed.
A successful READ with the Fixed bit set to one transfers (current block
length)×(Transfer Length) bytes of data to the host. Upon termination of READ, the
media is logically positioned after the last block transferred (EOM side).
Suppress Incorrect Length Indicator (SILI)
If the SILI bit is one and the fixed bit is one, the target shall terminate the command
with CHECK CONDITION status and the sense key shall be set to ILLEGAL
REQUEST with an additional sense code of INVALID FIELD in CDB.
If the SILI bit is not set and the actual block length is different from the specified
transfer length, a CHECK CONDITION status is returned. Within the Sense data, the
8-90 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Incorrect Length Indicator (ILI) bit and Valid bit will be set to one. The Sense Key field
will be set to NO SENSE. The Information Bytes will be set to the difference (residue)
between the requested transfer length and the actual block length, or in Fixed Blocked
Mode, the difference (residue) between the requested number of blocks and the actual
number of blocks read. No more than transfer length bytes are transferred to the
initiator and the tape is logically positioned after the block (EOM side).
If the drive reads a Filemark, it will return a CHECK CONDITION status. Within the
Sense data, the Filemark and Valid bits are set and the Sense Key field is set to NO
SENSE. The Information fields contain the residue count. The Additional Sense Code
and Additional Sense Code Qualifier fields are set to Filemark Detected. Upon
termination, the media will be logically positioned after the Filemark (EOM side).
If the drive detects EOD during the READ, the drive will return a CHECK
CONDITION status. Within the Sense data, the Valid bit is set and the Sense Key field
is set to BLANK CHECK. The EOM bit may be set if the drive determines that the tape
is positioned past the PSEN marker. The information fields contain the residue count.
The Additional Sense Code and Additional Sense Code Qualifier fields are set. Upon
termination, the media will be physically positioned before EOD and after the last block
on tape.
The meaning of EOM is different for a read than for a write type of command. EOM is
only reported when the physical EOM/P is encountered. The drive returns a CHECK
CONDITION status. The EOM and Valid bits are set and the Sense Key is set to
MEDIUM ERROR. The information fields contain the residue count and the Additional
Sense Code and Additional Sense Code Qualifier fields are set to EOM/P Detected. The
tape is physically positioned at EOM/P.
If any READ command cannot be completed successfully the drive returns a CHECK
CONDITION status. Further commands should attempt to move past the error and
complete successfully.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-91
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.13 READ BLOCK LIMITS (05h)
Bit
7
6
5
0
3
2
1
0
Flag
Link
Operation Code (05h)
1
Byte
4
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Unused
Reserved
Figure 8-58 READ BLOCK LIMITS CDB
READ BLOCK LIMITS tells the drive to return its limits for block length. The READ
BLOCK LIMITS data shown below is sent during the DATA IN phase of the
command. The command does not reflect the currently selected block size, only the
available limits. MODE SENSE returns the current block size.
Bit
7
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
1 (MSB)
2
Byte
Maximum block length
3
(LSB)
4 (MSB)
5
Minimum block length (0001h)
(LSB)
Figure 8-59 READ BLOCK LIMITS Data
Maximum Block Length
This field indicates the maximum block size. The device supports a maximum block
length of 16,777,215 bytes (16 MB-1) for the 10 GB format. A maximum block length
of 256 K bytes is supported for 2.6 GB or 6.0 GB formats.
Minimum Block Size
This field indicates the minimum block size. The device supports a minimum block
length of 1 byte.
8-92 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.14 READ BUFFER (3Ch)
Bit
7
6
0
1
Byte
4
3
2
1
0
Operation Code (3Ch)
Logical Unit Number
2
3
5
Reserved
Mode
Buffer ID
(MSB)
4
Buffer Offset
5
6
(LSB)
(MSB)
Allocation Length
7
(LSB)
8
9
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-60 READ BUFFER CDB
READ BUFFER is used in conjunction with WRITE BUFFER as a diagnostic function
for testing the drive's data buffer and the SCSI bus integrity.
Mode
The drive supports the following values within the field. If any nonsupported value is
set, the drive terminates the command with a CHECK CONDITION status and an
ILLEGAL REQUEST sense key set.
Mode
Description
000b
010b
011b
Combined Header and Data
Data
Descriptor
Figure 8-61 READ BUFFER Modes Supported
Buffer ID & Offset
The drive only supports a single Buffer ID field of zero, and offsetting of data is not
supported. If these fields are nonzero, the drive returns a CHECK CONDITION status
with an ILLEGAL REQUEST sense key set.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-93
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Allocation Length
The Allocation Length specifies the maximum number of bytes that the initiator has
allocated for returned data.
8.4.14.1 Combined Header and Data Mode
In this mode, the drive returns a 4-byte header followed by the data bytes. The drive
terminates the DATA IN phase when Allocation Length bytes of header and data have
been transferred, or when all available data has been transferred to the initiator,
whichever is less. The 4-byte READ BUFFER header is followed by data bytes from
the target data buffer. The header has the following format:
Bit
7
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
Byte 1 (MSB)
2
Available Length
3
(LSB)
Figure 8-62 READ BUFFER Data Head
Available Length
The Available Length field specifies the total number of data bytes available in the
target's buffer. This number is not reduced to reflect the allocation length, nor is it
reduced to reflect the actual number of bytes written using the WRITE BUFFER
command. Following the READ BUFFER header, the target will transfer data from its
data buffer.
8.4.14.2 Data Mode
In this mode, the DATA IN phase only contains buffer data.
8.4.14.3 Descriptor Mode
In this mode, a maximum of four bytes of READ BUFFER descriptor information are
returned. The drive returns the descriptor information for the buffer specified by the
Buffer ID. In this mode, the drive does not reject the valid Buffer IDs with a CHECK
CONDITION status, but returns all zeros in the READ BUFFER descriptor.
The Offset Boundary is 12 (0Ch), indicating buffer offsets should be integral multiples
of 4K.
8-94 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
7
0
Byte
1
2
6
5
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
Offset Boundary (0Ch)
(MSB)
Buffer Capacity
3
4
(LSB)
Figure 8-63 READ BUFFER Descriptor
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-95
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.15 READ POSITION (34h)
Bit
7
6
0
1
Byte
5
4
3
1
0
Operation Code (34h)
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
8
Reserved
9
2
Unused
Reserved
BT
Flag
Link
Figure 8-64 READ POSITION CDB
The READ POSITION command is used to read a position identifier, or SCSI Logical
Block Address. The LOCATE command uses this identifier to position back to this
same logical position, in a high performance fashion.
BT
The Block Type bit indicates how the position is interpreted. Since this device uses the
same logical block address whether this bit is set or not, the setting of BT is ignored.
The logical block address values include all recorded objects: blocks and filemarks.
__________________________Note _____________________________
The drive returns CHECK CONDITION with the Unit Not Ready Sense Key
with the Read Position command if the media is not ready to be accessed.
____________________________________________________________
8-96 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.15.1 READ POSITION Data Format
Bit
0
Byte
7
6
BOP
EOP
5
4
3
Reserved
1
Partition Number
2
3
Reserved
4
2
BPU
1
0
Reserved
(MSB)
5
First Block Location
6
7
8
(LSB)
(MSB)
9
Last Block Location
10
(LSB)
11
Reserved
12
13 (MSB)
Number of Blocks in Buffer
14
(LSB)
15
16 (MSB)
17
Number of Bytes in Buffer
18
(LSB)
19
Figure 8-65 READ POSITION Data Format
The BOP and EOP bits will be set as appropriate. The Block Position Unknown (BPU)
bit is never set since the setting of the BT bit in the Read Position CDB does not affect
the block address values returned.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-97
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
First Block Location
The block address associated with the current logical position; the next block to be
transferred between the target and initiator if a READ or WRITE command is issued.
Last Block Location
The block address associated with the current physical position; the next block to be
transferred to the media and from the target's buffer. If the buffer is empty, or has only a
partial block, the same value as First Block Location will be reported. The first block or
filemark written onto the media is at address zero.
Number of Blocks in Buffer
The number of data blocks in the target's buffer.
Number of Bytes in Buffer
The number of data bytes in the buffer that have not been written to the medium.
8-98 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.16 RECEIVE DIAGNOSTICS RESULTS (1Ch)
Bit
7
6
5
0
4
Logical Unit Number
1
0
Reserved
Reserved
2
3
2
Operation Code (1Ch)
1
Byte
3
(MSB)
Allocation Length
4
(LSB)
5
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-66 RECEIVE DIAGNOSTICS RESULTS CDB
RECEIVE DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS tells the drive to send analysis data to the
initiator after completion of a SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. The following data will
be returned by this command. A REQUEST SENSE command should be issued to
obtain more detailed information following a check condition on a SEND
DIAGNOSTIC command.
Bit
7
Byte
6
5
4
3
2
0
Controller Present flag
1
Controller Error flag
2
Drive Present flag
3
Drive Error flag
4
Media Loader Present flag
5
Media Loader Error flag
1
0
Figure 8-67 Receive Diagnostic Result Data Format
This information simply indicates which of the main components of the subsystem has
failed testing.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-99
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.17 RELEASE UNIT (17h)
Bit
7
6
0
1
Byte
5
4
3
1
0
Operation Code (17h)
Logical Unit Number
3rdPty
Third Party Device ID
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
2
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Rsvd
Link
Figure 8-68 RELEASE UNIT CDB
RELEASE UNIT releases the drive if it is currently reserved by the requesting initiator.
It is not an error to attempt to release the drive if it is not currently reserved by the
requesting initiator. However, if it reserved by another initiator, the drive is not
released.
3rdPty
The third-party release option for RELEASE UNIT allows an initiator to release a
logical unit that was previously reserved using the third-party reservation option. If the
third-party (3rdPty) bit is zero, then the third-party release option is not requested. If
the 3rdPty bit is one, the drive is released if it was originally reserved by the same
initiator using the third-party reservation option, and if the device is the same SCSI
device that was specified in the third-party device ID field.
8.4.17.1 Medium Changer Considerations
The optional Element reservation feature defined for Medium Changer devices in SCSI2 is not supported, so the RELEASE command is defined the same as for the tape drive:
Only the whole loader unit can be released. Reserve/release of the Loader and Drive
LUNs are handled independently.
8-100 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.18 REQUEST SENSE (03h)
Bit
7
6
0
1
Byte
5
4
3
2
0
Flag
Link
Operation Code (03h)
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Allocation Length
5
1
Unused
Reserved
Figure 8-69 REQUEST SENSE CDB
REQUEST SENSE tells the target to transfer sense data to the initiator.
The sense data is valid for a CHECK CONDITION or RESERVATION CONFLICT
status returned on the previous command. The sense data bytes are preserved by the
target until retrieved by the REQUEST SENSE command, or until the receipt of any
other command from the same initiator.
If the drive receives an unsolicited REQUEST SENSE, then it returns Sense Data with
the appropriate values in the EOM, Sense Key, Additional Sense Code, and Additional
Sense Code Qualifier. The positional information provided reflects the logical position
of the drive. The drive returns information based on the (nondiagnostic) data still in its
buffer as well as the data on tape.
REQUEST SENSE does not cause the drive to flush its buffered data to tape.
Therefore, if the host requires the exact physical positioning of the media, it should
precede the REQUEST SENSE with a WRITE FILEMARKS with length 0 (Immed =0)
command, which forces the drive to flush any currently buffered data to tape. A
subsequent REQUEST SENSE will return the actual physical (and logical) position of
the drive to the initiator.
Allocation Length
The Allocation Length specifies the maximum number of sense bytes to be returned.
The drive terminates the transfer when Allocation Length bytes have been transferred or
when all available sense data has been transferred to the host, whichever is less.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-101
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.18.1 Sense Information Format
7
0
6
5
Bit
4
Valid
3
2
1
0
Error Code
1
Segment Number
2
Filemark
3
(MSB)
EOM
ILI
Reserved
Sense Key
4
5
Information Bytes
6
(LSB)
Byte 7
8
Additional Sense Length
(MSB)
9
10
Command Specific Information Bytes
11
(LSB)
12
Additional Sense Code
13
Additional Sense Code Qualifier
14
Sub-Assembly Code
15 SKSV
C/D
Reserved
BPV
16 (MSB)
17
18
Field Pointer
(LSB)
Internal Status Code (VU)
19 (MSB)
20
Tape Motion Hours
(LSB)
21 (MSB)
22
23
Power On Hours
24
(LSB)
Figure 8-70 REQUEST SENSE Data
8-102 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
25 (MSB)
Byte 26
27
Tape Remaining
28
(LSB)
Figure 8-70 REQUEST SENSE Data Cont’d
Valid
A Valid bit of one indicates that the information bytes contain valid information as
defined in the SCSI specification.
Error-Code
A value of 70h indicates a current error – the report is associated with the most recently
received command.
A value of 71h indicates a deferred error – the report is associated with a previous
command and not as a result of the current command.
No other values will be returned.
Segment Number
This byte is always zero.
Filemark
This bit indicates that the current command has read a Filemark.
EOM
This bit indicates that an End-of Medium condition (End of Partition or Beginning of
Partition) exists. The warning is also given by setting the Sense Key to NO SENSE and
the Additional Sense Code Qualifier to End of Partition or Beginning of Partition.
For write-type operations, the drive returns a CHECK CONDITION on any operation
which occurs after detection of the Early Warning EOP marker. The EOM and
Additional Sense Code fields will be set. For read-type operations, the drive does not
return a CHECK CONDITION until the drive encounters the physical EOP.
ILI
The Incorrect Length Indicator bit indicates that the requested logical block length did
not match the logical block length of the data on the tape. Only Read or Verify may
cause this bit to be set.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-103
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Sense Key
In most cases, Additional Sense Code and/or Qualifier information is available. See the
tables later in this section.
Information Bytes
These bytes contain the differences (residue) of the requested length minus the actual
length in bytes, blocks, or Filemarks, as determined by the command. Negative values
are indicated by two's complement notation. The bytes are valid for all read, write,
space, and verify tape commands for which a CHECK CONDITION status has been
generated. The information bytes are zero for MODE SELECT/SENSE, INQUIRY,
READ BLOCK LIMITS, and TEST UNIT READY.
Additional Sense Length
This specifies the number of additional sense bytes to follow. If the Allocation Length
of the command descriptor block is too small to transfer all of the additional sense
bytes, the Additional Sense Length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
Command Specific Information Bytes
Command Specific Bytes are handled as device specific and can be logged by the
operating system on error conditions. On media errors, this usually contains the current
SCSI Logical Block Address.
Additional Sense Code (ASC) and ASC Qualifier
These two bytes provide additional information about the Sense Key and cause of the
CHECK CONDITION status. See the tables later in this section.
Sub-Assembly Code
Unused at present, returned as 0.
Field Pointer Bytes
C/D - When set, indicates that the illegal parameter is in the CDB. A C/D of zero
indicates that the illegal parameter is in the Parameter List from the initiator.
BPV - When the Bit Pointer Valid bit is set, it indicates that the Bit Pointer field is
valid and designates which bit of the byte designated by the field pointer is in error. For
a multi-bit field, it points to the most significant bit of the field.
Field Pointer - Indicates which byte of the CDB or Parameter List was in error. For a
multi-byte field, the most significant byte is indicated.
Internal Status Code
For a complete definition of Internal Status Code, see Appendix B.
8-104 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Tape Motion Hours
Report the number of tape motion hours, that is, the head wear hours. Format is
represented in a hex decimal word (2 bytes).
Power On Hours
Report the total hours the drive power has been on. Format is represented in a hex
decimal longword (4 bytes).
Tape Remaining
Report the amount of tape remained in 4096 bytes block.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-105
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Table 8-5 Sense Keys Used
Sense
Description
Key
0h
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
Bh
Dh
Eh
No Sense. Check the Filemark/EOM/ILI bits and the ASC/Q bytes.
Recovered Error. This can be caused by rounding of Mode Parameters
on a Mode Select, or to report that R/W error rates are reaching
subsystem specification limits for optimal operation. However, the
device may still be able to continue to function without any unrecovered
errors for a long period of time.
Not Ready. The media is not ready for tape operation commands. Media
might not be present in the drive, or may be in the process of loading or
calibrating.
Medium Error. An unrecoverable write, read, or positioning error has
occurred. Detailed device specific information may be available.
Hardware Error. The Additional Sense Code/Qualifier fields may
provide more specific information.
Illegal Request. The CDB or supplied parameter data had an
unsupported or illegal operation specified. Check bytes 15, 16, and 17.
Unit Attention. Unit Attentions are created after a device reset, if the
media asynchronously becomes ready to this initiator, if another initiator
changes Mode Parameters, and if the firmware is updated.
Data Protected. The current media is write-protected. This can be
because of the Write Protect switch on the cartridge, or if the media is
not CompacTape III.
Blank Check. An EOD or LongGap has been encountered.
Command Aborted. Generated when a command has been aborted by
the tape device for some reason. Check the ASC/Q bytes.
Volume Overflow. Physical end of media has been reached during
writing. The initiator ignored the EOM condition and continued writing.
Miscompare. A compare error occurred during reading by the self-tests
invoked during execution of a Send Diagnostic.
8-106 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Table 8-6 Additional Sense Codes/Qualifiers Used
ASC
ASCQ
Description
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
05h
No Additional Sense Code
No additional sense qualifier
Unexpected FM Encountered
End of Medium Encountered
SetMark Encountered
Beginning of Medium Encountered
EOD Encountered
00h
01h
02h
03h
Unit not ready
Cause nonreportable
Calibration in process
Load command needed
Manual Intervention needed
08h
00h
01h
LUN Communications Failure
LUN Communications Timeout
0Ah
00h
Error Log Overflow
0Ch
00h
Write Error
11h
00h
08h
Unrecovered Read Error
Incomplete Block Read
14h
00h
Recorded Entity Not Found
15h
01h
02h
Mech Position Error
Detected by Read of Media
1Ah
00h
Parameter List Length Error
00h
04h
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-107
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Table 8-6 Additional Sense Codes/Qualifiers Used (Cont’d)
ASC
ASCQ
Description
20h
00h
Illegal opcode
21h
01h*
Invalid Element Address
24h
00h
81h
82h
84h
86h
87h
89h
8Bh
8Ch
8Dh
8Eh
8Fh
Invalid CDB field
Invalid mode on write buffer
Media in drive
Insufficient resources
Invalid offset
Invalid size
Image data over limit
Image/personality is bad
Not immediate command
Bad drive/servo image EDC
Invalid personality for CUP
Bad controller image EDC
25h
00h
Illegal LUN
00h
01h
02h
Parameter list error
Invalid Field
Parameter not supported
Parameter Value Invalid
27h
00h
80h
82h
Write protected
Hardware write protect
Data safety write protect
28h
00h
Not ready to read
29h
2Ah
00h
01h
02h
Reset occurred
Mode parameters changed
Log parameters changed
26h
8-108 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Table 8-6 Additional Sense Codes/Qualifiers Used (Cont’d)
ASC
ASCQ
Description
2Fh
00h
Commands Cleared by another Initiator
30h
00h
Cannot read medium
37h
00h
Rounded Parameter
39h
00h
Saving Parameters Not Supported
3Ah
00h
80h
Media Not Present
VU Cartridge Missing
3Bh
00h
08h
0Dh*
0Eh*
Sequential Positioning Error
Reposition Error
Media Destination Element Full
Media Source Element Empty
3Dh
00h
Invalid Bits in ID Msg
3Fh
01h
Microcode has been changed
40h
80h
81h
82h
83h
84h
ROM EDC failure
RAM failure
Bad Drive status
Loader diags failed
Reportable POST failure
43h
00h
Message error
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-109
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Table 8-6 Additional Sense Codes/Qualifiers Used (Cont’d)
ASC
ASCQ
Description
44h
00h
80h
82h
83h
84h
85h
86h
87h
88h
C1h
C2h
C3h
Internal Target Failure
Unexpected Selection Interrupt
Command complete sequence failure
SCSI chip Gross Error
Unexplained Residue in TC Registers
Immediate data transfer timeout
Insufficient CDB bytes
Disconnect/SDP sequence failed
Bus DMA Transfer Timeout
EEPROM copy 1 area bad
EEPROM copy 2 area bad
Both EEPROM copies bad
45h
00h
Select/Reselect Failure
47h
00h
SCSI Parity Error
48h
00h
IDE Message received
49h
00h
Invalid Message Error
4Eh
00h
Overlapped Commands attempted
51h
00h
Erase failure
53h
00h
01h
02h
Media Load/Eject failure
Unload Tape failure
Media Removal Prevented
5Ah
01h
Operator Media Removal Request
8-110 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Table 8-6 Additional Sense Codes/Qualifiers Used (Cont’d)
ASC
ASCQ
Description
5Bh
01h
02h
Threshold Condition Met
Log Counter at Maximum
80h
00h
01h
02h
Calibration Error
Cleaning Required
Cleaning Requested
81h
00h
Directory Read Error
82h
00h
Not allowed if not at BOT
* = Medium Changer specific commands
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-111
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.19 RESERVE UNIT (16h)
Bit
7
6
5
0
1
Byte
4
3
1
0
Operation Code (16h)
Logical Unit Number
3rdPty
Third-Party Device ID
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
2
Unused
Reserved
Flag
RsvdD
Link
Figure 8-71 RESERVE UNIT CDB
RESERVE UNIT reserves the specified drive for exclusive use by the requesting
initiator or for another specified SCSI device. The reservation remains in effect until
one of the following conditions is met:
•
The initiator that made the reservation sends another RESERVE UNIT command.
•
The drive is released by RELEASE UNIT from the same initiator.
•
A BUS DEVICE RESET message is received from any initiator.
•
A hard reset occurs.
The occurrence of the last two conditions is indicated by the drive returning a CHECK
CONDITION status with a sense key of UNIT ATTENTION on the next command
following the condition. It is not an error to issue RESERVE UNIT to a drive that is
currently reserved to the requesting initiator.
If the logical unit has previously been reserved by another initiator, the target returns a
RESERVATION CONFLICT status.
If, after honoring the reservation, any other initiator attempts to perform any command
except INQUIRY, REQUEST SENSE, or RELEASE UNIT, the command is rejected
with a RESERVATION CONFLICT status. A RELEASE UNIT command issued by
another initiator is ignored by that reserved logical unit.
3rdPty
The third-party reservation option for RESERVE UNIT allows an initiator to reserve a
logical unit for another SCSI device. This option is intended for systems that use
COPY, and is implemented by the drive.
If the third-party (3rdPty) bit is zero, then the third-party reservation option is not
requested. If the 3rdPty bit is one, RESERVE UNIT reserves the logical unit for the
8-112 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
SCSI device specified in the Third-Party Device ID field. The drive preserves the
reservation until any one of the four conditions mentioned above occurs. The drive
ignores any attempt made by any other initiator to release the reservation and returns a
GOOD status.
An initiator that holds a current reservation may modify that reservation (for example,
to switch third-parties) by issuing another RESERVE UNIT to the drive.
8.4.19.1 Medium Changer Considerations
The optional Element reservation feature defined for Medium Changer devices in SCSI2 is not supported, so the RESERVE command is defined the same as for the tape
drive: Only the whole loader unit can be reserved. This is separate from a reservation of
the tape drive.
The RESERVE/RELEASE commands operate on a LUN basis; so the Medium
Changer and Tape Drive are generally handled as different devices. But in the case of a
reserved drive LUN, a MOVE MEDIUM command issued to the loader LUN can not
insert/remove a cartridge on the drive, unless the drive is reserved by the same initiator.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-113
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.20 REWIND (01h)
Bit
7
6
5
0
1
Byte
4
3
1
0
Operation Code (01h)
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
2
Unused
Reserved
Immed
Flag
Link
Figure 8-72 REWIND CDB
REWIND tells the drive to position the tape at the beginning of the currently active
partition. Before rewinding, the drive writes any write data that is buffered to the tape,
and appends an EOD marker.
Immed
If the Immed (Immediate) bit is set, the drive first writes any remaining buffered data to
tape followed by an EOD marker. It then returns status to the host before beginning the
actual rewind operation. If the Immed bit is not set, status will be returned after the
rewind has completed.
8-114 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.21 SEND DIAGNOSTIC (1Dh)
Bit
7
6
5
0
1
3
3
2
1
0
Operation Code (1Dh)
Logical Unit Number
PF
Rsv’d
Selftst
Dev OfL UnitOfL
Reserved
2
Byte
4
(MSB)
Parameter List Length
4
5
(LSB)
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-73 SEND DIAGNOSTIC CDB
SEND DIAGNOSTIC tells the drive to perform diagnostic tests on itself.
The Page Format field is not supported and must be zero.
Two separate types of unit resident tests can be accessed:
•
Electronics Self-Test - (Level 1 test) To invoke the diagnostic, a good portion of
the controller hardware and software must be functioning properly. This is the
premise this test is based on: that full power-up testing is not necessary. Therefore,
this test does an extension of the power-up self tests. The code ROM EDC is
verified, two queues used by much of the controller software is checked by
dequeuing and enqueuing items.
If there is a loader attached, a software reset is done on it. This test does not
attempt to write or read data to or from media. When complete, any errors are
posted in the extended Sense Data bytes. This test has an execution time of
approximately 5 seconds.
This test is specified by setting just the Self-Test bit (DevOfL, and UnitOfL both
zero).
•
Write/Read Functionality Test - (Level 2 test). The default version of this test does
the following:
-
Writes 100 32 KB records on track 0.
-
Rewinds the tape.
-
Reads the records.
-
Positions to the beginning of track 1.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-115
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
-
Writes 100 32 KB records on track 1.
-
Repositions to the beginning of track 1.
-
Reads the records.
-
Rewinds the tape. The execution time for the test is 6 minutes, if
calibration is not required. This test is specified by setting the Self-Test
and UnitOfL bits, and zeroing the DevOfL bit. This test can accept a
parameter list specifying test variables, as shown in the next table.
If a parameter list is specified, all parameters must be filled in and the
parameter list length should be set to 12. If these requirements are not
met, an ILLEGAL REQUEST will be returned. The Self-Test bit should
be zero.
8-116 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Table 8-7 Send Diagnostics Parameters
Selftest
DevOfL
UnitOfL
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Selftest Action
Illegal combination
Self-Test 2 with default parameters
Illegal combination
Self-Test 2 with default parameters
Self-Test 1 with default parameters
Self-Test 2 with default parameters
Self-Test 1 with default parameters
Self-Test 2 with default parameters
Bit
7
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(MSB)
Pattern Number
1
2
(LSB)
(MSB)
Maximum Number of Test Passes
Byte
(LSB)
3
4
(MSB)
5
Block Size
6
7
8
(LSB)
(MSB)
9
Block Count
10
11
(LSB)
Figure 8-74 SEND DIAGNOSTIC Parameter List Format
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-117
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Table 8-8 Definition of Pattern Numbers
Pattern
Name
Data in Hex
0
Rotate
(Rotate through the other 9 patterns,
change for each tape file)
00 00 00 00 00
FF FF FF FF FF
55 5A AA A5 55 5A AA A5
01 02 04 08 10 20 40 80
FE FD FB F7 EF DF BF 7F
0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E
DE AD DE AD DE AD DE AD
AA AA AA AA AA AA AA AA
1
All 0's
2
2F
3
Alternating 1's and 0's
4
Marching 1
5
Marching 0
6
MW
7
MFM
8
1F
9
Random Data
If the Max Number of Passes is zero, this indicates to loop forever. A BUS Reset or a
selection from the host sending an Abort or a Bus Device Reset message will terminate
testing.
If the Block Size field is set to zero, random block sizes will be used.
The Block Count field specifies how many blocks to write/read starting first on track 0,
then again on track 1. So if the Block Size and Count fields result in 3 tracks worth of
data, the test will:
•
Write tracks 0, 1, 2
•
Rewind, read, and verify 0, 1, 2
•
Write 3 tracks starting with 1: 1, 2, 3 and then rewind to the beginning of track 1
and do the read/verify pass. If Block Count is set to zero, data will be written until
EOT is reached each time, so almost 4 complete passes over the tape would result.
__________________________Note _____________________________
Because of data generation and verification, this test only streams the
tape for short periods of time. Therefore, if Block Count is set very high,
this test can take many minutes or even many hours to complete.
____________________________________________________________
If the specified test passes, a GOOD STATUS is returned. Otherwise, a Check
Condition is generated, and the Sense Data will contain information about the failure.
8-118 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Table 8-9 Sense Keys Used
Sense Key
3h
4h
5h
Eh
Description
Medium Error. A positioning error has occurred where the
returned position does not match the expected.
Hardware Error. The Additional Sense Code/Qualifier fields will
provide more specific information.
ILLEGAL REQUEST. Illegal bit settings in the SEND
DIAGNOSTIC command.
Miscompare. A compare error occurred during a read.
Table 8-10 Additional Sense Codes
Additional
Additional
Sense Code
Sense Qualifier
15h
2h
40h
40h
40h
40h
80h
81h
82h
83h
Description
A positioning error has occurred where the
returned position does not match the
expected.
Level 1 ROM test failed.
Level 1 RAM test failed.
Level 1 test failed. Bad Drive status.
Level 1 test failed. Loader Reset failed.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-119
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.22 SPACE (11h)
Bit
7
6
5
0
1
2
Byte
4
3
2
1
Operation Code (11h)
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
Code
(MSB)
3
Count
4
5
0
(LSB)
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-75 SPACE CDB
SPACE provides a variety of positioning functions that are determined by Code and
Count fields in the Command Descriptor Block. Both forward (toward EOM/P) and
reverse (toward BOM/P) positioning are provided.
Code
The code is defined as follows:
Space Code
Space by:
000b
001b
010b
011b
Blocks
Filemarks
Sequential Filemarks
End-of-Data
Figure 8-76 SPACE Code Definition
For 2.6 and 6.0 GB format, the drive supports count values 0, 1, and 2 only. For 10.0
GB format, compress or noncompress, the count value can be from 0 to FFFFFFh.
8-120 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Count
When spacing over blocks or marks, the Count field is interpreted as follows:
•
A positive value N causes forward movement over N blocks or marks. The tape is
logically positioned after the Nth block or mark on the EOM/P side.
•
A zero value causes no change in the logical position.
•
A negative value -N (two's complement notation) causes reverse movement over N
blocks or marks. The tape is logically positioned on the BOM/P side of the Nth
block or mark.
•
When spacing to EOD, the Count field is ignored. Forward movement occurs until
the drive encounters EOD. The position is such that a subsequent WRITE
command would append data after the last object that has been written to tape
before EOD.
When executing SPACE, the drive implements the following hierarchy:
Blocks - lowest
Filemarks
EOD
BOM/P or EOM/P - highest
Therefore, SPACE N blocks will halt with GOOD status after the Nth block, or with
CHECK CONDITION status on any occurrence of Filemark, EOD, BOM/P, or
EOM/P. A space N Filemarks will halt on the Nth Filemark or on any occurrence of
EOD, BOM/P, or EOM/P, and so on.
Depending on the size of blocks, read ahead data in the buffer allows some spacing
requests to be satisfied without tape movement.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-121
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.23 TEST UNIT READY (00h)
Bit
7
6
0
1
Byte
5
4
3
1
0
Flag
Link
Operation Code (00h)
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
2
Unused
Reserved
Figure 8-77 TEST UNIT READY CDB
TEST UNIT READY checks if the drive unit is ready for commands involving tape
movement. If the drive has a tape loaded, the command returns a GOOD status.
Otherwise, CHECK CONDITION is reported.
It is possible to get multiple check conditions on a TEST UNIT READY command
because of power cycle, code update, and tape loaded.
8.4.23.1 Medium Changer Considerations
When directed at the Media Loader LUN, this command will return Check Condition,
Sense Key, or Not Ready if:
•
The Mode Select key switch is in the Service mode, and there is no 24V signal
(usually means the loader assembly has been moved out of its sleeve enough to trip
the 24V interlock.)
8-122 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.24 VERIFY (13h)
Bit
7
6
5
0
1
2
Byte
4
3
2
1
0
Immed
BC
Fixed
Operation Code (13h)
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
(MSB)
3
Verification Length
4
5
(LSB)
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-78 VERIFY CDB
VERIFY verifies one or more blocks beginning with the next block on the tape. Both
CRC and EDCs are validated.
Immed
If this bit is set, the Verify command will complete before any media movement is done
(that is, when processing has been initiated).
BC
This bit selects a CRC/ECC verification or a byte-by-byte compare. If the BC bit is
cleared, the device is instructed to perform an internal CRC/ECC check of the data.
If this bit is set, the command will be rejected.
Fixed
This bit operates in the same fashion as with the READ command.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-123
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.25 WRITE (0Ah)
Bit
7
6
5
0
1
Byte
4
3
2
1
0
Operation Code (0Ah)
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
Fixed
2 (MSB)
3
Transfer Length
4
5
(LSB)
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-79 WRITE CDB
WRITE transfers one or more blocks from the host to the current logical position.
When in Buffered Mode (see MODE SELECT), the tape drive reports a GOOD status
on WRITE commands as soon as this data block has been transferred to the data buffer.
The drive flushes the write buffer to tape under the following conditions:
•
The write hold-off time limit is exceeded. (See MODE SELECT command.)
•
Receipt of the following nonwrite commands:
LOAD-UNLOAD
REWIND
ERASE
LOCATE
MOVE MEDIUM
PREVENT/ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL that clears a prevent state
•
A Write Filemarks command with the immediate bit cleared.
•=
A SCSI Reset or Bus Device Reset a reset message is received.
If Buffered Mode is not selected, the buffer will flush after every write-type command.
Buffered Mode can be configured through MODE SELECT, and if it is not used, the
tape drive suffers a significant degradation in performance with respect to transfer rate
and therefore, loss of streaming.
8-124 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Fixed
The fixed bit specifies both the meaning of the Transfer Length field and whether fixedlength or variable-length blocks are to be transferred. If the Fixed bit is set to zero,
Variable Block mode is selected. A single block is transferred from the initiator and is
written to the logical unit beginning at the current logical tape position. Upon successful
termination, the tape is logically positioned after this block (EOM/P side). The Transfer
Length specifies the number of bytes that the drive handshakes out from the initiator.
If the Fixed bit is set to one, the Transfer Length field specifies the number of blocks to
be transferred to the host beginning at the current tape position. This form of WRITE is
valid only if the logical unit is currently operating in Fixed Block mode, in other words,
when it has been instructed to use fixed-length blocks with MODE SELECT. The
current block length is the block length defined in the MODE SELECT command.
Upon termination, the tape is logically positioned after these blocks.
Transfer Length
This field contains the length of the data transfer in bytes or blocks, depending on
whether Fixed or Variable block mode is selected.
If the Transfer Length is zero, no data is transferred and the current position on the
logical unit is not changed.
Exception Conditions
If EOT is detected while writing, the drive will finish writing any buffered data. The
command terminates with CHECK CONDITION status. Within the Sense data, the
EOM bit is set, the Sense Key field is set to NO SENSE, and the Additional Sense
Code and Additional Sense Code Qualifier fields are set to EOM/P detected. The drive
attempts to complete any subsequent writes, returning a CHECK CONDITION status in
each case.
If the drive encounters the physical EOM when attempting write, CHECK
CONDITION status is returned. Within the Sense data, the EOM and Valid bits are set,
and the Sense Key field is set to Volume Overflow The Information fields contain the
residue count and the Additional Sense Code and Additional Sense Code Qualifier
fields are set to EOM/P Detected. The tape is physically positioned at EOM/P.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-125
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.26 WRITE BUFFER (3Bh)
Bit
7
6
0
1
4
3
2
1
0
Operation Code (3Bh)
Logical Unit Number
2
Byte
5
Reserved
Mode
Buffer ID (00h)
3 (MSB)
4
Buffer Offset (000000h)
5
6
(LSB)
(MSB)
7
Parameter List/Data Length
8
9
(LSB)
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-80 WRITE BUFFER CDB
WRITE BUFFER is used with READ BUFFER as a diagnostic function for testing the
device data buffer, DMA engine, SCSI bus interface hardware, and SCSI bus integrity.
It is also used for downloading and updating controller microcode (firmware).
Mode
The drive supports the following values within the field. If any other value is set, the
drive terminates the command with a CHECK CONDITION status and an ILLEGAL
REQUEST sense key set.
Mode
Description
000b
010b
100b
101b
Write combined header and data
Write data
Download Microcode
Download Microcode and Save
Figure 8-81 WRITE BUFFER Modes Supported
For all modes, only a Buffer ID of zero is supported. If the Buffer ID field is nonzero,
the command will be rejected. The target detects and rejects commands that would
overrun the buffer.
8-126 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.26.1 Header and Data Mode
The data to be transferred is preceded by a 4-byte header consisting entirely of reserved
bytes. This header is discarded (not stored into the buffer). The buffer offset field must
be zero for this mode.
8.4.26.2 Write Data
Similar to mode 000b, except there is no header in the data passed to the target. The
Buffer Offset must be zero. Potential buffer overruns are detected and the command is
rejected.
8.4.26.3 Download Microcode
Using buffer offsets, the host can download the firmware image into the target's buffer
in pieces. These commands do not cause the new image to become active. A Download
and Save mode Write Buffer command must be issued.
The tape drive must be empty to allow downloading of an image. This is to safeguard
against accidentally starting a firmware update. If a cartridge is loaded when all or part
of a firmware image has been downloaded, another WRITE BUFFER with Download
mode will be rejected. Overlapping or nonconsecutive downloading of the image data is
not supported. The firmware image must be downloaded in integral multiples of 4K
bytes.
Any error on a Write Buffer command causes any downloaded image data to be
discarded, and the download must be restarted from the beginning.
8.4.26.4 Download Microcode and Save
This mode can be used to download and save the entire image at once, or to download
the image data and save it, or to cause a save operation after all the image data has been
downloaded using the Download only mode. This mode of the command causes the
image data to be verified and the Flash EEPROM firmware area to be updated. During
the reprogramming, the Write Protect and Drive Activity LEDS on the drive's front
panel will blink.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-127
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
__________________________Note _____________________________
During the actual reprogramming of the FLASH memory chips, if any type of
powerfail occurs, or if the reprogramming fails part way through, the
subsystem will be unusable, and the controller board will need to be replaced.
____________________________________________________________
When the Save operation is successfully completed, the firmware restarts itself, causing
POST to be rerun, and two Unit Attention conditions are generated: power-up reset, and
operating code has changed.
8-128 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.4.27 WRITE FILEMARKS (10h)
Bit
7
6
5
0
1
Byte
2
4
3
2
1
0
WSmk
Immed
Operation Code (10h)
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
(MSB)
3
Number of Filemarks
4
5
(LSB)
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-82 WRITE FILEMARKS CDB
WRITE FILEMARKS causes the specified number of Filemarks to be written
beginning at the current logical position on tape. If the Immed bit is not set, any data or
Filemarks in the write cache buffer are written to tape. Upon a Bus Reset or when a Bus
Reset message is received, the cached blocks or filemarks are flushed to the tape.
WSmk
If this bit is set, the tape drive writes a save-set mark to tape instead of a Filemark.
Since Setmarks are not supported by the DLT2000, this field must be zero.
Immed
If this bit is set, the drive returns status as soon as the command descriptor block has
been validated, unless the filemark count is zero, or greater than 1 (since both cause the
write buffer to be flushed to media). An Immed bit of zero indicates the status will not
be returned until the operation is complete.
Number of Filemarks
This is the number of consecutive marks to be written to tape. A value of zero is not
considered an error and GOOD status is returned.
This command may be used to force the drive to write any buffered write data to the
tape. If the drive is in Buffered mode, and WRITE FILEMARKS is received, the
requested Filemarks are appended to the data, and the write buffer is flushed to tape. A
zero value in the Number of Filemarks field indicates that no Filemarks are to be
written to the tape, but still flushes any write data to tape.
If EOT is detected while writing Filemarks, the drive finishes writing any buffered data
and terminates with CHECK CONDITION status. Within the Sense data, the EOM bit
is set, the Sense Key field is set to NO SENSE and the Additional Sense Code and
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-129
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Additional Sense Code Qualifier fields are set to EOM/P detected. The drive will
attempt to complete any subsequent WRITE FILEMARKS, returning a CHECK
CONDITION status in each case. If the drive encounters the physical EOM when
attempting a WRITE FILEMARKS, CHECK CONDITION status is returned.
8-130 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.5 Supported SCSI-2 Medium Changer Device Commands
On the Medium Changer LUN, only commands defined for this device type are
allowed. The following commands are implemented:
Table 8-11 SCSI-2 Medium Changer Commands
Opcode
Command
Section
07*
INITIALIZE ELEMENT STATUS
12
INQUIRY
15+
MODE SELECT
1A+
MODE SENSE
A5*
MOVE MEDIUM
3C
READ BUFFER
B8*
READ ELEMENT STATUS
1C
RECEIVE DIAG RESULTS
17
RELEASE
03
REQUEST SENSE
16
RESERVE
1D
SEND DIAGNOSTIC
00
TEST UNIT READY
3B
WRITE BUFFER
* = Medium Changer specific commands
8.5.1
8.4.4
8.5.3
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.4.14
8.5.2
8.4.16
8.4.17
8.4.18
8.4.19
8.4.21
8.4.23
8.4.26
+ = Commands with significant Medium Changer specific content
The Inquiry, Send Diagnostic, Receive Diagnostic Results, Read/Write Buffer, and
Request Sense commands are documented in the preceding sections.
The rest of this chapter covers Medium Changer unique commands.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-131
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.5.1 INITIALIZE ELEMENT STATUS (07h)
Bit
7
6
0
1
Byte
5
4
3
1
0
Flag
Link
Operation Code (07h)
Logical Unit Number
Reserved
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
2
Unused
Reserved
Figure 8-83 Initialize Element Status CDB
This command causes the medium changer to initialize the element status.
8-132 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.5.2 READ ELEMENT STATUS (B8h)
7
0
6
Bit
4
5
3
2
1
1
Operation Code (B8h)
Logical Unit Number VolTag
Element type Code
2
(MSB)
Starting Element Address
(LSB)
3
4
Byte
0
(MSB)
Number of Elements
(LSB)
5
6
7
Reserved
(MSB)
8
Allocation Length
(LSB)
9
10
Reserved
11
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-84 READ ELEMENT STATUS CDB
Code
0h
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h−Fh
Description
All element types reported (valid in CDB only)
Medium Transport Element
Storage Element (magazine slot)
Import Export Element (not supported)
Data Transfer Element (tape drive)
reserved
Figure 8-85 Element Type Code Definitions
The format of Element Status data is defined in the SCSI-2 specification. The following
sections show the information returned for the medium changer. The Element Status
data is made up of a header, and one or more Status Pages (for each element type). The
Status Pages are made up of a header and one or more element descriptors (one for each
element address). The data shown assumes the CDB was specified in such a way that all
descriptors for a given element type would be returned.
The Primary and Alternate Volume Tag functions are not supported, so the flags
indicating these functions in the Element Status Pages (below) are always set to zero.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-133
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.5.2.1 Element Status Data Header
7
0
6
(MSB)
5
Bit
4
3
2
Byte
(LSB)
(MSB)
Number of Elements Reported
(LSB)
3
4
5
6
0
First Element Address Reported
1
2
1
Reserved
(MSB)
Byte Count of Report Available
(LSB)
7
Figure 8-86 Element Status Data Header
8-134 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.5.2.2 Medium Transport Element Status Page
Bit
7
0
1
PVolTag
2
(MSB)
4
3
2
1
AVolTag
0
Reserved
Transport Element Descriptor Length
4
5
5
Element Type Code (1h = Medium Transport)
3
Byte
6
(LSB)
Reserved
(MSB)
6
Byte Count of Descriptor Data Available
7
(LSB)
Descriptor
8
(MSB)
9
Transport Element Address (01h)
10
Byte
Reserved
(LSB)
Except Rsv’d
11
Reserved
12
Additional Sense Code
13
Additional Sense Code Qualifier
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
16
Reserved
17
18
19
SValid
Invert
Full
Reserved
(MSB)
Source Element Address
20
Reserved
21
Reserved
22
Reserved
23
Reserved
(LSB)
Figure 8-87 Medium Transport Element Status Page
There is only one Medium Transport element, which can be addressed explicitly as
element address 1, or implicitly as address 0.
PvolTag and AVolTag are always zero.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-135
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.5.2.3 Storage Element Status Page
Bit
7
0
1
PVolTag
2
(MSB)
4
3
2
1
AVolTag
0
Reserved
Storage Element Descriptor Length
4
5
5
Element Type Code (2h = Medium Transport)
3
Byte
6
(LSB)
Reserved
(MSB)
6
Byte Count of Descriptor Data Available
7
(LSB)
Descriptor
8
(MSB)
9
First Storage Element Address Reported
10
Byte
Reserved
Access
Except Rsv’d
11
Reserved
12
Additional Sense Code
13
Additional Sense Code Qualifier
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
16
Reserved
17
18
19
SValid
Invert
Full
Reserved
(MSB)
Source Element Address
20
Reserved
21
Reserved
22
Reserved
23
Reserved
24
Density Code of Media (= 0 if empty) (VU)
25
26 to n
(LSB)
(LSB)
Unused (VU)
Descriptors for other Storage Elements
Figure 8-88 Storage Element Status Page
There are up to five/seven Storage Elements, corresponding to the number slots in a
magazine for DLT2500/DLT2700.
PvolTag and AVolTag are always zero.
Access is always 1, and Full is set to 1 if a media cartridge is in the corresponding
magazine slot. Exception will be set to 1 if the magazine slot indicates a cartridge has
been removed, but is not in the Medium Transport or Data Transfer elements.
8-136 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
The Source Element Address will always be set to this element's address.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-137
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.5.2.4 Data Transfer Element Status Page
Bit
7
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
PVolTag
2
(MSB)
AVolTag
Reserved
Data Transfer Element Descriptor
3
Byte
0
Element Type Code (4h = Medium Transport)
(LSB)
4
Reserved
5
(MSB)
6
Byte Count of Descriptor Data Available
7
(LSB)
Descriptor
8
(MSB)
Data Transfer Element Address (10h)
9
(LSB)
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
12
Additional Sense Code
13
14
Byte
Access
Rsvd
IDValid
Full
LUValid
Rsvd
Logical Unit Number
SCSI Bus Address (same as tape drive’s)
16
18
Rsvd
Additional Sense Code Qualifier
NotBus
15
17
Excep
t
Reserved
SValid
Invert
(MSB)
Reserved
Source Element Address
19
(LSB)
20
Reserved
21
Reserved
22
Reserved
23
Reserved
24
Density Code of Media (= 0 if empty) (VU)
25
Unused (VU)
Figure 8-89 Data Transfer Element Status Page
PvolTag and AVolTag are always zero.
Access is always set, and Full is set if a cartridge is in the tape drive.
IDValid and LUValid are always set, drive LUN is 0. The SCSI Bus Address field is
the same as the tape drive's controller.
SValid is set if there is a cartridge in the drive, and Source Element Address will
indicate which magazine slot it came from.
8-138 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.5.3 MODE SENSE/SELECT (1Ah/15h)
All three pages that are specific to Medium Changers are supported.
8.5.3.1 Device Capabilities Page (1Fh)
The drive shall support the Device Capabilities Page which has the following format:
7
0
Byte
6
PS
5
3
0
1
2
Bit
4
2
1
0
Page Code (1Fh)
Additional Page Length (0Eh)
Reserved
3
StorDT StorI/E
StorST StorMT
Reserved
4
Reserved
MT
DT
5
Reserved
ST
DT
ST
I/E
ST
ST
ST
MT
6
Reserved
IE
DT
IE
I/E
IE
ST
IE
MT
7
Reserved
DT
DT
8
Reserved
9
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
MT
DT
I/E
I/E
MT
DT
ST
ST
MT
DT
MT
MT
12
Reserved
MT<>DT
MT<>I/E
MT<>ST MT<>MT
13
Reserved
ST<>DT
ST<>I/E
ST<>ST
ST<>MT
14
Reserved
IE<>DT
IE<>I/E
IE<> T
IE<>MT
15
Reserved
DT<>DT
DT<>I/E
DT<>ST
DT<>MT
Figure 8-90 Device Capabilities Page Format
Bit Field Values
• Elements that can store media: StorDT, StorST
•
Valid Source->Destination pairs: ST->DT, DT->ST
All the "MT->XX" and the "XX->MT" entries are zero, since the loader will not accept
a Medium Transport element address as a source or destination.
All the "IE->XX" and the "XX->IE" entries are zero since there is no Import/Export
element.
Bytes 12 through 15 are all zero as the medium changer does not support the exchange
medium command.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-139
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
The medium changer does not support "ST->ST" or "DT->DT".
8-140 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.5.3.2 Element Address Assignment Page (1Dh)
The drive shall support the Element Address Assignment Page which has the following
format:
7
0
6
PS
1
5
0
Bit
4
3
2
1
Page Code (1Dh)
Length (12h)
(MSB)
2
1st Medium Transport Element Address (01h)
(LSB)
3
4
(MSB)
Number of Medium Transport Elements (1)
(MSB)
1st Storage Element Address (100h)
(LSB)
5
6
(LSB)
7
8
(MSB)
Number of Storage Elements
(MSB)
1st Import/Export Elements (0)
(LSB)
9
Byte
0
10
(LSB)
11
12
(MSB)
Number of Import/Export Elements
(MSB)
1st Data Transfer Element Address (10)h
(LSB)
13
14
(LSB)
15
16
(MSB)
Number of Data Transfer Elements (01)
(LSB)
17
18
Reserved
19
Reserved
Figure 8-91 Element Address Assignment Page Format
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-141
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
Medium Changer Element Address assignment is as follows:
Table 8-12 Medium Changer Element Addresses
Address
Comments
0
1
2-0Fh
10h
11h-0FFh
100h
101h
102h
103h
104h
105h
106h
107h-0FFFFh
Default Medium Transport Element
Medium Transport Element
Reserved
Data Transfer Element (tape drive)
Reserved
Medium Storage Element (Magazine slot 0)
Medium Storage Element (Magazine slot 1)
Medium Storage Element (Magazine slot 2)
Medium Storage Element (Magazine slot 3)
Medium Storage Element (Magazine slot 4)
Medium Storage Element (Magazine slot 5)
Medium Storage Element (Magazine slot 6)
Reserved
8-142 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.5.3.3 Transport Geometry Parameters Page (1Eh)
The drive shall support the Transport Geometry Page which has the following format:
7
0
Byte
1
2
3
6
PS
5
0
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
Page Code (1Eh)
Additional Page Length (02h)
Reserved
Rotate
Member Number in Transport Element Set (0)
Figure 8-92 Transport Geometry Page Format
Rotation of media is not appropriate for this type of Loader, so the Rotate bit is zero.
There is only one Medium Transport Element, so there is only one set, with one
member.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-143
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
8.5.4 MOVE MEDIUM (A5h)
7
6
0
Bit
4
5
3
2
1
Operation Code (A5h)
1
Logical Unit Number
2
(MSB)
Reserved
Transport element Address
(LSB)
3
Byte
4
(MSB)
Source Address
(LSB)
5
6
(MSB)
Destination Address
(LSB)
7
8
Reserved
9
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
0
Unused
Reserved
Flag
Link
Figure 8-93 MOVE MEDIUM CDB
The Move Medium command is used to move cartridges from the tape drive to the
magazine slot it came from, or from any magazine slot to the tape drive.
The Transport Element Address field must be zero or one.
8-144 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
DLT2000 SCSI Interface
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem 8-145
Appendix A
Technical Specifications
A.1 In This Appendix
Appendix A contains specifications for the DLT2000 tape drive and the
DLT2500/DLT2700 mini-library including:
Topic
Section
Physical Description
Performance Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Vibration and Shock Specifications
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Susceptibility
Regulatory Requirements
Drive Reliability Factors
CompacTape Recording Media Specifications
A.2
A.3
A.4
A.5
A.6
A.7
A.8
A.9
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem A-1
Technical Specifications
A.2 Physical Description
Table A-1 lists the key physical and functional specifications of the DLT2000 tape
drive.
Table A-1 DLT2000 Physical Specifications
Description
Height
Width
Length
Weight
Shipping Weight
Environmental
temperature
Operating
Nonoperating
Humidity
Operating
Nonoperating
Certifications
EMI
Safety
Drive 5 1/4 inch FH (modified
depth)
82.5 mm (3.25 in) without bezel
86.3 mm (3.4 in) with bezel
144.8 mm (5.7 in) behind bezel
148.3 mm (5.84 in) with bezel
228.6 mm (9.0 in) measured from
back of front bezel
243.8 mm (9.6 in) including the
bezel
2.9 kg (6 lb, 7 oz)
3.86 kg (8 lb, 8 oz) depending on
configuration
Table Top
7.1 kg (15 b, 9.0 oz)
10.85 kg (23 lb) depending on
configuration
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
-40°C to 66°C (-40°F to 150.8°F)
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
-40°C to 66°C (-40°F to 150.8°F)
20% to 80% noncondensing
10% to 95%
20% to 80% noncondensing
10% to 95%
Meets VCCi Class 1, CISPR 22
Class A, FCC Class A devices
(Class B Verified)
Meets CEmark Class B, VCCi
Class 2, CISPR 22 Class B, FCC
Class B,
FCC ID: (HOM-DLTXX)
Meets UL, CSA, TUV, "BG"
MARK and IEC standards
146.6 mm (5.77 in)
235 mm (9.25 in)
332 mm (13.08 in)
Meets UL, CSA, TUV, "BG"
MARK and IEC standards
A-2 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Technical Specifications
Table A-1 DLT2000 Physical Specifications (cont'd)
Description
Electrical rating,
(Auto ranging)
Power
Requirements
Drive 5 1/4 inch FH (modified
depth)
D.C. Supply
Table Top
100 to 240 Vac
D.C.
22 W steady state/33 W,
maximum
A.C.
50W, maximum
2.5 A steady state/3.0 A maximum
0.8 A steady state/3.0 A
maximum
N/A
N/A
Communication
interface
SCSI-2 bus 8 bits (single-ended or
differential) with a separate SCSI
LUN ID for the mini-library and
tape drive.
SCSI-2 bus 8 bits (single-ended or
differential) with a separate SCSI
LUN ID for the mini-library and
tape drive.
MTBF
80,000 hours
80,000 hours
Power
Consumption
+5 Volt Bus
+12 Volt Bus
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem A-3
Technical Specifications
A.2.1 Identifying the Correct AC Power Cord
________________________ Warning ______________________
Do not attempt to modify or use an external 100 - 115 VAC power cord
for 220 - 240 VAC input power. Modifying the power cord can cause
personal injury and severe equipment damage.
_______________________________________________________
An AC power cord was supplied with your unit. Carefully inspect it and make sure that
it is the correct one for your country or region based on the criteria listed below. If you
feel the supplied AC power cord is not correct, contact your authorized Quantum
service representative.
The AC power cord used with this equipment must meet the following criteria:
1.
UL and CSA Certified cordage rated for use at 250 VAC with a current rating that
is at least 125% of the current rating of the product. In Europe, the cordage must
have the <HAR> mark.
2.
The AC plug must be terminated in a grounding-type male plug designed for use in
your country. It must also have marks showing certification by an agency
acceptable in the country.
3.
The connector at the product end must be an IEC type CEE-22 female connector.
4.
The cord must be no longer than 14.5 feet (4.5 meters).
__________________________ Note ________________________
The power cord should be a minimum of 18/3 AWG, 60ºC, Type SJT
or SVT.
_______________________________________________________
A-4 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Technical Specifications
Figure A-1 shows the different AC power cord plug configurations for 115V and
220V/240V usage.
Figure A-1 Power Cords
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem A-5
Technical Specifications
Table A-2 lists the key functional specifications of the DLT2000 tape drive.
Table A-2 DLT2000 Functional Specifications
Functions
Specifications
CompacTape III:
Capacity/formatted native
Capacity/formatted
compressed 2:11
10.0 GB (standard 1167 ft. tape) user data
20.0 GB (standard 1167 ft. tape) user data
Interface
8 bit SCSI-2, single ended or differential
Drive Type
DLT, streaming, 10.0/20.0 GB-16 bit, single ended or
differential
Recording Type
2-7 RLL code DLT2000 format, MFM with DLT260 and
DLT600 formats
Form Factor
5-¼ inch, F.H. modified depth
Transfer Rate, Raw Native
Transfer Rate, User Native
Uncompressed
Transfer Rate, User
Compressed1
1.7 MBytes/second2
1.25 MBytes/second
Error Rate (Recoverable)
1 10 E7 Read recoverable error rate
1 10 E6 Write recoverable error rate
2 10 E7 Read interchange recoverable error rate
1 10 E17 Read unrecoverable error rate
Error Rate (unrecoverable)
More than 2.5 MB/second maximum write
More than 3.0 MB/second maximum read
Tracks
128; 64 pairs
Linear Bit Density
62,500 bpi/per track
1 Nominal compression ratio. Actual compression is data dependent.
2 Included format data, user data, post amble, and so forth for extended tape.
A-6 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Technical Specifications
Table A-3 lists the key physical specifications for the DLT2500 mini-library.
Table A-3 DLT2500 Mini-Library Physical Specifications
Description
Height
Width
Length
Weight
Rack Mount
295 mm (11.6 in)
414 mm (16.3 in)
259 mm (10.2 in)
12 kg (27 lb)
Table Top
300 mm (11.8 in)
414 mm (16.3 in)
267 mm (10.5 in)
15.9 kg (35 lb)
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
-40°C to 66°C (-40°F to 150.8°F)
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
-40°C to 66°C (-40°F to 150.8°F)
20% to 80% noncondensing
10% to 95%
20% to 80% noncondensing
10% to 95%
Meets CEmark Class A, VCCi
Class 1, CISPR 22 Class A, FCC
Class A devices
Meets UL, CSA, TUV, "BG"
MARK and IEC standards
Meets CEmark Class A, VCCi
Class 1, CISPR 22 Class A, FCC
Class A devices
Meets UL, CSA, TUV, "BG"
MARK and IEC standards
Maximum number
of cartridges
5
5
Electrical rating
(Auto ranging)
AC power
requirements
100 to 240 V ac
100 to 240 V ac,
100 W, maximum
100W, maximum
Communication
interface
SCSI-2 bus 8 bits (single-ended or
differential) with a separate SCSI
LUN ID for the mini-library and
tape drive.
SCSI-2 bus 8 bits (single-ended or
differential) with a separate SCSI
LUN ID for the mini-library and
tape drive.
Cycle time
20 s, maximum
20 s, maximum
Environmental
temperature
Operating
Nonoperating
Humidity
Operating
Nonoperating
Certifications
EMI
Safety
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem A-7
Technical Specifications
Table A-4 lists the key physical specifications for the DLT2700 mini-library.
Table A-4 DLT2700 Mini-Library Physical Specifications
Description
Height
Width
Length
Weight
Rack Mount
26.47 cm (10.42 in)
22.20 cm (8.74 in)
68.5 cm (27.0 in)
24.95 kg (55 lb)
Table Top
27.25 cm (10.73 in)
22.54 cm (8.875 in)
68.5 cm (27.0 in)
29.54 kg (65 lb)
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
-40°C to 66°C (-40°F to 150.8°F)
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
-40°C to 66°C (-40°F to 150.8°F)
20% to 80% noncondensing
10% to 95%
20% to 80% noncondensing
10% to 95%
Meets CEmark Class A, VCCi
Class 1, CISPR 22 Class A, FCC
Class A devices
Meets UL, CSA, TUV, "BG"
MARK and IEC standards
Meets CEmark Class A, VCCi
Class 1, CISPR 22 Class A, FCC
Class A devices
Meets UL, CSA, TUV, "BG"
MARK and IEC standards
Maximum number
of cartridges
7
7
Electrical rating
AC power
requirements
100 to 120/220 to 240 V ac, 2/1 A
Voltage Selection Switch
82 W, typical
113 W, maximum
100 to 120/220 to 240 V ac, 2/1 A
Voltage Selection Switch
82 W, typical
113 W, maximum
Communication
interface
SCSI-2 bus 8 bits (single-ended or
differential)
SCSI-2 bus 8 bits (single-ended or
differential)
Cycle time
50 s, maximum
50 s, maximum
Environmental
temperature
Operating
Nonoperating
Humidity
Operating
Nonoperating
Certifications
EMI
Safety
A-8 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Technical Specifications
Figure A-2 shows the mounting holes and dimensions in a top view of the DLT2000
drive.
5.700
(144.78)
5.500
(139.70)
5.84
(148.3)
.100
(2.54)
3.125
(79.38)
1.875
(47.63)
ZKO-1217-11-DG
Figure A-2 Mounting Hole Dimensions (Top View)
Tape drive width and height are standard 5-1/4 inch disk drive form factor
measurements. Both dimensions hold tolerances of ± 0.020 inches. Depth dimensions
have tolerances of +00, -0.040 in.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem A-9
Technical Specifications
Figure A-3 shows the mounting holes and dimensions in a side view of the DLT2000
drive.
9.600
(243.84)
9.000
(228.60)
8X 6-32UNC-2B
.25
(6.4) FULL THREAD
3.250
(82.55)
3.40
(86.4)
.820
(20.83)
3.125
(79.38)
1.875
(47.63)
ZKO-1217-12-DG
Figure A-3 Mounting Hole Dimensions (Side View)
A-10 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Technical Specifications
A.3 Performance Specifications
Section A.3 describes performance specifications including:
Topic
Section
Nominal Tape Tension
DLT2000 Timing Characteristics
DLT2700 Media Loader Timing
Characteristics
A.3.1
A.3.2
A.3.4
A.3.1 Nominal Tape Tension
Nominal tape tension is:
3.0 ± 1 oz when stationary
4.7 ± 1 oz at operating speed
A.3.2 DLT2000 Timing Characteristics
Table A-5 lists timing characteristics of the DLT2000 tape drive:
Table A-5 DLT2000 Timing Characteristics
Read/Write Tape speed
RewindTape speed
Linear Search Tape speed
Average rewind time
Maximum rewind time
Average access time (from BOT)
Maximum access time (from BOT)
Load to BOT—previously written
Unload from BOT
110 in/sec
150 in/sec search
150 in/sec search
60 sec
120 sec
45 sec
90 sec
48 sec; if using a blank tape, time
is slightly longer.
17 sec
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem A-11
Technical Specifications
A.3.3 DLT2500xt Media Loader Timing Characteristics
Table A-6 lists timing characteristics of the DLT2500xt media loader.
Table A-6 DLT2500xt Media Loader Timing Characteristics
Nominal magazine scan
Move cartridge slot to drive
Move cartridge drive to slot
Error recovery
Load media on to drive & ready for
I/O processing
Unload media from drive to
cartridge (from BOT)
12.0 sec
11.4 sec
17.1 sec
51.0 sec
48.0 sec
17.0 sec
A.3.4 DLT2700 Media Loader Timing Characteristics
Table A-7 lists timing characteristics of the DLT2700 media loader.
Table A-7 DLT2700 Media Loader Timing Characteristics
Nominal magazine scan
Move cartridge slot to drive
Move cartridge drive to slot
Error recovery
Load media on to drive & ready for
I/O processing
Unload media from drive to
cartridge (from BOT)
12.0 sec
20-30 sec
37.5 sec
30.0 sec
48.0 sec
17.0 sec
A.4 Environmental Specifications
Section A.4 describes environmental specifications including:
Topic
Temperature and Humidity
Altitude
Section
A.4.1
A.4.2
A-12 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Technical Specifications
The tape drive conforms to a modified Class B environment that includes general
offices and workspaces with:
• Conditioned and marginally-conditioned areas with central or
remote air-conditioning
• Complete temperature and humidity controls
• Moderate control tolerances
• Systems capable of maintaining comfort levels (for example, typical
offices and general work areas)
• Marginal heating or cooling apparatus
• No humidity conditioning
• Uncontrolled tolerances
• Systems inadequate to maintain constant comfort levels (for
example, marginal offices and work spaces)
A.4.1 Temperature and Humidity
Table A-8 lists the operating temperature and humidity ranges.
Table A-8 Operating Ranges
Temperature Range
Temperature Gradient
Temperature Shock
Relative Humidity
Humidity Gradient
Table A-9 lists the power-on ranges.
10 to 40°C
11°C/h (across the range)
10°C (over two min)
20 to 80% noncondensing
10%/h
Table A-9 Power-on Ranges—No Tape Loaded (Unpacked - 72 hours)
Dry bulb temperature
Temperature gradient
Temperature shock
Relative humidity
Humidity gradient
10 to 40°C
15°C/h (across the range)
15°C (over two min)
10 to 90%
10%/h
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem A-13
Technical Specifications
Table A-10 lists the storage ranges.
Table A-10 Storage Ranges (Unpacked or Packed)
Dry bulb temperature
-40 to 66°C
Temperature gradient
20°C/h with 5° margin (across the range)
Temperature shock
15°C with 5° margin (over two min)
Relative humidity
10 to 95% noncondensing
Humidity gradient
10%/h
Table A-11 lists the shipment ranges:
Table A-11 Shipment Ranges
Dry bulb temperature
Temperature gradient
Temperature shock
Relative humidity
Humidity gradient
-40 to 66°C
25°C/h with 5° margin (across the range)
15°C with 5° margin (over two min)
10 to 95% noncondensing
10%/h
A.4.2 Altitude
The tape drive operates in normal pressures from 500 to 30,000 feet.
A-14 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Technical Specifications
A.5 Vibration and Shock Specifications
Section A.5 describes environmental specifications:
Topic
Section
Operating Shock and Vibration
Nonoperating Shock and
Vibration
A.5.1
A.5.2
A.5.1 Operating Shock and Vibration
Table A-12 lists operating vibration specifications and Table A-13 lists operating
shock specifications.
Table A-12 Operating Vibration Specifications
Vibration type
Frequency range
Acceleration level
Sine
5−500-5 Hz
0.25 g
0.010" DA
Application
X, Y, and Z axes Sweep rate; 1 octave per minute
Vibration type
Frequency range
Acceleration level
Overstress
Sine
5−500-5 Hz
0.50 g
0.010" DA
Application
Vertical axis
(top/bottom)
Sweep
Upward and downward sweep
Between 5 and 22 Hz (crossover)
Between 22 and 500 Hz
Sweep
Upward and downward sweep
Between 5 and 26.1 Hz (crossover)
Between 26.1 and 500 Hz
Sweep rate; 1 octave per minute
Table A-13 Operating Shock Specifications
Pulse shape
Peak acceleration
Duration
Application
1/2 sine pulse
10 G
10 ms
X, Y, and Z axes, once in each axis
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem A-15
Technical Specifications
A.5.2 Nonoperating Shock and Vibration
Table A-14 lists nonoperating shock (bench handling) specifications for the product
without its shipping packaging.
Table A-14 Nonoperating Shock "Overstress" (Bench Handling - Unpackaged) Specifications
Test Type
Description
Application
Bench handling; pivot drop
Pivot edge to a height of 4 in above table and release
Four shocks total; once each edge
Tables A-15, A-16, A-17 A-18 and A-19 list nonoperating vibration and nonoperating
shock specifications for the product in its shipping packaging.
Table A-15 Nonoperating (Packaged) Vibration Specifications
Vibration type
Frequency range
Random vibration
5 to 300 Hz, vertical (z); 5 to 200 Hz horizontal (x and y)
Vibration levels
1.19 GRMS overall in vertical (z) axis
0.698 GRMS overall in horizontal (x and y) axes
PSD envelope (vert)
5 to 10 Hz
10 to 50 Hz
50 to 300 Hz
0.003 g^2/Hz @ 5, to 0.020 @ 10
Flat @ 0.020 g^2/Hz
0.020 g^2/Hz @ 50 w/ 8 dB/oct rolloff
PSD envelope (horiz)
5 to 10 Hz
10 to 50 Hz
50 to 200 Hz
0.0011 g^2/Hz @ 5, to 0.007 @ 10
Flat @ 0.007 g^2/Hz
0.007 g^2/Hz @ 50 w/ 8 dB/oct rolloff
Application
X, Y, and Z axes
One hour, each axis (3 hours total)
A-16 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Technical Specifications
Table A-16 Nonoperating (Packaged) Repetitive Shock Specifications
Excitation type
Shock (bounce)
cycles
Application
Synchronous vertical motion; 1 in excursion
14,200 total
Half cycles each in x and y orientations; 1/2 7100
cycles in the x orientation, 1\2 7100 cycles in the y
orientation
Table A-17 Nonoperating (Packaged) Shock (Drop) Specifications
Test type
Drop height
Application
Drop shock
30 in - items < 20.9 lbs
24 in - 21 < items < 40.9 lbs
18 in - 41 < items < 60.9 lbs
12 in - 61 < items < 100 lbs
10 drops total; 1 each side, 3 edges, 1 corner
Table A-18 Nonoperating (Unpackaged) Vibration Specifications
(Unpackage) Vibration Specifications
Nonoperating
Vibration type
Frequency range
Acceleration level
Application
Sine
5−500-5 Hz
1g
X, Y, and Z
axes
Sweep
Upward and downward sweep
10-500-10 Hz
Sweep rate; 1/2 octave per minute
Vibration type
Frequency range
Acceleration level
PSD envelope
Application
Random
10−500 Hz
2g
Sweep
Upward and downward sweep
X, Y, and Z
axes
0.008 g^2/Hz.
Sweep rate: 60 min/axis
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem A-17
Technical Specifications
Table A-19 Nonoperating (Unpackaged) Shock Specifications Nonoperating (Unpackaged)
Pulse shape
Peak acceleration
Duration
Application
Square wave
40 G
180 in/sec
X, Y, and Z axes, twice in each
axis
Pulse shape
Peak acceleration
Duration
Application
1/2 sine pulse
140 G
2 ms
X, Y, and Z axes, twice in each
axis
A-18 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Technical Specifications
A.6 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Susceptibility
Section A. describes electromagnetic interference specifications including:
Topic
Section
Electromagnetic Emissions
Conducted Emissions
Radiated Emissions
Magnetic Radiated Susceptibility
Radiated Susceptibility
Conducted Susceptibility
ESD Failure Level Limits
Acoustic Noise Emissions
A.6.1
A.6.2
A.6.3
A.6.4
A.6.5
A.6.6
A.6.7
A.6.8
A.6.1 Electromagnetic Emissions
Electromagnetic emissions include:
CSA 108.8
EEC Directive 89/336
EN55022 and National standards are based on:
BS6527
NEN55022
VDE 0871 Class A
CE Mark
Cispr22 Class A
(UK)
(Netherlands)
(Germany)
• FCC Rules Part 15B
• Class A certified
A.6.2 Conducted Emissions
Limits for Class B equipment are in the frequency range from 0.15 to 30 MHz. The
limit decreases linearly with the logarithm of the frequency in the range from 0.15 to
0.50 Mhz.
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem A-19
Technical Specifications
Table A-20 list the conducted emission limits.
Table A-20 Conducted Emissions
Frequency Range (MHz)
Limits dB
Quasi-peak
Average
0.15 to 0.050
66 to 56*
56 to 46
0.50 to 5
56
46
5 to 30
60
50
*The limit decreases with the logarithm of the frequency.
A.6.3 Radiated Emissions
Limits of radiated interference field strength, in the frequency range from 30 MHz to 30
GHz at a test distance of 3 and 10 meters, for Class B equipment are listed in table A21.
Table A-21 Radiated Emissions, 30 Mhz to 30 Ghz
Frequency range (MHz)
30 to 230
230 to 1000
Above 1000
Quasi-peak limit dB (µV/m)
@ 10 m
30
37
N/A
@3m
40
46
54
A.6.4 Magnetic Radiated Susceptibility
Table A-22 lists the magnetic radiated susceptibility limits.
Table A-22 Low Frequency, Magnetic Fields, 10 to 3000 kHz
100 dB (pt) @ 10 kHz declining to No errors, no screen distortion
80 dB (pt) @ 1 MHz
A-20 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Technical Specifications
A.6.5 Radiated Susceptibility
Table A-23 lists the radiated susceptibility limits:
Table A-23 High Frequency, Electric Fields, 1 to 1000 Mhz
3 V/m (rms) 80% modulated 1 kHz
No errors, no screen distortion
S/W recoverable errors
No hardware failure
A.6.6 Conducted Susceptibility
The transient voltage is the actual peak voltage above the normal ac voltage from the
power source.
Table A-24 lists the voltage limits for power and data cables:
Table A-24 Fast Transient (Bursts) for Power and Data Cables
2 kV
S/W recoverable errors
No hardware failures
Table A-25 lists power cable voltage limits:
Table A-25 High Energy Transient Voltage for Power Cables
1.2 kV
2.5 kV
No errors
S/W recoverable errors
No hardware failure
_____________________________ Note_________________________
Maximum energy in a single pulse from the transient generator must be
limited to 2.5 W.
___________________________________________________________
Table A-26 lists the low-level conducted interference voltage limits:
Table A-26 Low-level Conducted Interference
3 V(rms) 80% modulated 1 kHz No errors
S/W recoverable errors
No hardware failure
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem A-21
Technical Specifications
A.6.7 ESD Failure Level Limits
Table A-27 lists the ESD failure level limits for normal operator access areas.
Table A-27 ESD Failure Level Limits
Failure Type
Equipment
Failure Level
Allowable Errors
Hard
Office
1 to 12 kV
Hardware
Office
Up to 15 kV
No operator intervention
(soft recoverable allowed)
No component damage
(soft/hard errors allowed)
A.6.8 Acoustic Noise Emissions
The following lists the acoustic noise emission levels:
Table A-28 Acoustic Noise Emissions, Nominal
Noise Power Emission Level (LNPEc)
Mode
Idle
Streaming
DLT2000
DLT2000
DLT2700
Drive
Tabletop
Loader
N/A
N/A
4.3 bels
4.9 bels
5.1 bels
5.2 bels
Sound Pressure Level (LPAc)
Mode
DLT2000
Idle
Streaming
Drive
DLT2000
Tabletop
DLT2700
Loader
N/A
N/A
35.0 dB
40.0 dB
34.0 dB
35.0 dB
Table A-28 Acoustic Noise Declaration for German Noise Declaration Law Cont’d
Schallemissionswerte - Werteangaben nach ISO 9296 und ISO 7779/DIN EN27779:
Schalleistungspegel
Schalldruckpegel
LwAd, B
LpAm, dBA
(Zuschauerpositionen)
Gerät
Leerlauf
Betrieb
Leerlauf
Betrieb
TH3xx
TH3Bx
TH3Ex
TH3Fx
5,2
5,5
5,5
5,5
5,3
5,6
5,6
39
33
33
45
40
33
33
A-22 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Technical Specifications
Table A-28 Acoustic Noise Declaration for German Noise Declaration Law (Cont’d)
Generic Product Option
Numbers
TH3xx
TH3Bx
TH3Ex
TH3Fx
Description
DLT2000 drive
DLT2000 table top drive
DLT2700 cartridge rackmount loader
DLT2700 cartridge table top loader
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem A-23
Technical Specifications
A.7 Regulatory Requirements
Regulatory requirements include:
• Safety
• Electromagnetic emissions
A.7.1 Safety Requirements
Safety requirements include:
• UL1950 - Information Technology Including Electrical Business
Equipment
• CSA C22.2 #220 - Information Technology Including Electrical
Business Equipment
• TUV EN60950 - Information Technology Including Electrical
Business Equipment
A.7.2 Electromagnetic Emission Requirements
Electromagnetic emission requirements include:
FCC, Part 15, Class A
EN55022/A
EN55082/A
CISPR22/A
VCCi/ Class 1 and 2
CEmark Class A
A-24 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Technical Specifications
A.8 Drive Reliability Factors
Table A-29 lists the reliability factors:
Table A-29 Reliability Factors
Design life
Seven years
Design life statistics provide the
point at which statistical failure
rate begins to rise.
Head life
10,000 tape motion hours
Continuous operation, under
severe stress envelope with
CompacTape media.
MTBF
80,000 hours
Quantum Corporation does not
warrant that predicted MTBF is
representative of any particular
unit installed for customer use.
Actual figures vary from unit to
unit.
Tape life
500,000 passes
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem A-25
Technical Specifications
A.9 CompacTape Recording Media Specifications
Table A-30 lists the media characteristics:
Table A-30 CompacTape Recording Media Specifications
CompacTape III
Description
Quantity
Width
Length
Cartridge Dimensions
Shelf Life
0.5 in metal particle
1200 ft
4.1 in x 4.1 in x 1.0 in
30 years min. @ 20°C & 40% RH (noncondensing)
500,000 passes
Usage
A-26 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Appendix B
Definition of Vendor Unique Sense Data
Information
B.1 In This Appendix
Appendix B lists the internal status codes with their descriptions.
B.2 Internal Status Code
The internal status code is located at byte offset 18 of the request sense data and may be
available after certain types of failures.
_________________________ Note _____________________________
This byte has two formats: a byte code, and a bit flags format. The bit flags
format is used when there is no internal status code to report, and can be
distinguished by bit 7 being set.
___________________________________________________________
Table B-1 Internal Status Code
Dec
Hex
Description
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
No meaning
Reed-Solomon Error Correction Code recovery
Read or write block retry (soft retry)
Reposition command aborted
Controller has stopped reading
No control or data buffers available
Target delivered in read ahead
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem B-1
Definition of Vendor Unique Sense Data Information
Table B-1 Internal Status Code (cont’d)
Dec
Hex
Description
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
7
8
9
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Logical EOT encountered, 2 file marks
Command connection dropped
Cleared from queue
Missing data blockread only
Gap within object (missing blocks in record)
Record on tape larger than requested
Compare error
Successive blocks missing across objects
Drive state not valid for command
Drive error
Drive communication timeout error
Drive unloaded
Unable to write - no CRC
Block to append to not found
Data synchronization error (read after write not happening)
Missing block(s) in current entity
Drive hardware write protected
Reposition-target not found
Long gap encountered (blank tape or no data encountered)
End of data or filler block encountered
File mark encountered
EDC error found by GPSP3 - FECC RAM bad
Beginning of medium encountered
EDC error
Hard write error - GPSP3 Underrun
Hard write error - Read Sync Timeout
Hard write error - Overshoot Append
Hard write error - CRC error
EDC error found by GPSP3 - FECC RAM ok
Timeout on command to medium changer
Medium changer UART error (overrun)
Medium changer response length error
Medium changer detected error
B-2 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Definition of Vendor Unique Sense Data Information
Table B-1 Internal Status Code (cont’d)
Dec
Hex
Description
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Invalid source slot
Invalid destination slot
Source slot empty
Destination slot full
Medium changer motion error
Medium changer/drive interface error
Medium changer/slot interface error
Medium changer mechanical error
Medium changer hardware error
Medium changer controller error
Unrecognized medium changer subcommand
Medium changer fatal error
Medium changer is in manual mode
68020 detected communication error w/ Servo area
68020 detected drive command timeout
Calibration failure
Bad tape format
Table B-2 Internal Status Bit Flags
Bit No.
Description
0
1-2
If set, cleaning light is on, otherwise it is off
Tape directory status:
• 0 Good status
• 1 Unknown status
• 2 Directory partially bad
• 3 Directory bad
Reserved
If set, the internal status byte (18) is in Bit Flags format; otherwise, it is a
code.
3-6
7
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem B-3
Definition of Vendor Unique Sense Data Information
B-4 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Appendix C
Sense Key Information
C.1 In This Appendix
Appendix C lists the sense key information.
•
No Sense (0):
00 01 Unexpected FM encountered
00 02 EOM encountered
00 04 BOM encountered
•
Recovered Error (1):
0A 00 Error Log Overflow
37 00 Rounded Parameter
3B 08 Repositioning error
44 C1 Internal Target failure, EEROM copy 1 area bad
44 C2 Internal Target failure, EEROM copy 2 area bad
44 C3 Internal Target failure, EEROM both copy areas bad
47 00 SCSI Parity Error
48 00 IDE Message Received
51 00 Erase failure
53 01 Unload tape failure
5B 02 Log Counter at Maximum
80 02 Cleaning Requested
•
Not Ready (2):
04 00 Unit Not Ready, Cause nonreportable
04 01 Unit Not Ready, Calibration in process
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem C-1
Sense Key Information
04 02 Unit Not Ready, Load command needed
04 03 Unit Not Ready, Manual Intervention needed
3A 00 Medium Not Present
3A 80 Medium Not Present, Cartridge Missing
5A 01 Operator Media Removal Request
•
Medium Error (3):
04 02 Unit Not Ready, Load command needed
0C 00 Write Error
11 00 Unrecovered Read Error
11 08 Unrecovered Read Error, Incomplete block read
14 00 Recorded Entity Not Found
15 02 Position error detected by read of medium
30 00 Can't Read Medium
3B 00 Sequential positioning error
3B 08 Repositioning error
51 00 Erase Failure
80 00 Calibration Error
80 01 Cleaning Required
81 00 Directory Read Error
•
Hardware Error (4):
08 00 LUN Communication Failure
08 01 LUN Communication Timeout Failure
15 01 Random Mechanical Positioning Error
21 01 Invalid Element Address
3B 08 Repositioning error
3B 0D Media Destination Element Full
3B 0E Media Source Element Empty
40 80 Diagnostic/POST failure, ROM EDC failure
40 81 Diagnostic/POST failure, RAM failure
C-2 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Sense Key Information
40 82 Diagnostic/POST failure, bad drive status
40 83 Diagnostic/POST failure, loader diags failure
40 84 Diagnostic/POST failure, POST soft failure
44 00 Internal Target Failure
44 80 Unexpected selection interrupt
44 83 SCSI chip gross error
44 84 Unexplained residue in TC registers
44 85 Immediate data transfer timeout
44 86 Insufficient CDB bytes
44 87 Disconnect/SDP sequence failed
44 88 Bus DMA transfer timeout
48 00 IDE Message received
47 00 SCSI Parity Error
51 00 Erase Failure
53 00 Media Load/Eject Failure
53 01 Unload tape failure
•
Illegal Request (5):
1A 00 Parameter List Length Error
20 00 Illegal Opcode
21 01 Invalid Element Address
24 00 Invalid CDB Field
24 81 Invalid mode on write buffer
24 82 Media in drive
24 84 Insufficient resources
24 86 Invalid offset
24 87 Invalid size
24 89 Image data over limit
24 8B Image/personality is bad
24 8C Not immediate command
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem C-3
Sense Key Information
24 8D Bad drive/server image EDC
24 8E Invalid personality for code update
24 8F Bad controller image EDC
25 00 Illegal LUN
26 00 Parameter List Error, invalid field
26 01 Parameter List Error, parameter not supported
26 02 Parameter List Error, parameter value invalid
39 00 Saving parameters not supported
3B 0D Media Destination Element Full
3B 0E Media Source Element Empty
3D 00 Invalid Bits in ID Message
53 02 Media Removal Prevented
82 00 Not allowed if not at BOT
•
Unit Attention (6):
28 00 Not Ready To Ready Transition
29 00 Reset occurred
2A 01 Mode Parameters changed
2A 02 Log Parameters changed
3F 01 Microcode has been changed
5B 01 Log Threshold condition met
•
Data Protected (7):
27 80 Hardware Write Protect
27 82 Data Safety Write Protect
•
Blank Check (8):
00 05 EOD Encountered
•
Command Aborted (Bh):
43 00 Message error
44 82 Command Complete sequence failure
45 00 Select/Reselect Failure
C-4 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Sense Key Information
47 00 SCSI parity error
48 00 IDE Message received
49 00 Invalid Message Error
4E 00 Overlapped commands attempted
•
Volume Overflow (Dh):
no additional sense code
•
Miscompare (Eh):
no additional sense code
_________________________ Note _____________________________
The Filemark/EOM/ILI bits may be set even though ASC/ASCQ = 00 00:
___________________________________________________________
(1) FM, EOM, ILI bit may be set with no sense key (0) and ASC/ASCQ = 00 00
(2) FM, EOM, ILI bit may be set with recovered error (1) and ASC/ASCQ = 00 00
(3) FM, EOM, ILI bit may be set with medium error (3) and ASC/ASCQ = 00 00
(4) EOM bit is set at Volume Overflow (Dh) and ASC/ASCQ = 00 00
(5) FM (byte 2, bit 7), EOM (byte 2, bit 6), and ILI (byte 2, bit 5) are fields in request
data. (See figure on REQUEST SENSE Data.)
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem C-5
Sense Key Information
C-6 DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Appendix D
EEROM Resident Bugcheck and Event
Logs
D.1 EEROM Packets (Last n Error Events)
The DLT2000 products keep certain error and event logs in semi-permanent nonvolatile memory (EEROM) on the ECM. There is room for a total of 14 such
information packets in EEROM, each consisting of 98 bytes (96 data bytes plus 2
control bytes) of information. Packets can be written for many different reasons, and
several packet types exist, but each must conform to the standard EEROM LOG
packet envelope as shown in Figure D-1.
The information logs are maintained as a circular buffer; a new entry will overwrite
the oldest existing entry. At any point in time, the most recent 14 logs are kept.
The EEROM information packets can be retrieved by Log Sense command with page
code 07h ((Last n Error Events page).
The packet type field defines the content as well as the format of the data portion of
the packet (refer to Table D-1). These packet types are further delineated in the
sections that follow. Please note that the byte offsets in the structure layout diagrams
that follow are referenced relative to the beginning of the 98 byte EEROM Log
envelope.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem D-1
EEROM Resident Bugcheck and Event Logs
Bits
7
00
0
Packet Type
01
96
1st packet byte
.
.
.
.
.
last packet byte
97
Packet Sequence Number
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Figure D-1 EEROM Log Area Layout
Table D-1 EEROM LOG Packet Types
Packet
Type
0
1
2
3
4
5
Purpose
Packet Empty
Bugcheck - Fatal System Crash
PO/ST (power on/self test) Failure
EVENT LOG - Generic event informational (non-fatal) data
CUP - Code Update Status Packet
Manufacturing DIAG results packet
D.2 Bugcheck Packets
Bugchecks occur because of some kind of software detected fatal failure. For
example, a hardware failure, or an internal system consistancy failure might cause a
bugcheck. These events cause Bugcheck packets to be written into EEROM. Refer to
Figure D-2 for the detailed packet layout. The most important information is the error
code. The more common ones are listed in Table D-2. A full listing is not given here
because most are not meaningful without a detailed knowledge of the firmware design.
Analysis of the other informtion saved in an EEROM Bugcheck log entry also
requires in-dpth internal firmware knowledge to interpret and attempt to determine if
the cause was external (e.g. a bad SCSI bus cable, improper termination, etc.), an
ECM or drive fault, or a firmware bug.
D-2 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
EEROM Resident Bugcheck and Event Logs
Bits
7
01
02
03
04
0
49
Up−Time
Stamp
68020 A0−A7 Registers
.
.
.
/
/
/
/
/
/
83
80
05
06
07
08
POH/PC Time
Stamp
09
10
81
82
83
84
Error Code
11
12
85
86
87
88
68020 Status Register
13
14
15
16
89
90
91
92
68020 PC Register
17
/
/
/
68020 D0−D7 Registers
.
.
.
/
/
/
System Context
ISR Return Address
68020 MSP Register
93
SW Major Revision
94
SW Minor Revision
95
96
Day Count
48
Figure D-2 Bugcheck LOG Packet Layout
Table D-2 Bugcheck Error Codes
Bugcheck
Code
E204
EE01
EE02
EE03
EE04
EE05
EE06
EE08
EE09
EE0D
F202
Meaning and Possible Cause
nexpected Timer2 Interrupt- possible ECM fault
Spurious Non-Maskable Interrupt- possible ECM fault
Spurious 8254 Timer Interrupt- possible ECM fault
Spurious Level 5 interrupt (GPSP)- possible ECM fault
Spurious Drive Comm Interrupt- possible ECM fault
Spurious Loader Comm Interrupt- possible ECM fault
Spurious Diag Comm Interrupt- possible ECM fault
Watch Dog Expiration- SCSI bus may have lost termination,
or ECM is constantly receiving non-tape commands.
Spurious Power Fail Signal received- possible power supply
fault
Spurious Level 6 interrupt (GPSP)- possible ECM fault
Loader time out-possible media loader fault
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem D-3
EEROM Resident Bugcheck and Event Logs
D.3 PO/ST failure packets
PO/ST failure packets are stored whenever the Power-On /Self-Test logic detects a
failure of any kind. Each failure is encoded as a 4-byte vector. In some cases, multiple
vectors may be stored, as shown in Figure D-3.
Bits
7
01
02
03
04
0
POH/PC Time Stamp
05
06
07
08
POST Last Fail Vector
09
10
11
12
Secondary POST Vector
13
14
15
16
Tertiary POST Vector
17
/
/
/
reserved
.
.
.
/
/
/
96
Figure D-3 POST LOG Packet Layout
D.4 Event Log packets
Event logs are non fatal and can occur to log error or informative information
regarding significant events. The general envelope for these packets is shown in
Figure D-4. Refer to Table D-3 for a list of the existing error codes, as well as where
to refer for additional information.
D-4 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
EEROM Resident Bugcheck and Event Logs
Bits
7
01
02
03
04
0
Up−Time
Stamp
05
06
07
08
POH/PC Time
Stamp
09
10
Error Code
11
SW Major Revision
12
SW Minor Revision
13
/
/
/
/
/
92
1st event log byte
.
.
.
.
.
last event log byte
93
94
/
/
/
/
/
Day Count
Figure D-4 EVENT LOG Packet Layout
Table D-3 Event Log Codes
Event Log Code
0xA400
0xA401
0xA402
0xA403
0xA407
0xA408
Meaning
Hard Read Error Log
Hard Write Error Log
Drive Error Log
Loader Error Log
Directory Read Fail
Directory Write Fail
D.4.1 Directory Failure Event Logs
These event logs are written when a directory read or write
request fails for any reason. Refer to Figure D-5 and the sections that follow.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem D-5
EEROM Resident Bugcheck and Event Logs
Bits
13
7
0
Saved Max Overwrites
14
Saved Max ReReads
15
Saved Max ReWrites
16
17
18
19
20
Dir Called Mode
Tape Format (when called)
New Tape Format
21
Flags
22
Primary Status
23
Secondary Status
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
reserved
Missing Block Count
Total Expected LBNs
Servo EOT Address
Unique Media ID
CR−MSG Buffer Address
Figure D-5 Directory Failure Event Logs
Saved Overwrites/ReReads/ReWrites
These are fields are used as temporaries and have no use in interpreting these packets.
Dir Called Mode
A code which specifies the original reason for the directory call. A value of 1
indicates a directory READ (on load); a value of 2 indicates a directory WRITE (on
UNLOAD); a value of 3 indicates a directory WRITE (on WRITE from BOT).
Tape Format (Called/New)
These fields contain the TMSCP values for the tape format both prior to and after the
directory operation.
Flags
A bit mapped field which provides additional status information. Refer to Table D-4.
Table D-4 SET DIR_TAB "Directory Event Log Flags
Bit Mask
Meaning
D-6 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
EEROM Resident Bugcheck and Event Logs
0x01
0x02
0x04
0x08
0x10
0x20
0x40
0x80
READ on Load operation complete
Inhibit further WRITEs unless WRITE from BOT
LBN 0 was found intact
Directory WRITE failed
Tape FORMAT Mismatch
Event Log Generated
Tape Format Unknown
Reserved
D.5 Primary Status/Secondary Status
Table D-5 Directory Event Statuses
Primary
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
Secondary
0
1
10
11
12
20
21
22
30
31
32
33
40
41
42
Meaning
Status Unknown
No Directory - 50/70 Format
Inconsistent Formats
Wrong Format
Reserved Field Validation Failed
Read Sync Time Out
No directory Blocks Read
Not all Directory Blocks Present
SyncLock Failure
Revision Level Mismatch
Directory Verify Failed
Directory Initialized (WRITE from BOT)
Empty Directory
Partial Directory
Complete_Directory
Missing Block Count
The number of missing directory LBNs.
Expected LBNs
The total number of directory LBNs expected.
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem D-7
EEROM Resident Bugcheck and Event Logs
Servo EOT Address
Servo version of tape length.
Unique Media ID
The Unique Media Identification number, stored on the media.
CR_MSG Address
The address of the CR-MSG request block from TDS.
D.6 Code Update (CUP) Status Packet
The CUP status packet is written after every code update attempt regardless of its
status. Refer to Figure D-6 for the overall packet layout.
The "Old 68020" and "Old Servo" Sections contain informa- tion about the code
images that exist in the Flash memories for those areas before the update is performed.
The "New 68020" and "New Servo" sections contain information about the new
images. The fields within these sections are self explanatory. Refer to Table D-6 and
Table D-7 for a description of the statuses.
D-8 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
EEROM Resident Bugcheck and Event Logs
Bits
01
02
03
04
7
0
POH/PC Time Stamp
05
68020 Fw Update Status
06
Servo Fw Update Status
07
08
reserved
09
Old 68020 Code Version
33
New 68020 Code Version
10
Old 68020 Code Sub−revision
34
New 68020 Code SubRev
35
New 68020 Rel Flag
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Old 68020 Rel Flag
reserved
Old 68020 Code EDC value
Old 68020 Code Time Stamp
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
reserved
New 68020 Code EDC value
New 68020 Code Time Stamp
25
Old 68020 Code Pers
49
New 68020 Code Pers
26
Old 68020 Code Pers SubRev
50
New 68020 Code Pers SubRev
27
28
29
30
31
32
reserved
Old Servo Code Version
reserved
Old Servo Code EDC value
51
52
53
54
55
56
reserved
New Servo Code Version
reserved
New Servo Code EDC value
Figure D-6 Code Update (CUP) LOG Packet Layou
DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem D-9
EEROM Resident Bugcheck and Event Logs
Table D-6 68020 Code Update Status
Status
0
1
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Meaning
No Update Operation Performed
Code Update Operation Successful
Personality Lockout
Image EDC Check Failed
Bad Image
Write to FLASH Memory Failed
Erase of FLASH Memory Failed
FLASH Memory Clear (zero) Failed
Invalid Image Compressed)
Table D-7 Servo Code Update Status
Status
0
1
2
10
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Meaning
No Update Operation Performed
Code Update Operation Successful
Servo Update Not Necessary
Servo Code Update Inhibited
Servo Image Validation Failed
Bad Initial Poll
Servo Family Mismatch
Servo FLASH Erase Failed
Erase Time Out
Image Transmit Failed
Bad Final Poll
Invalid Final Code Check
BOT Time Out
Invalid_Lamp_Status
D-10 DLT2000/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Index
A
AC Power Cord, A-4
Acoustic noise emissions, A-22
Altitude
environmental specifications, A-14
ATTENTION signal responses, 8-5
Automatic mode, 5-5, 5-7
B
BACKUP command
Automatic mode, 5-7
Backup failures, 6-3
Beeper, 3-11
Bugcheck Packets, D-2
BUS FREE, 8-7
BUS PARITY ERRORS, 8-7
Bus termination, 2-7
Button functions, conditions, 6-2
Button operation
conditions for, 6-3
Buttons, operating, 4-9
C
Cables
connecting, 2-5
SCSI signal cable, 2-6
Capacity, 1-2
Cartridge, 3-17, 4-20
acclimatization, 3-26
checking the tape leader, 6-4
ejection, 5-19
guidelines for care, 3-26
handling, 3-26
inserting into magazine, 5-20
labeling, 3-26
loading, 3-20, 5-17
positioning the write-protect switch, 3-17
preserving, 3-26
removing from the magazine, 5-23
storage, 3-26
unloading, 3-24, 5-18
using a, 3-22
using cleaning tape cartridge, 3-23
write-protect switch, 5-20
Cartridge insert/release handle
when to operate, 3-11
Cartridge, before loading, 4-21
Cartridge, insert, 4-23
Cartridge, loading into drive, 4-27
Cartridge, removing, 4-25
Cartridge, unloading from the drive, 4-28
Cartridge, write-protect switch, 4-21
Cleaning tape cartridge
using, 3-23
Cleaning tape cartridge,when to use, 4-29
Code Update (CUP) Status Packet, A-8
Code update mode, 4-19
Combined header and data mode, 8-94
Commands
sequential-access device commands, 8-15
Supported SCSI-2 medium changer device,
8-131
CompacTape Recording Media Specifications,
A-26
CompacTape Spec’s, A-26
Compaction, 1-2
Compatibility, 1-2
Conducted emissions, A-19
Conducted susceptibility, A-21
Configuration, 2-1
DLT2000 Tabletop, 2-4
guidelines, 2-4
Configuration guidelines, 4-7
Configure
DLT2700, 5-2
Configure the DLT2500 mini-library, 4-7
Connecting the SCSI Signal, 4-7
Connection
power cord, 2-7
Control byte, 8-14
Control mode, 8-78
Control Mode Page, 8-51
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem-1
Index
Controls
cartridge insert/release handle, 3-11
description, 3-11
front panel, 3-10
Unload button, 3-11
DLT2500 Controller error description, 6-5
DLT2500 Drive error description, 6-5
DLT2500 Error conditions, 6-5
DLT2500 Errors, clearing for loader, drive,
controller, or unknown, 6-6
DLT2500 Errors, clearing for magazine, 6-5
DLT2500 Loader error description, 6-5
DLT2500 Magazine
status of, 6-5
DLT2500 Magazine error, 6-5
DLT2500 Mini-library operating procedure, 41
DLT2500 Mini-library, configure, install, 4-7
DLT2500 Unknown error description, 6-6
DLT2500xt Loader timing characteristics
Loader performance specifications, A-12
DLT2700
Configuring, 5-2
overview, 5-1
DLT2700 Controller fault description, 6-8
DLT2700 Drive fault description, 6-8
DLT2700 Error conditions, 6-6
DLT2700 Loader fault description, 6-8
DLT2700 Loader reset, 6-8
DLT2700 Loader timing characteristics
Loader performance specifications, A-12
DLT2700 Magazine
status of, 6-6
DLT2700 Magzine Error, 6-6
Download microcode, 8-127
and save, 8-127
Drive inquiry response, 8-18
Drive reliability, A-25
Drive reliability factors, A-25
Drive timing characteristics
Drive performance specifications, A-11
D
Data cache, 8-4
Data compression, 8-82
Data mode, 8-94
Data protection, 3-19, 4-21
Data transfer, 8-1
Data Transfer Element Status Page, 8-137
Data transfer rate, 1-2
Datacompression, 8-53
Default operating modes, 4-17
Definition of Vendor Unique Sense Data
Information, B-1
Density
selecting, 3-7, 5-9
Density select mode, 4-16, 4-18
Density select, front panel, 4-15
Density selection, 4-14
Description
DLT2000 tape drive, A-2
Descriptor mode, 8-94
Design life, A-25
Device Capabilities
page, 8-138
Device configuration, 8-55, 8-80
Diagram
loading a cartrige, 3-21
unloading a cartridge, 3-24
write-protect switch, 3-18
Disable
Parity checking, 2-5
Disabling
parity checking, 3-2, 5-3
Disconnect/Reconnect, 8-58
page, 8-84
Display messages, 4-11
Display Mode button, 4-10
DLT2000
rear panel, 2-6
troubleshooting, 2-10
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 overview, 1-1
E
EEROM Packets (Last n Error Events), D-1
EEROM Resident Bugcheck and Event Logs,
D-1
EEROM vendor unique page, 8-63, 8-88
Eject button, 5-17
cartridge in drive, 5-19
no cartridge in drive, 5-19
Electromagnetic emission requirements, A-24
2-DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Index
I
Electromagnetic emissions, A-19
Electromagnetic interference (EMI), A-19
Element address assignment
page, 8-140
Element status data header, 8-134
Embedded Diagnostics, 1-3
EMI
electromagnetic interference, A-19
ERASE, 8-16
Error events, 8-41
ESD failure level limits, A-22
Event Log packets, D-4
Directory Failure Event Logs, D-5
Indicators
beeper, 3-11
description, 3-11
front panel, 3-10
how to interpret, 3-14
INITIALIZE ELEMENT STATUS, 8-132
INQUIRY, 8-17
Insert cartridge, magazine, 4-23
Install DLT2500 mini-library, 4-7
Installation, 2-1
before you begin, 3-1
before you start, 2-1
preparation, 2-1
setup, 2-2
site guidelines, 2-2
site setup, 2-2
subsystem, 2-4
testing, 2-8
Installation testing, 4-8
Internal Status Code, A-1
F
Failure level limits
ESD, A-22
Fast transient voltage
data cables, A-21
power cables, A-21
Firmware
update, 1-3
Firmware update, 7-1
Firmware update tape, creating, 7-4
Firmware update tape, creating on UN*X, 7-4
Firmware update, on DLT2500 loader, 7-10
Firmware update, on DLT2700 loader, 7-14
Firmware update, on drive DLT2000, 7-5
Front panel controls, 3-10
Front panel indicators, 3-10
Front panel, density select, 4-15
G
J
Jumpers
setting TRM ENB/TRM PWR, 3-5
K
Key lock, 4-13
Key lock,OCP locked, 4-13
Keylock, OCP unlocked, 4-13
L
Guidelines
DLT2700 configuration, 5-3
for configuration, 2-4
for installation, 2-2
H
Header and data mode, 8-127
High energy transient voltage
power cables, A-21
Host selection, density, 4-16
Humidity
Environmental specifications, A-13
Load/Unload button, 4-10, 5-17
DLT2700 reset, 6-8
reset function, 4-10, 5-12
Loading a cartrige
diagram to follow, 3-21
procedure, 3-20
Loading cartridge into drive, 4-27
LOAD-UNLOAD, 8-25
LOCATE, 8-27
LOG SELECT, 8-28, 8-30
LOG SENSE, 8-34
Logical Unit Numbers
See LUNs, 8-2
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem-3
Index
Low-level conducted interference, A-21
LUNs, 8-2
M
Magazine, 5-20
removing from receiver, 5-23
restoration into receiver, 5-23
Magazine door, open, 4-28
Magazine, description, 4-22
Magazine, installing, 4-26
Magazine, removing from mini-library, 4-26
Magnetic radiated susceptibility, A-20
Manual mode, 5-5, 5-7
Media, 1-2
Media loader inquiry response, 8-24
Medium Changer
considerations, 8-113
Medium Changer Considerations, 8-100, 8122
Medium Partition, 8-60
page, 8-85
Messages, display, 4-11
Mini-library, introduction, 4-6
MODE SELECT, 8-46, 8-47, 8-50
changeable parameters, 8-69
Mode Select key
Automatic mode, 5-5
description, 5-5
Manual mode, 5-5
OCP Disabled mode, 5-5
Service mode, 5-8
MODE SENSE, 8-70
pages, 8-77
parameter list, 8-73
MODE SENSE/SELECT, 8-138
Mode, normal, 4-17
MOVE MEDIUM, 8-143
N
Nominal tape tension
performance specifications, A-11
Nonoperating Shock, A-16
Nonoperating Vibration, A-16
Normal mode, 4-17
O
OCP, 4-9
OCP Disabled mode, 5-5
OCP, Disabled, 4-13
OCP, enabled, 4-13
OCP, locked, 4-13
OCP, unlocked, 4-13
Opcode
ERASE (19h), 8-16
INITIALIZE ELEMENT STATUS (07h),
8-132
INQUIRY (12h), 8-17
LOAD-UNLOAD (1Bh), 8-25
LOCATE (2Bh), 8-27
LOG SELECT (4Ch), 8-28
LOG SENSE (4Dh), 8-34
MODE SELECT (15h), 8-46
MODE SENSE (1Ah /5Ah), 8-70
MOVE MEDIUM (A5h), 8-143
PREVENT/ALLOW MEDIUM
REMOVAL (1Eh), 8-89
READ (08h), 8-90
READ BLOCK LIMITS (05h), 8-92
READ BUFFER (3Ch), 8-93
READ ELEMENT STATUS (B8h), 8-133
READ POSITION (34h), 8-96
RECEIVE DIAGNOSTICS RESULTS
(1Ch), 8-99
RELEASE UNIT (17h), 8-100
REQUEST SENSE (03h), 8-101
RESERVE UNIT (16h), 8-112
REWIND (01h), 8-114
SEND DIAGNOSTIC (1Dh), 8-115
SPACE (11h), 8-120
TEST UNIT READY (00h), 8-122
VERIFY (13h), 8-123
WRITE (0Ah), 8-124
WRITE BUFFER (3Bh), 8-126
WRITE FILEMARKS (10h), 8-129
Open button, 4-10
Open button,cartridge in drive, 4-28
Opening magazine door, 4-28
Operating modes, 5-5
Operating modes, default, 4-17
Operating procedure
DLT2000 tape drive, 3-1
4-DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Index
DLT2700 mini-library, 5-1
Operating procedure, DLT2500 mini-library,
4-1
Operating Shock, A-15
Operating Vibration, A-15
Operations
initiator/target, 8-2
Operator Control Panel, 4-9
Operator Control Panel (OCP), 4-10
Overview, DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700, 1-1
disabling, 3-2
Performance specification
DLT2000 tape drive, A-11
PO/ST failure packets, D-4
POST, 5-15
after you run it, 2-9
running, 2-8
POST, drive, 3-12
POST, events, 4-8
Power connectors, 3-6
Power cord connection, 2-7
Power problems, 6-8
Power-on, 5-15, 8-3
Power-on range
environmental specifications, A-13
Power-on self-test, 4-8
status of OCP indicators, 5-15
Power-on self-test, drive, 3-12
PREVENT/ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL,
8-89
Primary Status/Secondary Status, D-7
Problem resolutions, 6-1
conditions to check, 6-8
DLT2700 reset, 6-8
P
Page
Control Mode Page (0Ah), 8-51, 8-78
Data Compression Page (0Fh), 8-53, 8-82
Data Transfer Element Status Page, 8-137
Device Capabilities Page (1Fh), 8-138
Device Configuration Page (10h ), 8-55
Device Configuration Page (10h), 8-80
Disconnect/Reconnect Page (02h), 8-58, 884
EEROM Vendor Unique Page (3Eh), 8-63,
8-88
Element Address Assignment Page (1Dh),
8-140
Last n Error Events Page (07h), 8-41
Medium Partition Page (11h, 8-60
Medium Partition Page (11h), 8-85
Medium Transport Element Status Page, 8135
MODE SELECT Pages, 8-50
MODE SENSE Pages, 8-77
Read/Write Compression Ratio Page
Format (32h), 8-42
Read/Write Error Log Page (Page 2 and 3),
8-38
Read/Write Error Recovery Page (01h), 861, 8-86
Storage Element Status Page, 8-136
Supported Pages Log Page (Page 0), 8-37
Transport Geometry Parameters Page
(1Eh), 8-142
Vital Product Data Pages, 8-22
Page format, 8-37
Parity checking
disable, 5-3
R
Radiated emissions, A-20
Radiated susceptibility, A-21
Rate
data transfer, 1-2
READ, 8-90
READ BLOCK LIMITS, 8-92
READ BUFFER, 8-93
READ POSITION, 8-96, 8-97
Read/Write Error Log SENSE, 8-38
Read/Write error recovery, 8-61
page, 8-86
RECEIVE DIAGNOSTICS RESULTS, 8-99
Receiver, 5-23
Regulatory requirements, A-24
RELEASE UNIT, 8-100
Removing cartridge, 4-25
REQUES SENSE (03h), 8-101
RESERVE UNIT, 8-112
Reset, 6-8
Load/Unload button, 4-10, 5-12
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem-5
Index
REWIND, 8-114
Storage ranges
environmental specifications, A-14
Subsystem
installation, 2-4
Supported SCSI-2 medium changer device
commands, 8-131
Switch functions, density select, 4-18
Switch functions, normal mode, 4-17
Switch functions, SCSI ID Select, 4-19
S
Safety requirements, A-24
SCSI
ATTENTION signal responses, 8-5
BUS FREE, 8-7
BUS PARITY ERRORS, 8-7
bus phases, 8-4
bus reset, 8-3
functionality, 8-4
general operations, 8-1
interface overview, 8-1
message system, 8-8
STATUS phase, 8-5
tape drive commands, 8-14
SCSI bus
terminating, 2-7
SCSI cable, 3-6
SCSI commands, 4-6
SCSI ID
changing, 2-5, 3-4, 5-3
SCSI ID Select Mode, 4-19
SCSI ID, setting, 4-13
SCSI interface chapter, 8-1
Select button, 4-10
Select button, operation, 4-27
Selecting Density, 3-7, 4-14, 5-9
SEND DIAGNOSTIC, 8-115
Sense Information Format, 8-102
Sense Key Information, C-1
SENSE page, 8-42
Sequential-access device commands, 8-15
Service mode, 5-8
Setting SCSI ID, 4-13
Shipment ranges
environmental specifications, A-14
Shock requirements
environmental requirements, A-16
Side view, A-10
Slot Select button, 5-17
operation, 5-17
SPACE, 8-120
STATUS phase, 8-5
Storage element status
page, 8-136
T
Tape Cartridge, 3-17, 4-20
Tape Cartridge, positioning the write-protect
switch, 4-20
Tape drive
SCSI commands, 8-14
Tape leader, 6-4
Tape, writing to, 8-4
Technical Specifications, A-1
Temperature
Environmental specifications, A-13
TEST UNIT READY, 8-122
Testing installation, 4-8
Top View, A-9
Transport geometry parameters
page, 8-142
Troubleshooting
DLT2000, 2-10
Troubleshooting guide, 6-1
U
Unit Attention condition, 8-3
Unload button, 3-11
Unloading a cartridge
diagram to follow, 3-24
procedure, 3-24
Unloading cartridge from the drive, 4-28
Updating
firmware, 1-3
Updating firmware, 7-1
Using a cartrige, 3-22
V
Vendor Unique InquiryVendor Unique
Inquiry, 8-21
6-DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
Index
VERIFY, 8-123
Vibration and shock requirements
environmental specifications, A-15
Vital product data pages, 8-22
W
WRITE, 8-124
WRITE BUFFER, 8-126
Write data, 8-127
WRITE FILEMARKS, 8-129
Write-protect switch, 3-17, 4-20, 4-21, 5-20
diagram, 3-18, 4-20
positioning, 3-17
write-enabling, 3-19
write-protecting, 3-19
Write-protect switch, positioning, 4-20
Write-protect switch,write-enabling, 4-21
Write-protect switch,write-protecting, 4-21
DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem-7
Index
8-DLT2000/DLT2500/DLT2700 Cartridge Tape Subsystem

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement